\input texinfo @c %**start of header @setfilename coreutils.info @settitle GNU Coreutils @documentencoding UTF-8 @allowcodebreaks false @c %**end of header @include version.texi @include constants.texi @c Define new indices. @defcodeindex op @defcodeindex fl @c Put everything in one index (arbitrarily chosen to be the concept index). @syncodeindex fl cp @syncodeindex fn cp @syncodeindex ky cp @syncodeindex op cp @syncodeindex pg cp @syncodeindex vr cp @dircategory Basics @direntry * Coreutils: (coreutils). Core GNU (file, text, shell) utilities. * Common options: (coreutils)Common options. * File permissions: (coreutils)File permissions. Access modes. * Date input formats: (coreutils)Date input formats. @end direntry @c FIXME: the following need documentation @c * [: (coreutils)[ invocation. File/string tests. @c * pinky: (coreutils)pinky invocation. FIXME. @dircategory Individual utilities @direntry * arch: (coreutils)arch invocation. Print machine hardware name. * b2sum: (coreutils)b2sum invocation. Print or check BLAKE2 digests. * base32: (coreutils)base32 invocation. Base32 encode/decode data. * base64: (coreutils)base64 invocation. Base64 encode/decode data. * basename: (coreutils)basename invocation. Strip directory and suffix. * cat: (coreutils)cat invocation. Concatenate and write files. * chcon: (coreutils)chcon invocation. Change SELinux CTX of files. * chgrp: (coreutils)chgrp invocation. Change file groups. * chmod: (coreutils)chmod invocation. Change access permissions. * chown: (coreutils)chown invocation. Change file owners and groups. * chroot: (coreutils)chroot invocation. Specify the root directory. * cksum: (coreutils)cksum invocation. Print POSIX CRC checksum. * comm: (coreutils)comm invocation. Compare sorted files by line. * cp: (coreutils)cp invocation. Copy files. * csplit: (coreutils)csplit invocation. Split by context. * cut: (coreutils)cut invocation. Print selected parts of lines. * date: (coreutils)date invocation. Print/set system date and time. * dd: (coreutils)dd invocation. Copy and convert a file. * df: (coreutils)df invocation. Report file system disk usage. * dir: (coreutils)dir invocation. List directories briefly. * dircolors: (coreutils)dircolors invocation. Color setup for ls. * dirname: (coreutils)dirname invocation. Strip last file name component. * du: (coreutils)du invocation. Report on disk usage. * echo: (coreutils)echo invocation. Print a line of text. * env: (coreutils)env invocation. Modify the environment. * expand: (coreutils)expand invocation. Convert tabs to spaces. * expr: (coreutils)expr invocation. Evaluate expressions. * factor: (coreutils)factor invocation. Print prime factors * false: (coreutils)false invocation. Do nothing, unsuccessfully. * fmt: (coreutils)fmt invocation. Reformat paragraph text. * fold: (coreutils)fold invocation. Wrap long input lines. * groups: (coreutils)groups invocation. Print group names a user is in. * head: (coreutils)head invocation. Output the first part of files. * hostid: (coreutils)hostid invocation. Print numeric host identifier. * hostname: (coreutils)hostname invocation. Print or set system name. * id: (coreutils)id invocation. Print user identity. * install: (coreutils)install invocation. Copy files and set attributes. * join: (coreutils)join invocation. Join lines on a common field. * kill: (coreutils)kill invocation. Send a signal to processes. * link: (coreutils)link invocation. Make hard links between files. * ln: (coreutils)ln invocation. Make links between files. * logname: (coreutils)logname invocation. Print current login name. * ls: (coreutils)ls invocation. List directory contents. * md5sum: (coreutils)md5sum invocation. Print or check MD5 digests. * mkdir: (coreutils)mkdir invocation. Create directories. * mkfifo: (coreutils)mkfifo invocation. Create FIFOs (named pipes). * mknod: (coreutils)mknod invocation. Create special files. * mktemp: (coreutils)mktemp invocation. Create temporary files. * mv: (coreutils)mv invocation. Rename files. * nice: (coreutils)nice invocation. Modify niceness. * nl: (coreutils)nl invocation. Number lines and write files. * nohup: (coreutils)nohup invocation. Immunize to hangups. * nproc: (coreutils)nproc invocation. Print the number of processors. * numfmt: (coreutils)numfmt invocation. Reformat numbers. * od: (coreutils)od invocation. Dump files in octal, etc. * paste: (coreutils)paste invocation. Merge lines of files. * pathchk: (coreutils)pathchk invocation. Check file name portability. * pr: (coreutils)pr invocation. Paginate or columnate files. * printenv: (coreutils)printenv invocation. Print environment variables. * printf: (coreutils)printf invocation. Format and print data. * ptx: (coreutils)ptx invocation. Produce permuted indexes. * pwd: (coreutils)pwd invocation. Print working directory. * readlink: (coreutils)readlink invocation. Print referent of a symlink. * realpath: (coreutils)realpath invocation. Print resolved file names. * rm: (coreutils)rm invocation. Remove files. * rmdir: (coreutils)rmdir invocation. Remove empty directories. * runcon: (coreutils)runcon invocation. Run in specified SELinux CTX. * seq: (coreutils)seq invocation. Print numeric sequences * sha1sum: (coreutils)sha1sum invocation. Print or check SHA-1 digests. * sha2: (coreutils)sha2 utilities. Print or check SHA-2 digests. * shred: (coreutils)shred invocation. Remove files more securely. * shuf: (coreutils)shuf invocation. Shuffling text files. * sleep: (coreutils)sleep invocation. Delay for a specified time. * sort: (coreutils)sort invocation. Sort text files. * split: (coreutils)split invocation. Split into pieces. * stat: (coreutils)stat invocation. Report file(system) status. * stdbuf: (coreutils)stdbuf invocation. Modify stdio buffering. * stty: (coreutils)stty invocation. Print/change terminal settings. * sum: (coreutils)sum invocation. Print traditional checksum. * sync: (coreutils)sync invocation. Synchronize memory to disk. * tac: (coreutils)tac invocation. Reverse files. * tail: (coreutils)tail invocation. Output the last part of files. * tee: (coreutils)tee invocation. Redirect to multiple files. * test: (coreutils)test invocation. File/string tests. * timeout: (coreutils)timeout invocation. Run with time limit. * touch: (coreutils)touch invocation. Change file timestamps. * tr: (coreutils)tr invocation. Translate characters. * true: (coreutils)true invocation. Do nothing, successfully. * truncate: (coreutils)truncate invocation. Shrink/extend size of a file. * tsort: (coreutils)tsort invocation. Topological sort. * tty: (coreutils)tty invocation. Print terminal name. * uname: (coreutils)uname invocation. Print system information. * unexpand: (coreutils)unexpand invocation. Convert spaces to tabs. * uniq: (coreutils)uniq invocation. Uniquify files. * unlink: (coreutils)unlink invocation. Removal via unlink(2). * uptime: (coreutils)uptime invocation. Print uptime and load. * users: (coreutils)users invocation. Print current user names. * vdir: (coreutils)vdir invocation. List directories verbosely. * wc: (coreutils)wc invocation. Line, word, and byte counts. * who: (coreutils)who invocation. Print who is logged in. * whoami: (coreutils)whoami invocation. Print effective user ID. * yes: (coreutils)yes invocation. Print a string indefinitely. @end direntry @copying This manual documents version @value{VERSION} of the GNU core utilities, including the standard programs for text and file manipulation. Copyright @copyright{} 1994-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. @quotation Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''. @end quotation @end copying @titlepage @title GNU @code{Coreutils} @subtitle Core GNU utilities @subtitle for version @value{VERSION}, @value{UPDATED} @author David MacKenzie et al. @page @vskip 0pt plus 1filll @insertcopying @end titlepage @shortcontents @contents @ifnottex @node Top @top GNU Coreutils @insertcopying @end ifnottex @cindex core utilities @cindex text utilities @cindex shell utilities @cindex file utilities @menu * Introduction:: Caveats, overview, and authors * Common options:: Common options * Output of entire files:: cat tac nl od base32 base64 * Formatting file contents:: fmt pr fold * Output of parts of files:: head tail split csplit * Summarizing files:: wc sum cksum b2sum md5sum sha1sum sha2 * Operating on sorted files:: sort shuf uniq comm ptx tsort * Operating on fields:: cut paste join * Operating on characters:: tr expand unexpand * Directory listing:: ls dir vdir dircolors * Basic operations:: cp dd install mv rm shred * Special file types:: mkdir rmdir unlink mkfifo mknod ln link readlink * Changing file attributes:: chgrp chmod chown touch * Disk usage:: df du stat sync truncate * Printing text:: echo printf yes * Conditions:: false true test expr * Redirection:: tee * File name manipulation:: dirname basename pathchk mktemp realpath * Working context:: pwd stty printenv tty * User information:: id logname whoami groups users who * System context:: date arch nproc uname hostname hostid uptime * SELinux context:: chcon runcon * Modified command invocation:: chroot env nice nohup stdbuf timeout * Process control:: kill * Delaying:: sleep * Numeric operations:: factor numfmt seq * File permissions:: Access modes * File timestamps:: File timestamp issues * Date input formats:: Specifying date strings * Opening the software toolbox:: The software tools philosophy * GNU Free Documentation License:: Copying and sharing this manual * Concept index:: General index @detailmenu --- The Detailed Node Listing --- Common Options * Exit status:: Indicating program success or failure * Backup options:: Backup options * Block size:: Block size * Floating point:: Floating point number representation * Signal specifications:: Specifying signals * Disambiguating names and IDs:: chgrp, chown, chroot, id: user and group syntax * Random sources:: Sources of random data * Target directory:: Target directory * Trailing slashes:: Trailing slashes * Traversing symlinks:: Traversing symlinks to directories * Treating / specially:: Treating / specially * Standards conformance:: Standards conformance * Multi-call invocation:: Multi-call program invocation Output of entire files * cat invocation:: Concatenate and write files * tac invocation:: Concatenate and write files in reverse * nl invocation:: Number lines and write files * od invocation:: Write files in octal or other formats * base32 invocation:: Transform data into printable data * base64 invocation:: Transform data into printable data Formatting file contents * fmt invocation:: Reformat paragraph text * pr invocation:: Paginate or columnate files for printing * fold invocation:: Wrap input lines to fit in specified width Output of parts of files * head invocation:: Output the first part of files * tail invocation:: Output the last part of files * split invocation:: Split a file into fixed-size pieces * csplit invocation:: Split a file into context-determined pieces Summarizing files * wc invocation:: Print newline, word, and byte counts * sum invocation:: Print checksum and block counts * cksum invocation:: Print CRC checksum and byte counts * b2sum invocation:: Print or check BLAKE2 digests * md5sum invocation:: Print or check MD5 digests * sha1sum invocation:: Print or check SHA-1 digests * sha2 utilities:: Print or check SHA-2 digests Operating on sorted files * sort invocation:: Sort text files * shuf invocation:: Shuffle text files * uniq invocation:: Uniquify files * comm invocation:: Compare two sorted files line by line * ptx invocation:: Produce a permuted index of file contents * tsort invocation:: Topological sort @command{ptx}: Produce permuted indexes * General options in ptx:: Options which affect general program behavior * Charset selection in ptx:: Underlying character set considerations * Input processing in ptx:: Input fields, contexts, and keyword selection * Output formatting in ptx:: Types of output format, and sizing the fields * Compatibility in ptx:: The GNU extensions to @command{ptx} Operating on fields * cut invocation:: Print selected parts of lines * paste invocation:: Merge lines of files * join invocation:: Join lines on a common field Operating on characters * tr invocation:: Translate, squeeze, and/or delete characters * expand invocation:: Convert tabs to spaces * unexpand invocation:: Convert spaces to tabs @command{tr}: Translate, squeeze, and/or delete characters * Character sets:: Specifying sets of characters * Translating:: Changing one set of characters to another * Squeezing and deleting:: Removing characters Directory listing * ls invocation:: List directory contents * dir invocation:: Briefly list directory contents * vdir invocation:: Verbosely list directory contents * dircolors invocation:: Color setup for @command{ls} @command{ls}: List directory contents * Which files are listed:: Which files are listed * What information is listed:: What information is listed * Sorting the output:: Sorting the output * Details about version sort:: More details about version sort * General output formatting:: General output formatting * Formatting the file names:: Formatting the file names Basic operations * cp invocation:: Copy files and directories * dd invocation:: Convert and copy a file * install invocation:: Copy files and set attributes * mv invocation:: Move (rename) files * rm invocation:: Remove files or directories * shred invocation:: Remove files more securely Special file types * link invocation:: Make a hard link via the link syscall * ln invocation:: Make links between files * mkdir invocation:: Make directories * mkfifo invocation:: Make FIFOs (named pipes) * mknod invocation:: Make block or character special files * readlink invocation:: Print value of a symlink or canonical file name * rmdir invocation:: Remove empty directories * unlink invocation:: Remove files via unlink syscall Changing file attributes * chown invocation:: Change file owner and group * chgrp invocation:: Change group ownership * chmod invocation:: Change access permissions * touch invocation:: Change file timestamps Disk usage * df invocation:: Report file system disk space usage * du invocation:: Estimate file space usage * stat invocation:: Report file or file system status * sync invocation:: Synchronize cached writes to persistent storage * truncate invocation:: Shrink or extend the size of a file Printing text * echo invocation:: Print a line of text * printf invocation:: Format and print data * yes invocation:: Print a string until interrupted Conditions * false invocation:: Do nothing, unsuccessfully * true invocation:: Do nothing, successfully * test invocation:: Check file types and compare values * expr invocation:: Evaluate expressions @command{test}: Check file types and compare values * File type tests:: File type tests * Access permission tests:: Access permission tests * File characteristic tests:: File characteristic tests * String tests:: String tests * Numeric tests:: Numeric tests @command{expr}: Evaluate expression * String expressions:: + : match substr index length * Numeric expressions:: + - * / % * Relations for expr:: | & < <= = == != >= > * Examples of expr:: Examples of using @command{expr} Redirection * tee invocation:: Redirect output to multiple files or processes File name manipulation * basename invocation:: Strip directory and suffix from a file name * dirname invocation:: Strip last file name component * pathchk invocation:: Check file name validity and portability * mktemp invocation:: Create temporary file or directory * realpath invocation:: Print resolved file names Working context * pwd invocation:: Print working directory * stty invocation:: Print or change terminal characteristics * printenv invocation:: Print all or some environment variables * tty invocation:: Print file name of terminal on standard input @command{stty}: Print or change terminal characteristics * Control:: Control settings * Input:: Input settings * Output:: Output settings * Local:: Local settings * Combination:: Combination settings * Characters:: Special characters * Special:: Special settings User information * id invocation:: Print user identity * logname invocation:: Print current login name * whoami invocation:: Print effective user ID * groups invocation:: Print group names a user is in * users invocation:: Print login names of users currently logged in * who invocation:: Print who is currently logged in System context * arch invocation:: Print machine hardware name * date invocation:: Print or set system date and time * nproc invocation:: Print the number of processors * uname invocation:: Print system information * hostname invocation:: Print or set system name * hostid invocation:: Print numeric host identifier * uptime invocation:: Print system uptime and load @command{date}: Print or set system date and time * Time conversion specifiers:: %[HIklMNpPrRsSTXzZ] * Date conversion specifiers:: %[aAbBcCdDeFgGhjmuUVwWxyY] * Literal conversion specifiers:: %[%nt] * Padding and other flags:: Pad with zeros, spaces, etc. * Setting the time:: Changing the system clock * Options for date:: Instead of the current time * Date input formats:: Specifying date strings * Examples of date:: Examples SELinux context * chcon invocation:: Change SELinux context of file * runcon invocation:: Run a command in specified SELinux context Modified command invocation * chroot invocation:: Run a command with a different root directory * env invocation:: Run a command in a modified environment * nice invocation:: Run a command with modified niceness * nohup invocation:: Run a command immune to hangups * stdbuf invocation:: Run a command with modified I/O buffering * timeout invocation:: Run a command with a time limit Process control * kill invocation:: Sending a signal to processes. Delaying * sleep invocation:: Delay for a specified time Numeric operations * factor invocation:: Print prime factors * numfmt invocation:: Reformat numbers * seq invocation:: Print numeric sequences File timestamps * File timestamps:: File timestamp issues File permissions * Mode Structure:: Structure of file mode bits * Symbolic Modes:: Mnemonic representation of file mode bits * Numeric Modes:: File mode bits as octal numbers * Directory Setuid and Setgid:: Set-user-ID and set-group-ID on directories Date input formats * General date syntax:: Common rules * Calendar date items:: 19 Dec 1994 * Time of day items:: 9:20pm * Time zone items:: EST, PDT, UTC, @dots{} * Combined date and time of day items:: 1972-09-24T20:02:00,000000-0500 * Day of week items:: Monday and others * Relative items in date strings:: next tuesday, 2 years ago * Pure numbers in date strings:: 19931219, 1440 * Seconds since the Epoch:: @@1078100502 * Specifying time zone rules:: TZ="America/New_York", TZ="UTC0" * Authors of parse_datetime:: Bellovin, Eggert, Salz, Berets, et al. Opening the software toolbox * Toolbox introduction:: Toolbox introduction * I/O redirection:: I/O redirection * The who command:: The @command{who} command * The cut command:: The @command{cut} command * The sort command:: The @command{sort} command * The uniq command:: The @command{uniq} command * Putting the tools together:: Putting the tools together Copying This Manual * GNU Free Documentation License:: Copying and sharing this manual @end detailmenu @end menu @node Introduction @chapter Introduction This manual is a work in progress: many sections make no attempt to explain basic concepts in a way suitable for novices. Thus, if you are interested, please get involved in improving this manual. The entire GNU community will benefit. @cindex POSIX The GNU utilities documented here are mostly compatible with the POSIX standard. @cindex bugs, reporting Please report bugs to @email{bug-coreutils@@gnu.org}. Include the version number, machine architecture, input files, and any other information needed to reproduce the bug: your input, what you expected, what you got, and why it is wrong. If you have a problem with @command{sort} or @command{date}, try using the @option{--debug} option, as it can can often help find and fix problems without having to wait for an answer to a bug report. If the debug output does not suffice to fix the problem on your own, please compress and attach it to the rest of your bug report. Although diffs are welcome, please include a description of the problem as well, since this is sometimes difficult to infer. @xref{Bugs, , , gcc, Using and Porting GNU CC}. @cindex Berry, K. @cindex Paterson, R. @cindex Stallman, R. @cindex Pinard, F. @cindex MacKenzie, D. @cindex Meyering, J. @cindex Youmans, B. This manual was originally derived from the Unix man pages in the distributions, which were written by David MacKenzie and updated by Jim Meyering. What you are reading now is the authoritative documentation for these utilities; the man pages are no longer being maintained. The original @command{fmt} man page was written by Ross Paterson. Fran@,{c}ois Pinard did the initial conversion to Texinfo format. Karl Berry did the indexing, some reorganization, and editing of the results. Brian Youmans of the Free Software Foundation office staff combined the manuals for textutils, fileutils, and sh-utils to produce the present omnibus manual. Richard Stallman contributed his usual invaluable insights to the overall process. @node Common options @chapter Common options @macro optBackup @item -b @itemx --backup[=@var{method}] @opindex -b @opindex --backup @vindex VERSION_CONTROL @cindex backups, making @xref{Backup options}. Make a backup of each file that would otherwise be overwritten or removed. @end macro @macro optBackupSuffix @item -S @var{suffix} @itemx --suffix=@var{suffix} @opindex -S @opindex --suffix Append @var{suffix} to each backup file made with @option{-b}. @xref{Backup options}. @end macro @macro optTargetDirectory @item -t @var{directory} @itemx --target-directory=@var{directory} @opindex -t @opindex --target-directory @cindex target directory @cindex destination directory Specify the destination @var{directory}. @xref{Target directory}. @end macro @macro optNoTargetDirectory @item -T @itemx --no-target-directory @opindex -T @opindex --no-target-directory @cindex target directory @cindex destination directory Do not treat the last operand specially when it is a directory or a symbolic link to a directory. @xref{Target directory}. @end macro @macro outputNUL @cindex output NUL-byte-terminated lines Output a zero byte (ASCII NUL) at the end of each line, rather than a newline. This option enables other programs to parse the output even when that output would contain data with embedded newlines. @end macro @macro optNull @item -0 @itemx --null @opindex -0 @opindex --null @outputNUL @end macro @macro optZero @item -z @itemx --zero @opindex -z @opindex --zero @outputNUL @end macro @macro optZeroTerminated @item -z @itemx --zero-terminated @opindex -z @opindex --zero-terminated @cindex process zero-terminated items Delimit items with a zero byte rather than a newline (ASCII LF). I.e., treat input as items separated by ASCII NUL and terminate output items with ASCII NUL. This option can be useful in conjunction with @samp{perl -0} or @samp{find -print0} and @samp{xargs -0} which do the same in order to reliably handle arbitrary file names (even those containing blanks or other special characters). @end macro @macro optSi @item --si @opindex --si @cindex SI output Append an SI-style abbreviation to each size, such as @samp{M} for megabytes. Powers of 1000 are used, not 1024; @samp{M} stands for 1,000,000 bytes. This option is equivalent to @option{--block-size=si}. Use the @option{-h} or @option{--human-readable} option if you prefer powers of 1024. @end macro @macro optHumanReadable @item -h @itemx --human-readable @opindex -h @opindex --human-readable @cindex human-readable output Append a size letter to each size, such as @samp{M} for mebibytes. Powers of 1024 are used, not 1000; @samp{M} stands for 1,048,576 bytes. This option is equivalent to @option{--block-size=human-readable}. Use the @option{--si} option if you prefer powers of 1000. @end macro @macro optStripTrailingSlashes @item --strip-trailing-slashes @opindex --strip-trailing-slashes @cindex stripping trailing slashes Remove any trailing slashes from each @var{source} argument. @xref{Trailing slashes}. @end macro @macro mayConflictWithShellBuiltIn{cmd} @cindex conflicts with shell built-ins @cindex built-in shell commands, conflicts with Due to shell aliases and built-in @command{\cmd\} functions, using an unadorned @command{\cmd\} interactively or in a script may get you different functionality than that described here. Invoke it via @command{env} (i.e., @code{env \cmd\ @dots{}}) to avoid interference from the shell. @end macro @macro multiplierSuffixes{varName} @var{\varName\} may be, or may be an integer optionally followed by, one of the following multiplicative suffixes: @example @samp{b} => 512 ("blocks") @samp{KB} => 1000 (KiloBytes) @samp{K} => 1024 (KibiBytes) @samp{MB} => 1000*1000 (MegaBytes) @samp{M} => 1024*1024 (MebiBytes) @samp{GB} => 1000*1000*1000 (GigaBytes) @samp{G} => 1024*1024*1024 (GibiBytes) @end example and so on for @samp{T}, @samp{P}, @samp{E}, @samp{Z}, and @samp{Y}. @end macro @c FIXME: same as above, but no ``blocks'' line. @macro multiplierSuffixesNoBlocks{varName} @var{\varName\} may be, or may be an integer optionally followed by, one of the following multiplicative suffixes: @example @samp{KB} => 1000 (KiloBytes) @samp{K} => 1024 (KibiBytes) @samp{MB} => 1000*1000 (MegaBytes) @samp{M} => 1024*1024 (MebiBytes) @samp{GB} => 1000*1000*1000 (GigaBytes) @samp{G} => 1024*1024*1024 (GibiBytes) @end example and so on for @samp{T}, @samp{P}, @samp{E}, @samp{Z}, and @samp{Y}. @end macro @cindex common options Certain options are available in all of these programs. Rather than writing identical descriptions for each of the programs, they are described here. (In fact, every GNU program accepts (or should accept) these options.) @vindex POSIXLY_CORRECT Normally options and operands can appear in any order, and programs act as if all the options appear before any operands. For example, @samp{sort -r passwd -t :} acts like @samp{sort -r -t : passwd}, since @samp{:} is an option-argument of @option{-t}. However, if the @env{POSIXLY_CORRECT} environment variable is set, options must appear before operands, unless otherwise specified for a particular command. A few programs can usefully have trailing operands with leading @samp{-}. With such a program, options must precede operands even if @env{POSIXLY_CORRECT} is not set, and this fact is noted in the program description. For example, the @command{env} command's options must appear before its operands, since in some cases the operands specify a command that itself contains options. Most programs that accept long options recognize unambiguous abbreviations of those options. For example, @samp{rmdir --ignore-fail-on-non-empty} can be invoked as @samp{rmdir --ignore-fail} or even @samp{rmdir --i}. Ambiguous options, such as @samp{ls --h}, are identified as such. Some of these programs recognize the @option{--help} and @option{--version} options only when one of them is the sole command line argument. For these programs, abbreviations of the long options are not always recognized. @table @samp @item --help @opindex --help @cindex help, online Print a usage message listing all available options, then exit successfully. @item --version @opindex --version @cindex version number, finding Print the version number, then exit successfully. @item -- @opindex -- @cindex option delimiter Delimit the option list. Later arguments, if any, are treated as operands even if they begin with @samp{-}. For example, @samp{sort -- -r} reads from the file named @file{-r}. @end table @cindex standard input @cindex standard output A single @samp{-} operand is not really an option, though it looks like one. It stands for a file operand, and some tools treat it as standard input, or as standard output if that is clear from the context. For example, @samp{sort -} reads from standard input, and is equivalent to plain @samp{sort}. Unless otherwise specified, a @samp{-} can appear as any operand that requires a file name. @menu * Exit status:: Indicating program success or failure. * Backup options:: -b -S, in some programs. * Block size:: BLOCK_SIZE and --block-size, in some programs. * Floating point:: Floating point number representation. * Signal specifications:: Specifying signals using the --signal option. * Disambiguating names and IDs:: chgrp, chown, chroot, id: user and group syntax * Random sources:: --random-source, in some programs. * Target directory:: Specifying a target directory, in some programs. * Trailing slashes:: --strip-trailing-slashes, in some programs. * Traversing symlinks:: -H, -L, or -P, in some programs. * Treating / specially:: --preserve-root and --no-preserve-root. * Special built-in utilities:: @command{break}, @command{:}, @dots{} * Standards conformance:: Conformance to the POSIX standard. * Multi-call invocation:: Multi-call program invocation. @end menu @node Exit status @section Exit status @macro exitstatus An exit status of zero indicates success, and a nonzero value indicates failure. @end macro Nearly every command invocation yields an integral @dfn{exit status} that can be used to change how other commands work. For the vast majority of commands, an exit status of zero indicates success. Failure is indicated by a nonzero value---typically @samp{1}, though it may differ on unusual platforms as POSIX requires only that it be nonzero. However, some of the programs documented here do produce other exit status values and a few associate different meanings with the values @samp{0} and @samp{1}. Here are some of the exceptions: @command{chroot}, @command{env}, @command{expr}, @command{nice}, @command{nohup}, @command{numfmt}, @command{printenv}, @command{sort}, @command{stdbuf}, @command{test}, @command{timeout}, @command{tty}. @node Backup options @section Backup options @cindex backup options Some GNU programs (at least @command{cp}, @command{install}, @command{ln}, and @command{mv}) optionally make backups of files before writing new versions. These options control the details of these backups. The options are also briefly mentioned in the descriptions of the particular programs. @table @samp @item -b @itemx --backup[=@var{method}] @opindex -b @opindex --backup @vindex VERSION_CONTROL @cindex backups, making Make a backup of each file that would otherwise be overwritten or removed. Without this option, the original versions are destroyed. Use @var{method} to determine the type of backups to make. When this option is used but @var{method} is not specified, then the value of the @env{VERSION_CONTROL} environment variable is used. And if @env{VERSION_CONTROL} is not set, the default backup type is @samp{existing}. Note that the short form of this option, @option{-b} does not accept any argument. Using @option{-b} is equivalent to using @option{--backup=existing}. @vindex version-control @r{Emacs variable} This option corresponds to the Emacs variable @samp{version-control}; the values for @var{method} are the same as those used in Emacs. This option also accepts more descriptive names. The valid @var{method}s are (unique abbreviations are accepted): @table @samp @item none @itemx off @opindex none @r{backup method} Never make backups. @item numbered @itemx t @opindex numbered @r{backup method} Always make numbered backups. @item existing @itemx nil @opindex existing @r{backup method} Make numbered backups of files that already have them, simple backups of the others. @item simple @itemx never @opindex simple @r{backup method} Always make simple backups. Please note @samp{never} is not to be confused with @samp{none}. @end table @item -S @var{suffix} @itemx --suffix=@var{suffix} @opindex -S @opindex --suffix @cindex backup suffix @vindex SIMPLE_BACKUP_SUFFIX Append @var{suffix} to each backup file made with @option{-b}. If this option is not specified, the value of the @env{SIMPLE_BACKUP_SUFFIX} environment variable is used. And if @env{SIMPLE_BACKUP_SUFFIX} is not set, the default is @samp{~}, just as in Emacs. @end table @node Block size @section Block size @cindex block size Some GNU programs (at least @command{df}, @command{du}, and @command{ls}) display sizes in ``blocks''. You can adjust the block size and method of display to make sizes easier to read. The block size used for display is independent of any file system block size. Fractional block counts are rounded up to the nearest integer. @opindex --block-size=@var{size} @vindex BLOCKSIZE @vindex BLOCK_SIZE @vindex DF_BLOCK_SIZE @vindex DU_BLOCK_SIZE @vindex LS_BLOCK_SIZE @vindex POSIXLY_CORRECT@r{, and block size} The default block size is chosen by examining the following environment variables in turn; the first one that is set determines the block size. @table @code @item DF_BLOCK_SIZE This specifies the default block size for the @command{df} command. Similarly, @env{DU_BLOCK_SIZE} specifies the default for @command{du} and @env{LS_BLOCK_SIZE} for @command{ls}. @item BLOCK_SIZE This specifies the default block size for all three commands, if the above command-specific environment variables are not set. @item BLOCKSIZE This specifies the default block size for all values that are normally printed as blocks, if neither @env{BLOCK_SIZE} nor the above command-specific environment variables are set. Unlike the other environment variables, @env{BLOCKSIZE} does not affect values that are normally printed as byte counts, e.g., the file sizes contained in @code{ls -l} output. @item POSIXLY_CORRECT If neither @env{@var{command}_BLOCK_SIZE}, nor @env{BLOCK_SIZE}, nor @env{BLOCKSIZE} is set, but this variable is set, the block size defaults to 512. @end table If none of the above environment variables are set, the block size currently defaults to 1024 bytes in most contexts, but this number may change in the future. For @command{ls} file sizes, the block size defaults to 1 byte. @cindex human-readable output @cindex SI output A block size specification can be a positive integer specifying the number of bytes per block, or it can be @code{human-readable} or @code{si} to select a human-readable format. Integers may be followed by suffixes that are upward compatible with the @uref{http://www.bipm.org/en/publications/si-brochure/chapter3.html, SI prefixes} for decimal multiples and with the @uref{http://physics.nist.gov/cuu/Units/binary.html, ISO/IEC 80000-13 (formerly IEC 60027-2) prefixes} for binary multiples. With human-readable formats, output sizes are followed by a size letter such as @samp{M} for megabytes. @code{BLOCK_SIZE=human-readable} uses powers of 1024; @samp{M} stands for 1,048,576 bytes. @code{BLOCK_SIZE=si} is similar, but uses powers of 1000 and appends @samp{B}; @samp{MB} stands for 1,000,000 bytes. @vindex LC_NUMERIC A block size specification preceded by @samp{'} causes output sizes to be displayed with thousands separators. The @env{LC_NUMERIC} locale specifies the thousands separator and grouping. For example, in an American English locale, @samp{--block-size="'1kB"} would cause a size of 1234000 bytes to be displayed as @samp{1,234}. In the default C locale, there is no thousands separator so a leading @samp{'} has no effect. An integer block size can be followed by a suffix to specify a multiple of that size. A bare size letter, or one followed by @samp{iB}, specifies a multiple using powers of 1024. A size letter followed by @samp{B} specifies powers of 1000 instead. For example, @samp{1M} and @samp{1MiB} are equivalent to @samp{1048576}, whereas @samp{1MB} is equivalent to @samp{1000000}. A plain suffix without a preceding integer acts as if @samp{1} were prepended, except that it causes a size indication to be appended to the output. For example, @samp{--block-size="kB"} displays 3000 as @samp{3kB}. The following suffixes are defined. Large sizes like @code{1Y} may be rejected by your computer due to limitations of its arithmetic. @table @samp @item kB @cindex kilobyte, definition of kilobyte: @math{10^3 = 1000}. @item k @itemx K @itemx KiB @cindex kibibyte, definition of kibibyte: @math{2^{10} = 1024}. @samp{K} is special: the SI prefix is @samp{k} and the ISO/IEC 80000-13 prefix is @samp{Ki}, but tradition and POSIX use @samp{k} to mean @samp{KiB}. @item MB @cindex megabyte, definition of megabyte: @math{10^6 = 1,000,000}. @item M @itemx MiB @cindex mebibyte, definition of mebibyte: @math{2^{20} = 1,048,576}. @item GB @cindex gigabyte, definition of gigabyte: @math{10^9 = 1,000,000,000}. @item G @itemx GiB @cindex gibibyte, definition of gibibyte: @math{2^{30} = 1,073,741,824}. @item TB @cindex terabyte, definition of terabyte: @math{10^{12} = 1,000,000,000,000}. @item T @itemx TiB @cindex tebibyte, definition of tebibyte: @math{2^{40} = 1,099,511,627,776}. @item PB @cindex petabyte, definition of petabyte: @math{10^{15} = 1,000,000,000,000,000}. @item P @itemx PiB @cindex pebibyte, definition of pebibyte: @math{2^{50} = 1,125,899,906,842,624}. @item EB @cindex exabyte, definition of exabyte: @math{10^{18} = 1,000,000,000,000,000,000}. @item E @itemx EiB @cindex exbibyte, definition of exbibyte: @math{2^{60} = 1,152,921,504,606,846,976}. @item ZB @cindex zettabyte, definition of zettabyte: @math{10^{21} = 1,000,000,000,000,000,000,000} @item Z @itemx ZiB @math{2^{70} = 1,180,591,620,717,411,303,424}. @item YB @cindex yottabyte, definition of yottabyte: @math{10^{24} = 1,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000}. @item Y @itemx YiB @math{2^{80} = 1,208,925,819,614,629,174,706,176}. @end table @opindex -k @opindex -h @opindex --block-size @opindex --human-readable @opindex --si Block size defaults can be overridden by an explicit @option{--block-size=@var{size}} option. The @option{-k} option is equivalent to @option{--block-size=1K}, which is the default unless the @env{POSIXLY_CORRECT} environment variable is set. The @option{-h} or @option{--human-readable} option is equivalent to @option{--block-size=human-readable}. The @option{--si} option is equivalent to @option{--block-size=si}. Note for @command{ls} the @option{-k} option does not control the display of the apparent file sizes, whereas the @option{--block-size} option does. @node Floating point @section Floating point numbers @cindex floating point @cindex IEEE floating point Commands that accept or produce floating point numbers employ the floating point representation of the underlying system, and suffer from rounding error, overflow, and similar floating-point issues. Almost all modern systems use IEEE-754 floating point, and it is typically portable to assume IEEE-754 behavior these days. IEEE-754 has positive and negative infinity, distinguishes positive from negative zero, and uses special values called NaNs to represent invalid computations such as dividing zero by itself. For more information, please see David Goldberg's paper @uref{http://@/www.validlab.com/@/goldberg/@/paper.pdf, What Every Computer Scientist Should Know About Floating-Point Arithmetic}. @vindex LC_NUMERIC Commands that accept floating point numbers as options, operands or input use the standard C functions @code{strtod} and @code{strtold} to convert from text to floating point numbers. These floating point numbers therefore can use scientific notation like @code{1.0e-34} and @code{-10e100}. Commands that parse floating point also understand case-insensitive @code{inf}, @code{infinity}, and @code{NaN}, although whether such values are useful depends on the command in question. Modern C implementations also accept hexadecimal floating point numbers such as @code{-0x.ep-3}, which stands for @minus{}14/16 times @math{2^-3}, which equals @minus{}0.109375. The @env{LC_NUMERIC} locale determines the decimal-point character. @xref{Parsing of Floats,,, libc, The GNU C Library Reference Manual}. @node Signal specifications @section Signal specifications @cindex signals, specifying A @var{signal} may be a signal name like @samp{HUP}, or a signal number like @samp{1}, or an exit status of a process terminated by the signal. A signal name can be given in canonical form or prefixed by @samp{SIG}@. The case of the letters is ignored. The following signal names and numbers are supported on all POSIX compliant systems: @table @samp @item HUP 1. Hangup. @item INT 2. Terminal interrupt. @item QUIT 3. Terminal quit. @item ABRT 6. Process abort. @item KILL 9. Kill (cannot be caught or ignored). @item ALRM 14. Alarm Clock. @item TERM 15. Termination. @end table @noindent Other supported signal names have system-dependent corresponding numbers. All systems conforming to POSIX 1003.1-2001 also support the following signals: @table @samp @item BUS Access to an undefined portion of a memory object. @item CHLD Child process terminated, stopped, or continued. @item CONT Continue executing, if stopped. @item FPE Erroneous arithmetic operation. @item ILL Illegal Instruction. @item PIPE Write on a pipe with no one to read it. @item SEGV Invalid memory reference. @item STOP Stop executing (cannot be caught or ignored). @item TSTP Terminal stop. @item TTIN Background process attempting read. @item TTOU Background process attempting write. @item URG High bandwidth data is available at a socket. @item USR1 User-defined signal 1. @item USR2 User-defined signal 2. @end table @noindent POSIX 1003.1-2001 systems that support the XSI extension also support the following signals: @table @samp @item POLL Pollable event. @item PROF Profiling timer expired. @item SYS Bad system call. @item TRAP Trace/breakpoint trap. @item VTALRM Virtual timer expired. @item XCPU CPU time limit exceeded. @item XFSZ File size limit exceeded. @end table @noindent POSIX 1003.1-2001 systems that support the XRT extension also support at least eight real-time signals called @samp{RTMIN}, @samp{RTMIN+1}, @dots{}, @samp{RTMAX-1}, @samp{RTMAX}. @node Disambiguating names and IDs @section chown, chgrp, chroot, id: Disambiguating user names and IDs @cindex user names, disambiguating @cindex user IDs, disambiguating @cindex group names, disambiguating @cindex group IDs, disambiguating @cindex disambiguating group names and IDs Since the @var{user} and @var{group} arguments to these commands may be specified as names or numeric IDs, there is an apparent ambiguity. What if a user or group @emph{name} is a string of digits? @footnote{Using a number as a user name is common in some environments.} Should the command interpret it as a user name or as an ID@? POSIX requires that these commands first attempt to resolve the specified string as a name, and only once that fails, then try to interpret it as an ID@. This is troublesome when you want to specify a numeric ID, say 42, and it must work even in a pathological situation where @samp{42} is a user name that maps to some other user ID, say 1000. Simply invoking @code{chown 42 F}, will set @file{F}s owner ID to 1000---not what you intended. GNU @command{chown}, @command{chgrp}, @command{chroot}, and @command{id} provide a way to work around this, that at the same time may result in a significant performance improvement by eliminating a database look-up. Simply precede each numeric user ID and/or group ID with a @samp{+}, in order to force its interpretation as an integer: @example chown +42 F chgrp +$numeric_group_id another-file chown +0:+0 / @end example The name look-up process is skipped for each @samp{+}-prefixed string, because a string containing @samp{+} is never a valid user or group name. This syntax is accepted on most common Unix systems, but not on Solaris 10. @node Random sources @section Sources of random data @cindex random sources The @command{shuf}, @command{shred}, and @command{sort} commands sometimes need random data to do their work. For example, @samp{sort -R} must choose a hash function at random, and it needs random data to make this selection. By default these commands use an internal pseudo-random generator initialized by a small amount of entropy, but can be directed to use an external source with the @option{--random-source=@var{file}} option. An error is reported if @var{file} does not contain enough bytes. For example, the device file @file{/dev/urandom} could be used as the source of random data. Typically, this device gathers environmental noise from device drivers and other sources into an entropy pool, and uses the pool to generate random bits. If the pool is short of data, the device reuses the internal pool to produce more bits, using a cryptographically secure pseudo-random number generator. But be aware that this device is not designed for bulk random data generation and is relatively slow. @file{/dev/urandom} suffices for most practical uses, but applications requiring high-value or long-term protection of private data may require an alternate data source like @file{/dev/random} or @file{/dev/arandom}. The set of available sources depends on your operating system. To reproduce the results of an earlier invocation of a command, you can save some random data into a file and then use that file as the random source in earlier and later invocations of the command. @cindex random seed Rather than depending on a file, one can generate a reproducible arbitrary amount of pseudo-random data given a seed value, using for example: @example get_seeded_random() @{ seed="$1" openssl enc -aes-256-ctr -pass pass:"$seed" -nosalt \ /dev/null @} shuf -i1-100 --random-source=<(get_seeded_random 42) @end example @node Target directory @section Target directory @cindex target directory The @command{cp}, @command{install}, @command{ln}, and @command{mv} commands normally treat the last operand specially when it is a directory or a symbolic link to a directory. For example, @samp{cp source dest} is equivalent to @samp{cp source dest/source} if @file{dest} is a directory. Sometimes this behavior is not exactly what is wanted, so these commands support the following options to allow more fine-grained control: @table @samp @item -T @itemx --no-target-directory @opindex --no-target-directory @cindex target directory @cindex destination directory Do not treat the last operand specially when it is a directory or a symbolic link to a directory. This can help avoid race conditions in programs that operate in a shared area. For example, when the command @samp{mv /tmp/source /tmp/dest} succeeds, there is no guarantee that @file{/tmp/source} was renamed to @file{/tmp/dest}: it could have been renamed to @file{/tmp/dest/source} instead, if some other process created @file{/tmp/dest} as a directory. However, if @file{mv -T /tmp/source /tmp/dest} succeeds, there is no question that @file{/tmp/source} was renamed to @file{/tmp/dest}. In the opposite situation, where you want the last operand to be treated as a directory and want a diagnostic otherwise, you can use the @option{--target-directory} (@option{-t}) option. @item -t @var{directory} @itemx --target-directory=@var{directory} @opindex --target-directory @cindex target directory @cindex destination directory Use @var{directory} as the directory component of each destination file name. The interface for most programs is that after processing options and a finite (possibly zero) number of fixed-position arguments, the remaining argument list is either expected to be empty, or is a list of items (usually files) that will all be handled identically. The @command{xargs} program is designed to work well with this convention. The commands in the @command{mv}-family are unusual in that they take a variable number of arguments with a special case at the @emph{end} (namely, the target directory). This makes it nontrivial to perform some operations, e.g., ``move all files from here to ../d/'', because @code{mv * ../d/} might exhaust the argument space, and @code{ls | xargs ...} doesn't have a clean way to specify an extra final argument for each invocation of the subject command. (It can be done by going through a shell command, but that requires more human labor and brain power than it should.) The @option{--target-directory} (@option{-t}) option allows the @command{cp}, @command{install}, @command{ln}, and @command{mv} programs to be used conveniently with @command{xargs}. For example, you can move the files from the current directory to a sibling directory, @code{d} like this: @smallexample ls | xargs mv -t ../d -- @end smallexample However, this doesn't move files whose names begin with @samp{.}. If you use the GNU @command{find} program, you can move those files too, with this command: @example find . -mindepth 1 -maxdepth 1 \ | xargs mv -t ../d @end example But both of the above approaches fail if there are no files in the current directory, or if any file has a name containing a blank or some other special characters. The following example removes those limitations and requires both GNU @command{find} and GNU @command{xargs}: @example find . -mindepth 1 -maxdepth 1 -print0 \ | xargs --null --no-run-if-empty \ mv -t ../d @end example @end table @noindent The @option{--target-directory} (@option{-t}) and @option{--no-target-directory} (@option{-T}) options cannot be combined. @node Trailing slashes @section Trailing slashes @cindex trailing slashes Some GNU programs (at least @command{cp} and @command{mv}) allow you to remove any trailing slashes from each @var{source} argument before operating on it. The @option{--strip-trailing-slashes} option enables this behavior. This is useful when a @var{source} argument may have a trailing slash and @c FIXME: mv's behavior in this case is system-dependent specify a symbolic link to a directory. This scenario is in fact rather common because some shells can automatically append a trailing slash when performing file name completion on such symbolic links. Without this option, @command{mv}, for example, (via the system's rename function) must interpret a trailing slash as a request to dereference the symbolic link and so must rename the indirectly referenced @emph{directory} and not the symbolic link. Although it may seem surprising that such behavior be the default, it is required by POSIX and is consistent with other parts of that standard. @node Traversing symlinks @section Traversing symlinks @cindex symbolic link to directory, controlling traversal of The following options modify how @command{chown} and @command{chgrp} @c FIXME: note that 'du' has these options, too, but they have slightly @c different meaning. traverse a hierarchy when the @option{--recursive} (@option{-R}) option is also specified. If more than one of the following options is specified, only the final one takes effect. These options specify whether processing a symbolic link to a directory entails operating on just the symbolic link or on all files in the hierarchy rooted at that directory. These options are independent of @option{--dereference} and @option{--no-dereference} (@option{-h}), which control whether to modify a symlink or its referent. @table @samp @macro choptH @item -H @opindex -H @cindex symbolic link to directory, traverse if on the command line If @option{--recursive} (@option{-R}) is specified and a command line argument is a symbolic link to a directory, traverse it. @end macro @choptH @macro choptL @item -L @opindex -L @cindex symbolic link to directory, traverse each that is encountered In a recursive traversal, traverse every symbolic link to a directory that is encountered. @end macro @choptL @macro choptP @item -P @opindex -P @cindex symbolic link to directory, never traverse Do not traverse any symbolic links. This is the default if none of @option{-H}, @option{-L}, or @option{-P} is specified. @end macro @choptP @end table @node Treating / specially @section Treating @file{/} specially Certain commands can operate destructively on entire hierarchies. For example, if a user with appropriate privileges mistakenly runs @samp{rm -rf / tmp/junk}, that may remove all files on the entire system. Since there are so few legitimate uses for such a command, GNU @command{rm} normally declines to operate on any directory that resolves to @file{/}. If you really want to try to remove all the files on your system, you can use the @option{--no-preserve-root} option, but the default behavior, specified by the @option{--preserve-root} option, is safer for most purposes. The commands @command{chgrp}, @command{chmod} and @command{chown} can also operate destructively on entire hierarchies, so they too support these options. Although, unlike @command{rm}, they don't actually unlink files, these commands are arguably more dangerous when operating recursively on @file{/}, since they often work much more quickly, and hence damage more files before an alert user can interrupt them. Tradition and POSIX require these commands to operate recursively on @file{/}, so they default to @option{--no-preserve-root}, but using the @option{--preserve-root} option makes them safer for most purposes. For convenience you can specify @option{--preserve-root} in an alias or in a shell function. Note that the @option{--preserve-root} option also ensures that @command{chgrp} and @command{chown} do not modify @file{/} even when dereferencing a symlink pointing to @file{/}. @node Special built-in utilities @section Special built-in utilities Some programs like @command{nice} can invoke other programs; for example, the command @samp{nice cat file} invokes the program @command{cat} by executing the command @samp{cat file}. However, @dfn{special built-in utilities} like @command{exit} cannot be invoked this way. For example, the command @samp{nice exit} does not have a well-defined behavior: it may generate an error message instead of exiting. Here is a list of the special built-in utilities that are standardized by POSIX 1003.1-2004. @quotation @t{.@: : break continue eval exec exit export readonly return set shift times trap unset} @end quotation For example, because @samp{.}, @samp{:}, and @samp{exec} are special, the commands @samp{nice . foo.sh}, @samp{nice :}, and @samp{nice exec pwd} do not work as you might expect. Many shells extend this list. For example, Bash has several extra special built-in utilities like @command{history}, and @command{suspend}, and with Bash the command @samp{nice suspend} generates an error message instead of suspending. @node Standards conformance @section Standards conformance @vindex POSIXLY_CORRECT In a few cases, the GNU utilities' default behavior is incompatible with the POSIX standard. To suppress these incompatibilities, define the @env{POSIXLY_CORRECT} environment variable. Unless you are checking for POSIX conformance, you probably do not need to define @env{POSIXLY_CORRECT}. Newer versions of POSIX are occasionally incompatible with older versions. For example, older versions of POSIX required the command @samp{sort +1} to sort based on the second and succeeding fields in each input line, but in POSIX 1003.1-2001 the same command is required to sort the file named @file{+1}, and you must instead use the command @samp{sort -k 2} to get the field-based sort. To complicate things further, POSIX 1003.1-2008 allows an implementation to have either the old or the new behavior. @vindex _POSIX2_VERSION The GNU utilities normally conform to the version of POSIX that is standard for your system. To cause them to conform to a different version of POSIX, define the @env{_POSIX2_VERSION} environment variable to a value of the form @var{yyyymm} specifying the year and month the standard was adopted. Three values are currently supported for @env{_POSIX2_VERSION}: @samp{199209} stands for POSIX 1003.2-1992, @samp{200112} stands for POSIX 1003.1-2001, and @samp{200809} stands for POSIX 1003.1-2008. For example, if you have a POSIX 1003.1-2001 system but are running software containing traditional usage like @samp{sort +1} or @samp{tail +10}, you can work around the compatibility problems by setting @samp{_POSIX2_VERSION=200809} in your environment. @c This node is named "Multi-call invocation", not the usual @c "coreutils invocation", so that shell commands like @c 'info coreutils "touch invocation"' work as expected. @node Multi-call invocation @section @command{coreutils}: Multi-call program @pindex multicall @cindex combined @cindex calling combined multi-call program The @command{coreutils} command invokes an individual utility, either implicitly selected by the last component of the name used to invoke @command{coreutils}, or explicitly with the @option{--coreutils-prog} option. Synopsis: @example coreutils @option{--coreutils-prog=PROGRAM} @dots{} @end example The @command{coreutils} command is not installed by default, so portable scripts should not rely on its existence. @node Output of entire files @chapter Output of entire files @cindex output of entire files @cindex entire files, output of These commands read and write entire files, possibly transforming them in some way. @menu * cat invocation:: Concatenate and write files. * tac invocation:: Concatenate and write files in reverse. * nl invocation:: Number lines and write files. * od invocation:: Write files in octal or other formats. * base32 invocation:: Transform data into printable data. * base64 invocation:: Transform data into printable data. @end menu @node cat invocation @section @command{cat}: Concatenate and write files @pindex cat @cindex concatenate and write files @cindex copying files @command{cat} copies each @var{file} (@samp{-} means standard input), or standard input if none are given, to standard output. Synopsis: @example cat [@var{option}] [@var{file}]@dots{} @end example The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @item -A @itemx --show-all @opindex -A @opindex --show-all Equivalent to @option{-vET}. @item -b @itemx --number-nonblank @opindex -b @opindex --number-nonblank Number all nonempty output lines, starting with 1. @item -e @opindex -e Equivalent to @option{-vE}. @item -E @itemx --show-ends @opindex -E @opindex --show-ends Display a @samp{$} after the end of each line. @item -n @itemx --number @opindex -n @opindex --number Number all output lines, starting with 1. This option is ignored if @option{-b} is in effect. @item -s @itemx --squeeze-blank @opindex -s @opindex --squeeze-blank @cindex squeezing empty lines @cindex squeezing blank lines Suppress repeated adjacent blank lines; output just one empty line instead of several. @item -t @opindex -t Equivalent to @option{-vT}. @item -T @itemx --show-tabs @opindex -T @opindex --show-tabs Display TAB characters as @samp{^I}. @item -u @opindex -u Ignored; for POSIX compatibility. @item -v @itemx --show-nonprinting @opindex -v @opindex --show-nonprinting Display control characters except for LFD and TAB using @samp{^} notation and precede characters that have the high bit set with @samp{M-}. @end table On systems like MS-DOS that distinguish between text and binary files, @command{cat} normally reads and writes in binary mode. However, @command{cat} reads in text mode if one of the options @option{-bensAE} is used or if @command{cat} is reading from standard input and standard input is a terminal. Similarly, @command{cat} writes in text mode if one of the options @option{-bensAE} is used or if standard output is a terminal. @exitstatus Examples: @smallexample # Output f's contents, then standard input, then g's contents. cat f - g # Copy standard input to standard output. cat @end smallexample @node tac invocation @section @command{tac}: Concatenate and write files in reverse @pindex tac @cindex reversing files @command{tac} copies each @var{file} (@samp{-} means standard input), or standard input if none are given, to standard output, reversing the records (lines by default) in each separately. Synopsis: @example tac [@var{option}]@dots{} [@var{file}]@dots{} @end example @dfn{Records} are separated by instances of a string (newline by default). By default, this separator string is attached to the end of the record that it follows in the file. The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @item -b @itemx --before @opindex -b @opindex --before The separator is attached to the beginning of the record that it precedes in the file. @item -r @itemx --regex @opindex -r @opindex --regex Treat the separator string as a regular expression. @item -s @var{separator} @itemx --separator=@var{separator} @opindex -s @opindex --separator Use @var{separator} as the record separator, instead of newline. Note an empty @var{separator} is treated as a zero byte. I.e., input and output items are delimited with ASCII NUL. @end table On systems like MS-DOS that distinguish between text and binary files, @command{tac} reads and writes in binary mode. @exitstatus Example: @example # Reverse a file character by character. tac -r -s 'x\|[^x]' @end example @node nl invocation @section @command{nl}: Number lines and write files @pindex nl @cindex numbering lines @cindex line numbering @command{nl} writes each @var{file} (@samp{-} means standard input), or standard input if none are given, to standard output, with line numbers added to some or all of the lines. Synopsis: @example nl [@var{option}]@dots{} [@var{file}]@dots{} @end example @cindex logical pages, numbering on @command{nl} decomposes its input into (logical) page sections; by default, the line number is reset to 1 at each logical page section. @command{nl} treats all of the input files as a single document; it does not reset line numbers or logical pages between files. @cindex headers, numbering @cindex body, numbering @cindex footers, numbering A logical page consists of three sections: header, body, and footer. Any of the sections can be empty. Each can be numbered in a different style from the others. The beginnings of the sections of logical pages are indicated in the input file by a line containing exactly one of these delimiter strings: @table @samp @item \:\:\: start of header; @item \:\: start of body; @item \: start of footer. @end table The two characters from which these strings are made can be changed from @samp{\} and @samp{:} via options (see below), but the pattern and length of each string cannot be changed. A section delimiter is replaced by an empty line on output. Any text that comes before the first section delimiter string in the input file is considered to be part of a body section, so @command{nl} treats a file that contains no section delimiters as a single body section. The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @item -b @var{style} @itemx --body-numbering=@var{style} @opindex -b @opindex --body-numbering Select the numbering style for lines in the body section of each logical page. When a line is not numbered, the current line number is not incremented, but the line number separator character is still prepended to the line. The styles are: @table @samp @item a number all lines, @item t number only nonempty lines (default for body), @item n do not number lines (default for header and footer), @item p@var{bre} number only lines that contain a match for the basic regular expression @var{bre}. @xref{Regular Expressions, , Regular Expressions, grep, The GNU Grep Manual}. @end table @item -d @var{cd} @itemx --section-delimiter=@var{cd} @opindex -d @opindex --section-delimiter @cindex section delimiters of pages Set the section delimiter characters to @var{cd}; default is @samp{\:}. If only @var{c} is given, the second remains @samp{:}. (Remember to protect @samp{\} or other metacharacters from shell expansion with quotes or extra backslashes.) @item -f @var{style} @itemx --footer-numbering=@var{style} @opindex -f @opindex --footer-numbering Analogous to @option{--body-numbering}. @item -h @var{style} @itemx --header-numbering=@var{style} @opindex -h @opindex --header-numbering Analogous to @option{--body-numbering}. @item -i @var{number} @itemx --line-increment=@var{number} @opindex -i @opindex --line-increment Increment line numbers by @var{number} (default 1). @item -l @var{number} @itemx --join-blank-lines=@var{number} @opindex -l @opindex --join-blank-lines @cindex empty lines, numbering @cindex blank lines, numbering Consider @var{number} (default 1) consecutive empty lines to be one logical line for numbering, and only number the last one. Where fewer than @var{number} consecutive empty lines occur, do not number them. An empty line is one that contains no characters, not even spaces or tabs. @item -n @var{format} @itemx --number-format=@var{format} @opindex -n @opindex --number-format Select the line numbering format (default is @code{rn}): @table @samp @item ln @opindex ln @r{format for @command{nl}} left justified, no leading zeros; @item rn @opindex rn @r{format for @command{nl}} right justified, no leading zeros; @item rz @opindex rz @r{format for @command{nl}} right justified, leading zeros. @end table @item -p @itemx --no-renumber @opindex -p @opindex --no-renumber Do not reset the line number at the start of a logical page. @item -s @var{string} @itemx --number-separator=@var{string} @opindex -s @opindex --number-separator Separate the line number from the text line in the output with @var{string} (default is the TAB character). @item -v @var{number} @itemx --starting-line-number=@var{number} @opindex -v @opindex --starting-line-number Set the initial line number on each logical page to @var{number} (default 1). @item -w @var{number} @itemx --number-width=@var{number} @opindex -w @opindex --number-width Use @var{number} characters for line numbers (default 6). @end table @exitstatus @node od invocation @section @command{od}: Write files in octal or other formats @pindex od @cindex octal dump of files @cindex hex dump of files @cindex ASCII dump of files @cindex file contents, dumping unambiguously @command{od} writes an unambiguous representation of each @var{file} (@samp{-} means standard input), or standard input if none are given. Synopses: @smallexample od [@var{option}]@dots{} [@var{file}]@dots{} od [-abcdfilosx]@dots{} [@var{file}] [[+]@var{offset}[.][b]] od [@var{option}]@dots{} --traditional [@var{file}]@c [[+]@var{offset}[.][b] [[+]@var{label}[.][b]]] @end smallexample Each line of output consists of the offset in the input, followed by groups of data from the file. By default, @command{od} prints the offset in octal, and each group of file data is a C @code{short int}'s worth of input printed as a single octal number. If @var{offset} is given, it specifies how many input bytes to skip before formatting and writing. By default, it is interpreted as an octal number, but the optional trailing decimal point causes it to be interpreted as decimal. If no decimal is specified and the offset begins with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} it is interpreted as a hexadecimal number. If there is a trailing @samp{b}, the number of bytes skipped will be @var{offset} multiplied by 512. If a command is of both the first and second forms, the second form is assumed if the last operand begins with @samp{+} or (if there are two operands) a digit. For example, in @samp{od foo 10} and @samp{od +10} the @samp{10} is an offset, whereas in @samp{od 10} the @samp{10} is a file name. The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @item -A @var{radix} @itemx --address-radix=@var{radix} @opindex -A @opindex --address-radix @cindex radix for file offsets @cindex file offset radix Select the base in which file offsets are printed. @var{radix} can be one of the following: @table @samp @item d decimal; @item o octal; @item x hexadecimal; @item n none (do not print offsets). @end table The default is octal. @item --endian=@var{order} @opindex --endian @cindex byte-swapping @cindex endianness Reorder input bytes, to handle inputs with differing byte orders, or to provide consistent output independent of the endian convention of the current system. Swapping is performed according to the specified @option{--type} size and endian @var{order}, which can be @samp{little} or @samp{big}. @item -j @var{bytes} @itemx --skip-bytes=@var{bytes} @opindex -j @opindex --skip-bytes Skip @var{bytes} input bytes before formatting and writing. If @var{bytes} begins with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X}, it is interpreted in hexadecimal; otherwise, if it begins with @samp{0}, in octal; otherwise, in decimal. @multiplierSuffixes{bytes} @item -N @var{bytes} @itemx --read-bytes=@var{bytes} @opindex -N @opindex --read-bytes Output at most @var{bytes} bytes of the input. Prefixes and suffixes on @code{bytes} are interpreted as for the @option{-j} option. @item -S @var{bytes} @itemx --strings[=@var{bytes}] @opindex -S @opindex --strings @cindex string constants, outputting Instead of the normal output, output only @dfn{string constants}: at least @var{bytes} consecutive ASCII graphic characters, followed by a zero byte (ASCII NUL). Prefixes and suffixes on @var{bytes} are interpreted as for the @option{-j} option. If @var{bytes} is omitted with @option{--strings}, the default is 3. @item -t @var{type} @itemx --format=@var{type} @opindex -t @opindex --format Select the format in which to output the file data. @var{type} is a string of one or more of the below type indicator characters. If you include more than one type indicator character in a single @var{type} string, or use this option more than once, @command{od} writes one copy of each output line using each of the data types that you specified, in the order that you specified. Adding a trailing ``z'' to any type specification appends a display of the single byte character representation of the printable characters to the output line generated by the type specification. @table @samp @item a named character, ignoring high-order bit @item c printable single byte character, C backslash escape or a 3 digit octal sequence @item d signed decimal @item f floating point (@pxref{Floating point}) @item o octal @item u unsigned decimal @item x hexadecimal @end table The type @code{a} outputs things like @samp{sp} for space, @samp{nl} for newline, and @samp{nul} for a zero byte. Only the least significant seven bits of each byte is used; the high-order bit is ignored. Type @code{c} outputs @samp{ }, @samp{\n}, and @code{\0}, respectively. @cindex type size Except for types @samp{a} and @samp{c}, you can specify the number of bytes to use in interpreting each number in the given data type by following the type indicator character with a decimal integer. Alternately, you can specify the size of one of the C compiler's built-in data types by following the type indicator character with one of the following characters. For integers (@samp{d}, @samp{o}, @samp{u}, @samp{x}): @table @samp @item C char @item S short @item I int @item L long @end table For floating point (@code{f}): @table @asis @item F float @item D double @item L long double @end table @item -v @itemx --output-duplicates @opindex -v @opindex --output-duplicates Output consecutive lines that are identical. By default, when two or more consecutive output lines would be identical, @command{od} outputs only the first line, and puts just an asterisk on the following line to indicate the elision. @item -w[@var{n}] @itemx --width[=@var{n}] @opindex -w @opindex --width Dump @code{n} input bytes per output line. This must be a multiple of the least common multiple of the sizes associated with the specified output types. If this option is not given at all, the default is 16. If @var{n} is omitted, the default is 32. @end table The next several options are shorthands for format specifications. GNU @command{od} accepts any combination of shorthands and format specification options. These options accumulate. @table @samp @item -a @opindex -a Output as named characters. Equivalent to @samp{-t a}. @item -b @opindex -b Output as octal bytes. Equivalent to @samp{-t o1}. @item -c @opindex -c Output as printable single byte characters, C backslash escapes or 3 digit octal sequences. Equivalent to @samp{-t c}. @item -d @opindex -d Output as unsigned decimal two-byte units. Equivalent to @samp{-t u2}. @item -f @opindex -f Output as floats. Equivalent to @samp{-t fF}. @item -i @opindex -i Output as decimal ints. Equivalent to @samp{-t dI}. @item -l @opindex -l Output as decimal long ints. Equivalent to @samp{-t dL}. @item -o @opindex -o Output as octal two-byte units. Equivalent to @option{-t o2}. @item -s @opindex -s Output as decimal two-byte units. Equivalent to @option{-t d2}. @item -x @opindex -x Output as hexadecimal two-byte units. Equivalent to @samp{-t x2}. @item --traditional @opindex --traditional Recognize the non-option label argument that traditional @command{od} accepted. The following syntax: @smallexample od --traditional [@var{file}] [[+]@var{offset}[.][b] [[+]@var{label}[.][b]]] @end smallexample @noindent can be used to specify at most one file and optional arguments specifying an offset and a pseudo-start address, @var{label}. The @var{label} argument is interpreted just like @var{offset}, but it specifies an initial pseudo-address. The pseudo-addresses are displayed in parentheses following any normal address. @end table @exitstatus @node base32 invocation @section @command{base32}: Transform data into printable data @pindex base32 @cindex base32 encoding @command{base32} transforms data read from a file, or standard input, into (or from) base32 encoded form. The base32 encoded form uses printable ASCII characters to represent binary data. The usage and options of this command are precisely the same as for @command{base64}. @xref{base64 invocation}. @node base64 invocation @section @command{base64}: Transform data into printable data @pindex base64 @cindex base64 encoding @command{base64} transforms data read from a file, or standard input, into (or from) base64 encoded form. The base64 encoded form uses printable ASCII characters to represent binary data. Synopses: @smallexample base64 [@var{option}]@dots{} [@var{file}] base64 --decode [@var{option}]@dots{} [@var{file}] @end smallexample The base64 encoding expands data to roughly 133% of the original. The base32 encoding expands data to roughly 160% of the original. The format conforms to @uref{https://tools.ietf.org/search/rfc4648, RFC 4648}. The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @item -w @var{cols} @itemx --wrap=@var{cols} @opindex -w @opindex --wrap @cindex wrap data @cindex column to wrap data after During encoding, wrap lines after @var{cols} characters. This must be a positive number. The default is to wrap after 76 characters. Use the value 0 to disable line wrapping altogether. @item -d @itemx --decode @opindex -d @opindex --decode @cindex Decode base64 data @cindex Base64 decoding Change the mode of operation, from the default of encoding data, to decoding data. Input is expected to be base64 encoded data, and the output will be the original data. @item -i @itemx --ignore-garbage @opindex -i @opindex --ignore-garbage @cindex Ignore garbage in base64 stream When decoding, newlines are always accepted. During decoding, ignore unrecognized bytes, to permit distorted data to be decoded. @end table @exitstatus @node Formatting file contents @chapter Formatting file contents @cindex formatting file contents These commands reformat the contents of files. @menu * fmt invocation:: Reformat paragraph text. * pr invocation:: Paginate or columnate files for printing. * fold invocation:: Wrap input lines to fit in specified width. @end menu @node fmt invocation @section @command{fmt}: Reformat paragraph text @pindex fmt @cindex reformatting paragraph text @cindex paragraphs, reformatting @cindex text, reformatting @command{fmt} fills and joins lines to produce output lines of (at most) a given number of characters (75 by default). Synopsis: @example fmt [@var{option}]@dots{} [@var{file}]@dots{} @end example @command{fmt} reads from the specified @var{file} arguments (or standard input if none are given), and writes to standard output. By default, blank lines, spaces between words, and indentation are preserved in the output; successive input lines with different indentation are not joined; tabs are expanded on input and introduced on output. @cindex line-breaking @cindex sentences and line-breaking @cindex Knuth, Donald E. @cindex Plass, Michael F. @command{fmt} prefers breaking lines at the end of a sentence, and tries to avoid line breaks after the first word of a sentence or before the last word of a sentence. A @dfn{sentence break} is defined as either the end of a paragraph or a word ending in any of @samp{.?!}, followed by two spaces or end of line, ignoring any intervening parentheses or quotes. Like @TeX{}, @command{fmt} reads entire ``paragraphs'' before choosing line breaks; the algorithm is a variant of that given by Donald E. Knuth and Michael F. Plass in ``Breaking Paragraphs Into Lines'', @cite{Software---Practice & Experience} @b{11}, 11 (November 1981), 1119--1184. The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @item -c @itemx --crown-margin @opindex -c @opindex --crown-margin @cindex crown margin @dfn{Crown margin} mode: preserve the indentation of the first two lines within a paragraph, and align the left margin of each subsequent line with that of the second line. @item -t @itemx --tagged-paragraph @opindex -t @opindex --tagged-paragraph @cindex tagged paragraphs @dfn{Tagged paragraph} mode: like crown margin mode, except that if indentation of the first line of a paragraph is the same as the indentation of the second, the first line is treated as a one-line paragraph. @item -s @itemx --split-only @opindex -s @opindex --split-only Split lines only. Do not join short lines to form longer ones. This prevents sample lines of code, and other such ``formatted'' text from being unduly combined. @item -u @itemx --uniform-spacing @opindex -u @opindex --uniform-spacing Uniform spacing. Reduce spacing between words to one space, and spacing between sentences to two spaces. @item -@var{width} @itemx -w @var{width} @itemx --width=@var{width} @opindex -@var{width} @opindex -w @opindex --width Fill output lines up to @var{width} characters (default 75 or @var{goal} plus 10, if @var{goal} is provided). @item -g @var{goal} @itemx --goal=@var{goal} @opindex -g @opindex --goal @command{fmt} initially tries to make lines @var{goal} characters wide. By default, this is 7% shorter than @var{width}. @item -p @var{prefix} @itemx --prefix=@var{prefix} Only lines beginning with @var{prefix} (possibly preceded by whitespace) are subject to formatting. The prefix and any preceding whitespace are stripped for the formatting and then re-attached to each formatted output line. One use is to format certain kinds of program comments, while leaving the code unchanged. @end table @exitstatus @node pr invocation @section @command{pr}: Paginate or columnate files for printing @pindex pr @cindex printing, preparing files for @cindex multicolumn output, generating @cindex merging files in parallel @command{pr} writes each @var{file} (@samp{-} means standard input), or standard input if none are given, to standard output, paginating and optionally outputting in multicolumn format; optionally merges all @var{file}s, printing all in parallel, one per column. Synopsis: @example pr [@var{option}]@dots{} [@var{file}]@dots{} @end example @vindex LC_MESSAGES By default, a 5-line header is printed at each page: two blank lines; a line with the date, the file name, and the page count; and two more blank lines. A footer of five blank lines is also printed. The default @var{page_length} is 66 lines. The default number of text lines is therefore 56. The text line of the header takes the form @samp{@var{date} @var{string} @var{page}}, with spaces inserted around @var{string} so that the line takes up the full @var{page_width}. Here, @var{date} is the date (see the @option{-D} or @option{--date-format} option for details), @var{string} is the centered header string, and @var{page} identifies the page number. The @env{LC_MESSAGES} locale category affects the spelling of @var{page}; in the default C locale, it is @samp{Page @var{number}} where @var{number} is the decimal page number. Form feeds in the input cause page breaks in the output. Multiple form feeds produce empty pages. Columns are of equal width, separated by an optional string (default is @samp{space}). For multicolumn output, lines will always be truncated to @var{page_width} (default 72), unless you use the @option{-J} option. For single column output no line truncation occurs by default. Use @option{-W} option to truncate lines in that case. The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @item +@var{first_page}[:@var{last_page}] @itemx --pages=@var{first_page}[:@var{last_page}] @c The two following @opindex lines evoke warnings because they contain ':' @c The 'info' spec does not permit that. If we use those lines, we end @c up with truncated index entries that don't work. @c @opindex +@var{first_page}[:@var{last_page}] @c @opindex --pages=@var{first_page}[:@var{last_page}] @opindex +@var{page_range} @opindex --pages=@var{page_range} Begin printing with page @var{first_page} and stop with @var{last_page}. Missing @samp{:@var{last_page}} implies end of file. While estimating the number of skipped pages each form feed in the input file results in a new page. Page counting with and without @samp{+@var{first_page}} is identical. By default, counting starts with the first page of input file (not first page printed). Line numbering may be altered by @option{-N} option. @item -@var{column} @itemx --columns=@var{column} @opindex -@var{column} @opindex --columns @cindex down columns With each single @var{file}, produce @var{column} columns of output (default is 1) and print columns down, unless @option{-a} is used. The column width is automatically decreased as @var{column} increases; unless you use the @option{-W/-w} option to increase @var{page_width} as well. This option might well cause some lines to be truncated. The number of lines in the columns on each page are balanced. The options @option{-e} and @option{-i} are on for multiple text-column output. Together with @option{-J} option column alignment and line truncation is turned off. Lines of full length are joined in a free field format and @option{-S} option may set field separators. @option{-@var{column}} may not be used with @option{-m} option. @item -a @itemx --across @opindex -a @opindex --across @cindex across columns With each single @var{file}, print columns across rather than down. The @option{-@var{column}} option must be given with @var{column} greater than one. If a line is too long to fit in a column, it is truncated. @item -c @itemx --show-control-chars @opindex -c @opindex --show-control-chars Print control characters using hat notation (e.g., @samp{^G}); print other nonprinting characters in octal backslash notation. By default, nonprinting characters are not changed. @item -d @itemx --double-space @opindex -d @opindex --double-space @cindex double spacing Double space the output. @item -D @var{format} @itemx --date-format=@var{format} @cindex time formats @cindex formatting times Format header dates using @var{format}, using the same conventions as for the command @samp{date +@var{format}}. @xref{date invocation}. Except for directives, which start with @samp{%}, characters in @var{format} are printed unchanged. You can use this option to specify an arbitrary string in place of the header date, e.g., @option{--date-format="Monday morning"}. @vindex POSIXLY_CORRECT @vindex LC_TIME The default date format is @samp{%Y-%m-%d %H:%M} (for example, @samp{2001-12-04 23:59}); but if the @env{POSIXLY_CORRECT} environment variable is set and the @env{LC_TIME} locale category specifies the POSIX locale, the default is @samp{%b %e %H:%M %Y} (for example, @samp{Dec@ @ 4 23:59 2001}. @vindex TZ Timestamps are listed according to the time zone rules specified by the @env{TZ} environment variable, or by the system default rules if @env{TZ} is not set. @xref{TZ Variable,, Specifying the Time Zone with @env{TZ}, libc, The GNU C Library Reference Manual}. @item -e[@var{in-tabchar}[@var{in-tabwidth}]] @itemx --expand-tabs[=@var{in-tabchar}[@var{in-tabwidth}]] @opindex -e @opindex --expand-tabs @cindex input tabs Expand @var{tab}s to spaces on input. Optional argument @var{in-tabchar} is the input tab character (default is the TAB character). Second optional argument @var{in-tabwidth} is the input tab character's width (default is 8). @item -f @itemx -F @itemx --form-feed @opindex -F @opindex -f @opindex --form-feed Use a form feed instead of newlines to separate output pages. This does not alter the default page length of 66 lines. @item -h @var{header} @itemx --header=@var{header} @opindex -h @opindex --header Replace the file name in the header with the centered string @var{header}. When using the shell, @var{header} should be quoted and should be separated from @option{-h} by a space. @item -i[@var{out-tabchar}[@var{out-tabwidth}]] @itemx --output-tabs[=@var{out-tabchar}[@var{out-tabwidth}]] @opindex -i @opindex --output-tabs @cindex output tabs Replace spaces with @var{tab}s on output. Optional argument @var{out-tabchar} is the output tab character (default is the TAB character). Second optional argument @var{out-tabwidth} is the output tab character's width (default is 8). @item -J @itemx --join-lines @opindex -J @opindex --join-lines Merge lines of full length. Used together with the column options @option{-@var{column}}, @option{-a -@var{column}} or @option{-m}. Turns off @option{-W/-w} line truncation; no column alignment used; may be used with @option{--sep-string[=@var{string}]}. @option{-J} has been introduced (together with @option{-W} and @option{--sep-string}) to disentangle the old (POSIX-compliant) options @option{-w} and @option{-s} along with the three column options. @item -l @var{page_length} @itemx --length=@var{page_length} @opindex -l @opindex --length Set the page length to @var{page_length} (default 66) lines, including the lines of the header [and the footer]. If @var{page_length} is less than or equal to 10, the header and footer are omitted, as if the @option{-t} option had been given. @item -m @itemx --merge @opindex -m @opindex --merge Merge and print all @var{file}s in parallel, one in each column. If a line is too long to fit in a column, it is truncated, unless the @option{-J} option is used. @option{--sep-string[=@var{string}]} may be used. Empty pages in some @var{file}s (form feeds set) produce empty columns, still marked by @var{string}. The result is a continuous line numbering and column marking throughout the whole merged file. Completely empty merged pages show no separators or line numbers. The default header becomes @samp{@var{date} @var{page}} with spaces inserted in the middle; this may be used with the @option{-h} or @option{--header} option to fill up the middle blank part. @item -n[@var{number-separator}[@var{digits}]] @itemx --number-lines[=@var{number-separator}[@var{digits}]] @opindex -n @opindex --number-lines Provide @var{digits} digit line numbering (default for @var{digits} is 5). With multicolumn output the number occupies the first @var{digits} column positions of each text column or only each line of @option{-m} output. With single column output the number precedes each line just as @option{-m} does. Default counting of the line numbers starts with the first line of the input file (not the first line printed, compare the @option{--page} option and @option{-N} option). Optional argument @var{number-separator} is the character appended to the line number to separate it from the text followed. The default separator is the TAB character. In a strict sense a TAB is always printed with single column output only. The TAB width varies with the TAB position, e.g., with the left @var{margin} specified by @option{-o} option. With multicolumn output priority is given to @samp{equal width of output columns} (a POSIX specification). The TAB width is fixed to the value of the first column and does not change with different values of left @var{margin}. That means a fixed number of spaces is always printed in the place of the @var{number-separator} TAB@. The tabification depends upon the output position. @item -N @var{line_number} @itemx --first-line-number=@var{line_number} @opindex -N @opindex --first-line-number Start line counting with the number @var{line_number} at first line of first page printed (in most cases not the first line of the input file). @item -o @var{margin} @itemx --indent=@var{margin} @opindex -o @opindex --indent @cindex indenting lines @cindex left margin Indent each line with a margin @var{margin} spaces wide (default is zero). The total page width is the size of the margin plus the @var{page_width} set with the @option{-W/-w} option. A limited overflow may occur with numbered single column output (compare @option{-n} option). @item -r @itemx --no-file-warnings @opindex -r @opindex --no-file-warnings Do not print a warning message when an argument @var{file} cannot be opened. (The exit status will still be nonzero, however.) @item -s[@var{char}] @itemx --separator[=@var{char}] @opindex -s @opindex --separator Separate columns by a single character @var{char}. The default for @var{char} is the TAB character without @option{-w} and @samp{no character} with @option{-w}. Without @option{-s} the default separator @samp{space} is set. @option{-s[char]} turns off line truncation of all three column options (@option{-COLUMN}|@option{-a -COLUMN}|@option{-m}) unless @option{-w} is set. This is a POSIX-compliant formulation. @item -S[@var{string}] @itemx --sep-string[=@var{string}] @opindex -S @opindex --sep-string Use @var{string} to separate output columns. The @option{-S} option doesn't affect the @option{-W/-w} option, unlike the @option{-s} option which does. It does not affect line truncation or column alignment. Without @option{-S}, and with @option{-J}, @command{pr} uses the default output separator, TAB@. Without @option{-S} or @option{-J}, @command{pr} uses a @samp{space} (same as @option{-S"@w{ }"}). If no @samp{@var{string}} argument is specified, @samp{""} is assumed. @item -t @itemx --omit-header @opindex -t @opindex --omit-header Do not print the usual header [and footer] on each page, and do not fill out the bottom of pages (with blank lines or a form feed). No page structure is produced, but form feeds set in the input files are retained. The predefined pagination is not changed. @option{-t} or @option{-T} may be useful together with other options; e.g.: @option{-t -e4}, expand TAB characters in the input file to 4 spaces but don't make any other changes. Use of @option{-t} overrides @option{-h}. @item -T @itemx --omit-pagination @opindex -T @opindex --omit-pagination Do not print header [and footer]. In addition eliminate all form feeds set in the input files. @item -v @itemx --show-nonprinting @opindex -v @opindex --show-nonprinting Print nonprinting characters in octal backslash notation. @item -w @var{page_width} @itemx --width=@var{page_width} @opindex -w @opindex --width Set page width to @var{page_width} characters for multiple text-column output only (default for @var{page_width} is 72). The specified @var{page_width} is rounded down so that columns have equal width. @option{-s[CHAR]} turns off the default page width and any line truncation and column alignment. Lines of full length are merged, regardless of the column options set. No @var{page_width} setting is possible with single column output. A POSIX-compliant formulation. @item -W @var{page_width} @itemx --page_width=@var{page_width} @opindex -W @opindex --page_width Set the page width to @var{page_width} characters, honored with and without a column option. With a column option, the specified @var{page_width} is rounded down so that columns have equal width. Text lines are truncated, unless @option{-J} is used. Together with one of the three column options (@option{-@var{column}}, @option{-a -@var{column}} or @option{-m}) column alignment is always used. The separator options @option{-S} or @option{-s} don't disable the @option{-W} option. Default is 72 characters. Without @option{-W @var{page_width}} and without any of the column options NO line truncation is used (defined to keep downward compatibility and to meet most frequent tasks). That's equivalent to @option{-W 72 -J}@. The header line is never truncated. @end table @exitstatus @node fold invocation @section @command{fold}: Wrap input lines to fit in specified width @pindex fold @cindex wrapping long input lines @cindex folding long input lines @command{fold} writes each @var{file} (@option{-} means standard input), or standard input if none are given, to standard output, breaking long lines. Synopsis: @example fold [@var{option}]@dots{} [@var{file}]@dots{} @end example By default, @command{fold} breaks lines wider than 80 columns. The output is split into as many lines as necessary. @cindex screen columns @command{fold} counts screen columns by default; thus, a tab may count more than one column, backspace decreases the column count, and carriage return sets the column to zero. The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @item -b @itemx --bytes @opindex -b @opindex --bytes Count bytes rather than columns, so that tabs, backspaces, and carriage returns are each counted as taking up one column, just like other characters. @item -s @itemx --spaces @opindex -s @opindex --spaces Break at word boundaries: the line is broken after the last blank before the maximum line length. If the line contains no such blanks, the line is broken at the maximum line length as usual. @item -w @var{width} @itemx --width=@var{width} @opindex -w @opindex --width Use a maximum line length of @var{width} columns instead of 80. For compatibility @command{fold} supports an obsolete option syntax @option{-@var{width}}. New scripts should use @option{-w @var{width}} instead. @end table @exitstatus @node Output of parts of files @chapter Output of parts of files @cindex output of parts of files @cindex parts of files, output of These commands output pieces of the input. @menu * head invocation:: Output the first part of files. * tail invocation:: Output the last part of files. * split invocation:: Split a file into pieces. * csplit invocation:: Split a file into context-determined pieces. @end menu @node head invocation @section @command{head}: Output the first part of files @pindex head @cindex initial part of files, outputting @cindex first part of files, outputting @command{head} prints the first part (10 lines by default) of each @var{file}; it reads from standard input if no files are given or when given a @var{file} of @option{-}. Synopsis: @example head [@var{option}]@dots{} [@var{file}]@dots{} @end example If more than one @var{file} is specified, @command{head} prints a one-line header consisting of: @example ==> @var{file name} <== @end example @noindent before the output for each @var{file}. The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @item -c [-]@var{num} @itemx --bytes=[-]@var{num} @opindex -c @opindex --bytes Print the first @var{num} bytes, instead of initial lines. However, if @var{num} is prefixed with a @samp{-}, print all but the last @var{num} bytes of each file. @multiplierSuffixes{num} @item -n [-]@var{num} @itemx --lines=[-]@var{num} @opindex -n @opindex --lines Output the first @var{num} lines. However, if @var{num} is prefixed with a @samp{-}, print all but the last @var{num} lines of each file. Size multiplier suffixes are the same as with the @option{-c} option. @item -q @itemx --quiet @itemx --silent @opindex -q @opindex --quiet @opindex --silent Never print file name headers. @item -v @itemx --verbose @opindex -v @opindex --verbose Always print file name headers. @optZeroTerminated @end table For compatibility @command{head} also supports an obsolete option syntax @option{-[@var{num}][bkm][cqv]}, which is recognized only if it is specified first. @var{num} is a decimal number optionally followed by a size letter (@samp{b}, @samp{k}, @samp{m}) as in @option{-c}, or @samp{l} to mean count by lines, or other option letters (@samp{cqv}). Scripts intended for standard hosts should use @option{-c @var{num}} or @option{-n @var{num}} instead. If your script must also run on hosts that support only the obsolete syntax, it is usually simpler to avoid @command{head}, e.g., by using @samp{sed 5q} instead of @samp{head -5}. @exitstatus @node tail invocation @section @command{tail}: Output the last part of files @pindex tail @cindex last part of files, outputting @command{tail} prints the last part (10 lines by default) of each @var{file}; it reads from standard input if no files are given or when given a @var{file} of @samp{-}. Synopsis: @example tail [@var{option}]@dots{} [@var{file}]@dots{} @end example If more than one @var{file} is specified, @command{tail} prints a one-line header before the output for each @var{file}, consisting of: @example ==> @var{file name} <== @end example For further processing of tail output, it can be useful to convert the file headers to line prefixes, which can be done like: @example tail @dots{} | awk ' /^==> .* <==$/ @{prefix=substr($0,5,length-8)":"; next@} @{print prefix$0@} ' | @dots{} @end example @cindex BSD @command{tail} GNU @command{tail} can output any amount of data (some other versions of @command{tail} cannot). It also has no @option{-r} option (print in reverse), since reversing a file is really a different job from printing the end of a file; BSD @command{tail} (which is the one with @option{-r}) can only reverse files that are at most as large as its buffer, which is typically 32 KiB@. A more reliable and versatile way to reverse files is the GNU @command{tac} command. The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @item -c [+]@var{num} @itemx --bytes=[+]@var{num} @opindex -c @opindex --bytes Output the last @var{num} bytes, instead of final lines. However, if @var{num} is prefixed with a @samp{+}, start printing with byte @var{num} from the start of each file, instead of from the end. @multiplierSuffixes{num} @item -f @itemx --follow[=@var{how}] @opindex -f @opindex --follow @cindex growing files @vindex name @r{follow option} @vindex descriptor @r{follow option} Loop forever trying to read more characters at the end of the file, presumably because the file is growing. If more than one file is given, @command{tail} prints a header whenever it gets output from a different file, to indicate which file that output is from. There are two ways to specify how you'd like to track files with this option, but that difference is noticeable only when a followed file is removed or renamed. If you'd like to continue to track the end of a growing file even after it has been unlinked, use @option{--follow=descriptor}. This is the default behavior, but it is not useful if you're tracking a log file that may be rotated (removed or renamed, then reopened). In that case, use @option{--follow=name} to track the named file, perhaps by reopening it periodically to see if it has been removed and recreated by some other program. Note that the inotify-based implementation handles this case without the need for any periodic reopening. No matter which method you use, if the tracked file is determined to have shrunk, @command{tail} prints a message saying the file has been truncated and resumes tracking the end of the file from the newly-determined endpoint. When a file is removed, @command{tail}'s behavior depends on whether it is following the name or the descriptor. When following by name, tail can detect that a file has been removed and gives a message to that effect, and if @option{--retry} has been specified it will continue checking periodically to see if the file reappears. When following a descriptor, tail does not detect that the file has been unlinked or renamed and issues no message; even though the file may no longer be accessible via its original name, it may still be growing. The option values @samp{descriptor} and @samp{name} may be specified only with the long form of the option, not with @option{-f}. The @option{-f} option is ignored if no @var{file} operand is specified and standard input is a FIFO or a pipe. Likewise, the @option{-f} option has no effect for any operand specified as @samp{-}, when standard input is a FIFO or a pipe. With kernel inotify support, output is triggered by file changes and is generally very prompt. Otherwise, @command{tail} sleeps for one second between checks--- use @option{--sleep-interval=@var{n}} to change that default---which can make the output appear slightly less responsive or bursty. When using tail without inotify support, you can make it more responsive by using a sub-second sleep interval, e.g., via an alias like this: @example alias tail='tail -s.1' @end example @item -F @opindex -F This option is the same as @option{--follow=name --retry}. That is, tail will attempt to reopen a file when it is removed. Should this fail, tail will keep trying until it becomes accessible again. @item --max-unchanged-stats=@var{n} @opindex --max-unchanged-stats When tailing a file by name, if there have been @var{n} (default n=@value{DEFAULT_MAX_N_UNCHANGED_STATS_BETWEEN_OPENS}) consecutive iterations for which the file has not changed, then @code{open}/@code{fstat} the file to determine if that file name is still associated with the same device/inode-number pair as before. When following a log file that is rotated, this is approximately the number of seconds between when tail prints the last pre-rotation lines and when it prints the lines that have accumulated in the new log file. This option is meaningful only when polling (i.e., without inotify) and when following by name. @item -n [+]@var{num} @itemx --lines=[+]@var{} @opindex -n @opindex --lines Output the last @var{num} lines. However, if @var{num} is prefixed with a @samp{+}, start printing with line @var{num} from the start of each file, instead of from the end. Size multiplier suffixes are the same as with the @option{-c} option. @item --pid=@var{pid} @opindex --pid When following by name or by descriptor, you may specify the process ID, @var{pid}, of the sole writer of all @var{file} arguments. Then, shortly after that process terminates, tail will also terminate. This will work properly only if the writer and the tailing process are running on the same machine. For example, to save the output of a build in a file and to watch the file grow, if you invoke @command{make} and @command{tail} like this then the tail process will stop when your build completes. Without this option, you would have had to kill the @code{tail -f} process yourself. @example $ make >& makerr & tail --pid=$! -f makerr @end example If you specify a @var{pid} that is not in use or that does not correspond to the process that is writing to the tailed files, then @command{tail} may terminate long before any @var{file}s stop growing or it may not terminate until long after the real writer has terminated. Note that @option{--pid} cannot be supported on some systems; @command{tail} will print a warning if this is the case. @item -q @itemx --quiet @itemx --silent @opindex -q @opindex --quiet @opindex --silent Never print file name headers. @item --retry @opindex --retry Indefinitely try to open the specified file. This option is useful mainly when following (and otherwise issues a warning). When following by file descriptor (i.e., with @option{--follow=descriptor}), this option only affects the initial open of the file, as after a successful open, @command{tail} will start following the file descriptor. When following by name (i.e., with @option{--follow=name}), @command{tail} infinitely retries to re-open the given files until killed. Without this option, when @command{tail} encounters a file that doesn't exist or is otherwise inaccessible, it reports that fact and never checks it again. @item -s @var{number} @itemx --sleep-interval=@var{number} @opindex -s @opindex --sleep-interval Change the number of seconds to wait between iterations (the default is 1.0). During one iteration, every specified file is checked to see if it has changed size. Historical implementations of @command{tail} have required that @var{number} be an integer. However, GNU @command{tail} accepts an arbitrary floating point number. @xref{Floating point}. When @command{tail} uses inotify, this polling-related option is usually ignored. However, if you also specify @option{--pid=@var{p}}, @command{tail} checks whether process @var{p} is alive at least every @var{number} seconds. @item -v @itemx --verbose @opindex -v @opindex --verbose Always print file name headers. @optZeroTerminated @end table For compatibility @command{tail} also supports an obsolete usage @samp{tail -[@var{num}][bcl][f] [@var{file}]}, which is recognized only if it does not conflict with the usage described above. This obsolete form uses exactly one option and at most one file. In the option, @var{num} is an optional decimal number optionally followed by a size letter (@samp{b}, @samp{c}, @samp{l}) to mean count by 512-byte blocks, bytes, or lines, optionally followed by @samp{f} which has the same meaning as @option{-f}. @vindex _POSIX2_VERSION On systems not conforming to POSIX 1003.1-2001, the leading @samp{-} can be replaced by @samp{+} in the traditional option syntax with the same meaning as in counts, and on obsolete systems predating POSIX 1003.1-2001 traditional usage overrides normal usage when the two conflict. This behavior can be controlled with the @env{_POSIX2_VERSION} environment variable (@pxref{Standards conformance}). Scripts intended for use on standard hosts should avoid traditional syntax and should use @option{-c @var{num}[b]}, @option{-n @var{num}}, and/or @option{-f} instead. If your script must also run on hosts that support only the traditional syntax, you can often rewrite it to avoid problematic usages, e.g., by using @samp{sed -n '$p'} rather than @samp{tail -1}. If that's not possible, the script can use a test like @samp{if tail -c +1 /dev/null 2>&1; then @dots{}} to decide which syntax to use. Even if your script assumes the standard behavior, you should still beware usages whose behaviors differ depending on the POSIX version. For example, avoid @samp{tail - main.c}, since it might be interpreted as either @samp{tail main.c} or as @samp{tail -- - main.c}; avoid @samp{tail -c 4}, since it might mean either @samp{tail -c4} or @samp{tail -c 10 4}; and avoid @samp{tail +4}, since it might mean either @samp{tail ./+4} or @samp{tail -n +4}. @exitstatus @node split invocation @section @command{split}: Split a file into pieces. @pindex split @cindex splitting a file into pieces @cindex pieces, splitting a file into @command{split} creates output files containing consecutive or interleaved sections of @var{input} (standard input if none is given or @var{input} is @samp{-}). Synopsis: @example split [@var{option}] [@var{input} [@var{prefix}]] @end example By default, @command{split} puts 1000 lines of @var{input} (or whatever is left over for the last section), into each output file. @cindex output file name prefix The output files' names consist of @var{prefix} (@samp{x} by default) followed by a group of characters (@samp{aa}, @samp{ab}, @dots{} by default), such that concatenating the output files in traditional sorted order by file name produces the original input file (except @option{-nr/@var{n}}). By default split will initially create files with two generated suffix characters, and will increase this width by two when the next most significant position reaches the last character. (@samp{yz}, @samp{zaaa}, @samp{zaab}, @dots{}). In this way an arbitrary number of output files are supported, which sort as described above, even in the presence of an @option{--additional-suffix} option. If the @option{-a} option is specified and the output file names are exhausted, @command{split} reports an error without deleting the output files that it did create. The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @item -l @var{lines} @itemx --lines=@var{lines} @opindex -l @opindex --lines Put @var{lines} lines of @var{input} into each output file. If @option{--separator} is specified, then @var{lines} determines the number of records. For compatibility @command{split} also supports an obsolete option syntax @option{-@var{lines}}. New scripts should use @option{-l @var{lines}} instead. @item -b @var{size} @itemx --bytes=@var{size} @opindex -b @opindex --bytes Put @var{size} bytes of @var{input} into each output file. @multiplierSuffixes{size} @item -C @var{size} @itemx --line-bytes=@var{size} @opindex -C @opindex --line-bytes Put into each output file as many complete lines of @var{input} as possible without exceeding @var{size} bytes. Individual lines or records longer than @var{size} bytes are broken into multiple files. @var{size} has the same format as for the @option{--bytes} option. If @option{--separator} is specified, then @var{lines} determines the number of records. @item --filter=@var{command} @opindex --filter With this option, rather than simply writing to each output file, write through a pipe to the specified shell @var{command} for each output file. @var{command} should use the $FILE environment variable, which is set to a different output file name for each invocation of the command. For example, imagine that you have a 1TiB compressed file that, if uncompressed, would be too large to reside on disk, yet you must split it into individually-compressed pieces of a more manageable size. To do that, you might run this command: @example xz -dc BIG.xz | split -b200G --filter='xz > $FILE.xz' - big- @end example Assuming a 10:1 compression ratio, that would create about fifty 20GiB files with names @file{big-aa.xz}, @file{big-ab.xz}, @file{big-ac.xz}, etc. @item -n @var{chunks} @itemx --number=@var{chunks} @opindex -n @opindex --number Split @var{input} to @var{chunks} output files where @var{chunks} may be: @example @var{n} generate @var{n} files based on current size of @var{input} @var{k}/@var{n} only output @var{k}th of @var{n} to stdout l/@var{n} generate @var{n} files without splitting lines or records l/@var{k}/@var{n} likewise but only output @var{k}th of @var{n} to stdout r/@var{n} like @samp{l} but use round robin distribution r/@var{k}/@var{n} likewise but only output @var{k}th of @var{n} to stdout @end example Any excess bytes remaining after dividing the @var{input} into @var{n} chunks, are assigned to the last chunk. Any excess bytes appearing after the initial calculation are discarded (except when using @samp{r} mode). All @var{n} files are created even if there are fewer than @var{n} lines, or the @var{input} is truncated. For @samp{l} mode, chunks are approximately @var{input} size / @var{n}. The @var{input} is partitioned into @var{n} equal sized portions, with the last assigned any excess. If a line @emph{starts} within a partition it is written completely to the corresponding file. Since lines or records are not split even if they overlap a partition, the files written can be larger or smaller than the partition size, and even empty if a line/record is so long as to completely overlap the partition. For @samp{r} mode, the size of @var{input} is irrelevant, and so can be a pipe for example. @item -a @var{length} @itemx --suffix-length=@var{length} @opindex -a @opindex --suffix-length Use suffixes of length @var{length}. If a @var{length} of 0 is specified, this is the same as if (any previous) @option{-a} was not specified, and thus enables the default behavior, which starts the suffix length at 2, and unless @option{-n} or @option{--numeric-suffixes=@var{from}} is specified, will auto increase the length by 2 as required. @item -d @itemx --numeric-suffixes[=@var{from}] @opindex -d @opindex --numeric-suffixes Use digits in suffixes rather than lower-case letters. The numerical suffix counts from @var{from} if specified, 0 otherwise. @var{from} is supported with the long form option, and is used to either set the initial suffix for a single run, or to set the suffix offset for independently split inputs, and consequently the auto suffix length expansion described above is disabled. Therefore you may also want to use option @option{-a} to allow suffixes beyond @samp{99}. Note if option @option{--number} is specified and the number of files is less than @var{from}, a single run is assumed and the minimum suffix length required is automatically determined. @item --additional-suffix=@var{suffix} @opindex --additional-suffix Append an additional @var{suffix} to output file names. @var{suffix} must not contain slash. @item -e @itemx --elide-empty-files @opindex -e @opindex --elide-empty-files Suppress the generation of zero-length output files. This can happen with the @option{--number} option if a file is (truncated to be) shorter than the number requested, or if a line is so long as to completely span a chunk. The output file sequence numbers, always run consecutively even when this option is specified. @item -t @var{separator} @itemx --separator=@var{separator} @opindex -t @opindex --separator @cindex line separator character @cindex record separator character Use character @var{separator} as the record separator instead of the default newline character (ASCII LF). To specify ASCII NUL as the separator, use the two-character string @samp{\0}, e.g., @samp{split -t '\0'}. @item -u @itemx --unbuffered @opindex -u @opindex --unbuffered Immediately copy input to output in @option{--number r/@dots{}} mode, which is a much slower mode of operation. @item --verbose @opindex --verbose Write a diagnostic just before each output file is opened. @end table @exitstatus Here are a few examples to illustrate how the @option{--number} (@option{-n}) option works: Notice how, by default, one line may be split onto two or more: @example $ seq -w 6 10 > k; split -n3 k; head xa? ==> xaa <== 06 07 ==> xab <== 08 0 ==> xac <== 9 10 @end example Use the "l/" modifier to suppress that: @example $ seq -w 6 10 > k; split -nl/3 k; head xa? ==> xaa <== 06 07 ==> xab <== 08 09 ==> xac <== 10 @end example Use the "r/" modifier to distribute lines in a round-robin fashion: @example $ seq -w 6 10 > k; split -nr/3 k; head xa? ==> xaa <== 06 09 ==> xab <== 07 10 ==> xac <== 08 @end example You can also extract just the Kth chunk. This extracts and prints just the 7th "chunk" of 33: @example $ seq 100 > k; split -nl/7/33 k 20 21 22 @end example @node csplit invocation @section @command{csplit}: Split a file into context-determined pieces @pindex csplit @cindex context splitting @cindex splitting a file into pieces by context @command{csplit} creates zero or more output files containing sections of @var{input} (standard input if @var{input} is @samp{-}). Synopsis: @example csplit [@var{option}]@dots{} @var{input} @var{pattern}@dots{} @end example The contents of the output files are determined by the @var{pattern} arguments, as detailed below. An error occurs if a @var{pattern} argument refers to a nonexistent line of the input file (e.g., if no remaining line matches a given regular expression). After every @var{pattern} has been matched, any remaining input is copied into one last output file. By default, @command{csplit} prints the number of bytes written to each output file after it has been created. The types of pattern arguments are: @table @samp @item @var{n} Create an output file containing the input up to but not including line @var{n} (a positive integer). If followed by a repeat count, also create an output file containing the next @var{n} lines of the input file once for each repeat. @item /@var{regexp}/[@var{offset}] Create an output file containing the current line up to (but not including) the next line of the input file that contains a match for @var{regexp}. The optional @var{offset} is an integer. If it is given, the input up to (but not including) the matching line plus or minus @var{offset} is put into the output file, and the line after that begins the next section of input. @item %@var{regexp}%[@var{offset}] Like the previous type, except that it does not create an output file, so that section of the input file is effectively ignored. @item @{@var{repeat-count}@} Repeat the previous pattern @var{repeat-count} additional times. The @var{repeat-count} can either be a positive integer or an asterisk, meaning repeat as many times as necessary until the input is exhausted. @end table The output files' names consist of a prefix (@samp{xx} by default) followed by a suffix. By default, the suffix is an ascending sequence of two-digit decimal numbers from @samp{00} to @samp{99}. In any case, concatenating the output files in sorted order by file name produces the original input file. By default, if @command{csplit} encounters an error or receives a hangup, interrupt, quit, or terminate signal, it removes any output files that it has created so far before it exits. The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @item -f @var{prefix} @itemx --prefix=@var{prefix} @opindex -f @opindex --prefix @cindex output file name prefix Use @var{prefix} as the output file name prefix. @item -b @var{format} @itemx --suffix-format=@var{format} @opindex -b @opindex --suffix-format @cindex output file name suffix Use @var{format} as the output file name suffix. When this option is specified, the suffix string must include exactly one @code{printf(3)}-style conversion specification, possibly including format specification flags, a field width, a precision specifications, or all of these kinds of modifiers. The format letter must convert a binary unsigned integer argument to readable form. The format letters @samp{d} and @samp{i} are aliases for @samp{u}, and the @samp{u}, @samp{o}, @samp{x}, and @samp{X} conversions are allowed. The entire @var{format} is given (with the current output file number) to @code{sprintf(3)} to form the file name suffixes for each of the individual output files in turn. If this option is used, the @option{--digits} option is ignored. @item -n @var{digits} @itemx --digits=@var{digits} @opindex -n @opindex --digits Use output file names containing numbers that are @var{digits} digits long instead of the default 2. @item -k @itemx --keep-files @opindex -k @opindex --keep-files Do not remove output files when errors are encountered. @item --suppress-matched @opindex --suppress-matched Do not output lines matching the specified @var{pattern}. I.e., suppress the boundary line from the start of the second and subsequent splits. @item -z @itemx --elide-empty-files @opindex -z @opindex --elide-empty-files Suppress the generation of zero-length output files. (In cases where the section delimiters of the input file are supposed to mark the first lines of each of the sections, the first output file will generally be a zero-length file unless you use this option.) The output file sequence numbers always run consecutively starting from 0, even when this option is specified. @item -s @itemx -q @itemx --silent @itemx --quiet @opindex -s @opindex -q @opindex --silent @opindex --quiet Do not print counts of output file sizes. @end table @exitstatus Here is an example of its usage. First, create an empty directory for the exercise, and cd into it: @example $ mkdir d && cd d @end example Now, split the sequence of 1..14 on lines that end with 0 or 5: @example $ seq 14 | csplit - '/[05]$/' '@{*@}' 8 10 15 @end example Each number printed above is the size of an output file that csplit has just created. List the names of those output files: @example $ ls xx00 xx01 xx02 @end example Use @command{head} to show their contents: @example $ head xx* ==> xx00 <== 1 2 3 4 ==> xx01 <== 5 6 7 8 9 ==> xx02 <== 10 11 12 13 14 @end example Example of splitting input by empty lines: @example $ csplit --suppress-matched @var{input.txt} '/^$/' '@{*@}' @end example @c @c TODO: "uniq" already supports "--group". @c when it gets the "--key" option, uncomment this example. @c @c Example of splitting input file, based on the value of column 2: @c @c @example @c $ cat @var{input.txt} | @c sort -k2,2 | @c uniq --group -k2,2 | @c csplit -m '/^$/' '@{*@}' @c @end example @node Summarizing files @chapter Summarizing files @cindex summarizing files These commands generate just a few numbers representing entire contents of files. @menu * wc invocation:: Print newline, word, and byte counts. * sum invocation:: Print checksum and block counts. * cksum invocation:: Print CRC checksum and byte counts. * b2sum invocation:: Print or check BLAKE2 digests. * md5sum invocation:: Print or check MD5 digests. * sha1sum invocation:: Print or check SHA-1 digests. * sha2 utilities:: Print or check SHA-2 digests. @end menu @node wc invocation @section @command{wc}: Print newline, word, and byte counts @pindex wc @cindex byte count @cindex character count @cindex word count @cindex line count @command{wc} counts the number of bytes, characters, whitespace-separated words, and newlines in each given @var{file}, or standard input if none are given or for a @var{file} of @samp{-}. Synopsis: @example wc [@var{option}]@dots{} [@var{file}]@dots{} @end example @cindex total counts @command{wc} prints one line of counts for each file, and if the file was given as an argument, it prints the file name following the counts. If more than one @var{file} is given, @command{wc} prints a final line containing the cumulative counts, with the file name @file{total}. The counts are printed in this order: newlines, words, characters, bytes, maximum line length. Each count is printed right-justified in a field with at least one space between fields so that the numbers and file names normally line up nicely in columns. The width of the count fields varies depending on the inputs, so you should not depend on a particular field width. However, as a GNU extension, if only one count is printed, it is guaranteed to be printed without leading spaces. By default, @command{wc} prints three counts: the newline, words, and byte counts. Options can specify that only certain counts be printed. Options do not undo others previously given, so @example wc --bytes --words @end example @noindent prints both the byte counts and the word counts. With the @option{--max-line-length} option, @command{wc} prints the length of the longest line per file, and if there is more than one file it prints the maximum (not the sum) of those lengths. The line lengths here are measured in screen columns, according to the current locale and assuming tab positions in every 8th column. The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @item -c @itemx --bytes @opindex -c @opindex --bytes Print only the byte counts. @item -m @itemx --chars @opindex -m @opindex --chars Print only the character counts. @item -w @itemx --words @opindex -w @opindex --words Print only the word counts. @item -l @itemx --lines @opindex -l @opindex --lines Print only the newline counts. @item -L @itemx --max-line-length @opindex -L @opindex --max-line-length Print only the maximum display widths. Tabs are set at every 8th column. Display widths of wide characters are considered. Non-printable characters are given 0 width. @macro filesZeroFromOption{cmd,withTotalOption,subListOutput} @item --files0-from=@var{file} @opindex --files0-from=@var{file} @c This is commented out to avoid a texi2dvi failure. @c texi2dvi (GNU Texinfo 4.11) 1.104 @c @cindex including files from @command{\cmd\} Disallow processing files named on the command line, and instead process those named in file @var{file}; each name being terminated by a zero byte (ASCII NUL). This is useful \withTotalOption\ when the list of file names is so long that it may exceed a command line length limitation. In such cases, running @command{\cmd\} via @command{xargs} is undesirable because it splits the list into pieces and makes @command{\cmd\} print \subListOutput\ for each sublist rather than for the entire list. One way to produce a list of ASCII NUL terminated file names is with GNU @command{find}, using its @option{-print0} predicate. If @var{file} is @samp{-} then the ASCII NUL terminated file names are read from standard input. @end macro @filesZeroFromOption{wc,,a total} For example, to find the length of the longest line in any @file{.c} or @file{.h} file in the current hierarchy, do this: @example find . -name '*.[ch]' -print0 | wc -L --files0-from=- | tail -n1 @end example @end table @exitstatus @node sum invocation @section @command{sum}: Print checksum and block counts @pindex sum @cindex 16-bit checksum @cindex checksum, 16-bit @command{sum} computes a 16-bit checksum for each given @var{file}, or standard input if none are given or for a @var{file} of @samp{-}. Synopsis: @example sum [@var{option}]@dots{} [@var{file}]@dots{} @end example @command{sum} prints the checksum for each @var{file} followed by the number of blocks in the file (rounded up). If more than one @var{file} is given, file names are also printed (by default). (With the @option{--sysv} option, corresponding file names are printed when there is at least one file argument.) By default, GNU @command{sum} computes checksums using an algorithm compatible with BSD @command{sum} and prints file sizes in units of 1024-byte blocks. The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @item -r @opindex -r @cindex BSD @command{sum} Use the default (BSD compatible) algorithm. This option is included for compatibility with the System V @command{sum}. Unless @option{-s} was also given, it has no effect. @item -s @itemx --sysv @opindex -s @opindex --sysv @cindex System V @command{sum} Compute checksums using an algorithm compatible with System V @command{sum}'s default, and print file sizes in units of 512-byte blocks. @end table @command{sum} is provided for compatibility; the @command{cksum} program (see next section) is preferable in new applications. @exitstatus @node cksum invocation @section @command{cksum}: Print CRC checksum and byte counts @pindex cksum @cindex cyclic redundancy check @cindex CRC checksum @command{cksum} computes a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) checksum for each given @var{file}, or standard input if none are given or for a @var{file} of @samp{-}. Synopsis: @example cksum [@var{option}]@dots{} [@var{file}]@dots{} @end example @command{cksum} prints the CRC checksum for each file along with the number of bytes in the file, and the file name unless no arguments were given. @command{cksum} is typically used to ensure that files transferred by unreliable means (e.g., netnews) have not been corrupted, by comparing the @command{cksum} output for the received files with the @command{cksum} output for the original files (typically given in the distribution). The CRC algorithm is specified by the POSIX standard. It is not compatible with the BSD or System V @command{sum} algorithms (see the previous section); it is more robust. The only options are @option{--help} and @option{--version}. @xref{Common options}. @exitstatus @node b2sum invocation @section @command{b2sum}: Print or check BLAKE2 digests @pindex b2sum @cindex BLAKE2 @cindex 512-bit checksum @cindex checksum, 512-bit @cindex fingerprint, 512-bit @cindex message-digest, 512-bit @command{b2sum} computes a 512-bit checksum for each specified @var{file}. The same usage and options as the @command{md5sum} command are supported. @xref{md5sum invocation}. In addition @command{b2sum} supports the following options. @table @samp @item -l @itemx --length @opindex -l @opindex --length @cindex BLAKE2 hash length Change (shorten) the default digest length. This is specified in bits and thus must be a multiple of 8. This option is ignored when @option{--check} is specified, as the length is automatically determined when checking. @end table @node md5sum invocation @section @command{md5sum}: Print or check MD5 digests @pindex md5sum @cindex MD5 @cindex 128-bit checksum @cindex checksum, 128-bit @cindex fingerprint, 128-bit @cindex message-digest, 128-bit @command{md5sum} computes a 128-bit checksum (or @dfn{fingerprint} or @dfn{message-digest}) for each specified @var{file}. Note: The MD5 digest is more reliable than a simple CRC (provided by the @command{cksum} command) for detecting accidental file corruption, as the chances of accidentally having two files with identical MD5 are vanishingly small. However, it should not be considered secure against malicious tampering: although finding a file with a given MD5 fingerprint is considered infeasible at the moment, it is known how to modify certain files, including digital certificates, so that they appear valid when signed with an MD5 digest. For more secure hashes, consider using SHA-2, or the newer @command{b2sum} command. @xref{sha2 utilities}. @xref{b2sum invocation}. If a @var{file} is specified as @samp{-} or if no files are given @command{md5sum} computes the checksum for the standard input. @command{md5sum} can also determine whether a file and checksum are consistent. Synopsis: @example md5sum [@var{option}]@dots{} [@var{file}]@dots{} @end example For each @var{file}, @samp{md5sum} outputs by default, the MD5 checksum, a space, a flag indicating binary or text input mode, and the file name. Binary mode is indicated with @samp{*}, text mode with @samp{ } (space). Binary mode is the default on systems where it's significant, otherwise text mode is the default. If @var{file} contains a backslash or newline, the line is started with a backslash, and each problematic character in the file name is escaped with a backslash, making the output unambiguous even in the presence of arbitrary file names. If @var{file} is omitted or specified as @samp{-}, standard input is read. The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @item -b @itemx --binary @opindex -b @opindex --binary @cindex binary input files Treat each input file as binary, by reading it in binary mode and outputting a @samp{*} flag. This is the inverse of @option{--text}. On systems like GNU that do not distinguish between binary and text files, this option merely flags each input mode as binary: the MD5 checksum is unaffected. This option is the default on systems like MS-DOS that distinguish between binary and text files, except for reading standard input when standard input is a terminal. @item -c @itemx --check Read file names and checksum information (not data) from each @var{file} (or from stdin if no @var{file} was specified) and report whether the checksums match the contents of the named files. The input to this mode of @command{md5sum} is usually the output of a prior, checksum-generating run of @samp{md5sum}. Three input formats are supported. Either the default output format described above, the @option{--tag} output format, or the BSD reversed mode format which is similar to the default mode, but doesn't use a character to distinguish binary and text modes. @sp 1 For each such line, @command{md5sum} reads the named file and computes its MD5 checksum. Then, if the computed message digest does not match the one on the line with the file name, the file is noted as having failed the test. Otherwise, the file passes the test. By default, for each valid line, one line is written to standard output indicating whether the named file passed the test. After all checks have been performed, if there were any failures, a warning is issued to standard error. Use the @option{--status} option to inhibit that output. If any listed file cannot be opened or read, if any valid line has an MD5 checksum inconsistent with the associated file, or if no valid line is found, @command{md5sum} exits with nonzero status. Otherwise, it exits successfully. @item --ignore-missing @opindex --ignore-missing @cindex verifying MD5 checksums This option is useful only when verifying checksums. When verifying checksums, don't fail or report any status for missing files. This is useful when verifying a subset of downloaded files given a larger list of checksums. @item --quiet @opindex --quiet @cindex verifying MD5 checksums This option is useful only when verifying checksums. When verifying checksums, don't generate an 'OK' message per successfully checked file. Files that fail the verification are reported in the default one-line-per-file format. If there is any checksum mismatch, print a warning summarizing the failures to standard error. @item --status @opindex --status @cindex verifying MD5 checksums This option is useful only when verifying checksums. When verifying checksums, don't generate the default one-line-per-file diagnostic and don't output the warning summarizing any failures. Failures to open or read a file still evoke individual diagnostics to standard error. If all listed files are readable and are consistent with the associated MD5 checksums, exit successfully. Otherwise exit with a status code indicating there was a failure. @item --tag @opindex --tag @cindex BSD output Output BSD style checksums, which indicate the checksum algorithm used. As a GNU extension, file names with problematic characters are escaped as described above, with the same escaping indicator of @samp{\} at the start of the line, being used. The @option{--tag} option implies binary mode, and is disallowed with @option{--text} mode as supporting that would unnecessarily complicate the output format, while providing little benefit. @item -t @itemx --text @opindex -t @opindex --text @cindex text input files Treat each input file as text, by reading it in text mode and outputting a @samp{ } flag. This is the inverse of @option{--binary}. This option is the default on systems like GNU that do not distinguish between binary and text files. On other systems, it is the default for reading standard input when standard input is a terminal. This mode is never defaulted to if @option{--tag} is used. @item -w @itemx --warn @opindex -w @opindex --warn @cindex verifying MD5 checksums When verifying checksums, warn about improperly formatted MD5 checksum lines. This option is useful only if all but a few lines in the checked input are valid. @item --strict @opindex --strict @cindex verifying MD5 checksums When verifying checksums, if one or more input line is invalid, exit nonzero after all warnings have been issued. @end table @exitstatus @node sha1sum invocation @section @command{sha1sum}: Print or check SHA-1 digests @pindex sha1sum @cindex SHA-1 @cindex 160-bit checksum @cindex checksum, 160-bit @cindex fingerprint, 160-bit @cindex message-digest, 160-bit @command{sha1sum} computes a 160-bit checksum for each specified @var{file}. The usage and options of this command are precisely the same as for @command{md5sum}. @xref{md5sum invocation}. Note: The SHA-1 digest is more secure than MD5, and no collisions of it are known (different files having the same fingerprint). However, it is known that they can be produced with considerable, but not unreasonable, resources. For this reason, it is generally considered that SHA-1 should be gradually phased out in favor of the more secure SHA-2 hash algorithms. @xref{sha2 utilities}. @node sha2 utilities @section sha2 utilities: Print or check SHA-2 digests @pindex sha224sum @pindex sha256sum @pindex sha384sum @pindex sha512sum @cindex SHA-2 @cindex 224-bit checksum @cindex 256-bit checksum @cindex 384-bit checksum @cindex 512-bit checksum @cindex checksum, 224-bit @cindex checksum, 256-bit @cindex checksum, 384-bit @cindex checksum, 512-bit @cindex fingerprint, 224-bit @cindex fingerprint, 256-bit @cindex fingerprint, 384-bit @cindex fingerprint, 512-bit @cindex message-digest, 224-bit @cindex message-digest, 256-bit @cindex message-digest, 384-bit @cindex message-digest, 512-bit The commands @command{sha224sum}, @command{sha256sum}, @command{sha384sum} and @command{sha512sum} compute checksums of various lengths (respectively 224, 256, 384 and 512 bits), collectively known as the SHA-2 hashes. The usage and options of these commands are precisely the same as for @command{md5sum} and @command{sha1sum}. @xref{md5sum invocation}. @node Operating on sorted files @chapter Operating on sorted files @cindex operating on sorted files @cindex sorted files, operations on These commands work with (or produce) sorted files. @menu * sort invocation:: Sort text files. * shuf invocation:: Shuffle text files. * uniq invocation:: Uniquify files. * comm invocation:: Compare two sorted files line by line. * ptx invocation:: Produce a permuted index of file contents. * tsort invocation:: Topological sort. @end menu @node sort invocation @section @command{sort}: Sort text files @pindex sort @cindex sorting files @command{sort} sorts, merges, or compares all the lines from the given files, or standard input if none are given or for a @var{file} of @samp{-}. By default, @command{sort} writes the results to standard output. Synopsis: @example sort [@var{option}]@dots{} [@var{file}]@dots{} @end example @cindex sort stability @cindex sort's last-resort comparison Many options affect how @command{sort} compares lines; if the results are unexpected, try the @option{--debug} option to see what happened. A pair of lines is compared as follows: @command{sort} compares each pair of fields (see @option{--key}), in the order specified on the command line, according to the associated ordering options, until a difference is found or no fields are left. If no key fields are specified, @command{sort} uses a default key of the entire line. Finally, as a last resort when all keys compare equal, @command{sort} compares entire lines as if no ordering options other than @option{--reverse} (@option{-r}) were specified. The @option{--stable} (@option{-s}) option disables this @dfn{last-resort comparison} so that lines in which all fields compare equal are left in their original relative order. The @option{--unique} (@option{-u}) option also disables the last-resort comparison. @vindex LC_ALL @vindex LC_COLLATE Unless otherwise specified, all comparisons use the character collating sequence specified by the @env{LC_COLLATE} locale.@footnote{If you use a non-POSIX locale (e.g., by setting @env{LC_ALL} to @samp{en_US}), then @command{sort} may produce output that is sorted differently than you're accustomed to. In that case, set the @env{LC_ALL} environment variable to @samp{C}@. Note that setting only @env{LC_COLLATE} has two problems. First, it is ineffective if @env{LC_ALL} is also set. Second, it has undefined behavior if @env{LC_CTYPE} (or @env{LANG}, if @env{LC_CTYPE} is unset) is set to an incompatible value. For example, you get undefined behavior if @env{LC_CTYPE} is @code{ja_JP.PCK} but @env{LC_COLLATE} is @code{en_US.UTF-8}.} A line's trailing newline is not part of the line for comparison purposes. If the final byte of an input file is not a newline, GNU @command{sort} silently supplies one. GNU @command{sort} (as specified for all GNU utilities) has no limit on input line length or restrictions on bytes allowed within lines. @command{sort} has three modes of operation: sort (the default), merge, and check for sortedness. The following options change the operation mode: @table @samp @item -c @itemx --check @itemx --check=diagnose-first @opindex -c @opindex --check @cindex checking for sortedness Check whether the given file is already sorted: if it is not all sorted, print a diagnostic containing the first out-of-order line and exit with a status of 1. Otherwise, exit successfully. At most one input file can be given. @item -C @itemx --check=quiet @itemx --check=silent @opindex -c @opindex --check @cindex checking for sortedness Exit successfully if the given file is already sorted, and exit with status 1 otherwise. At most one input file can be given. This is like @option{-c}, except it does not print a diagnostic. @item -m @itemx --merge @opindex -m @opindex --merge @cindex merging sorted files Merge the given files by sorting them as a group. Each input file must always be individually sorted. It always works to sort instead of merge; merging is provided because it is faster, in the case where it works. @end table @cindex exit status of @command{sort} Exit status: @display 0 if no error occurred 1 if invoked with @option{-c} or @option{-C} and the input is not sorted 2 if an error occurred @end display @vindex TMPDIR If the environment variable @env{TMPDIR} is set, @command{sort} uses its value as the directory for temporary files instead of @file{/tmp}. The @option{--temporary-directory} (@option{-T}) option in turn overrides the environment variable. The following options affect the ordering of output lines. They may be specified globally or as part of a specific key field. If no key fields are specified, global options apply to comparison of entire lines; otherwise the global options are inherited by key fields that do not specify any special options of their own. In pre-POSIX versions of @command{sort}, global options affect only later key fields, so portable shell scripts should specify global options first. @table @samp @item -b @itemx --ignore-leading-blanks @opindex -b @opindex --ignore-leading-blanks @cindex blanks, ignoring leading @vindex LC_CTYPE Ignore leading blanks when finding sort keys in each line. By default a blank is a space or a tab, but the @env{LC_CTYPE} locale can change this. Note blanks may be ignored by your locale's collating rules, but without this option they will be significant for character positions specified in keys with the @option{-k} option. @item -d @itemx --dictionary-order @opindex -d @opindex --dictionary-order @cindex dictionary order @cindex phone directory order @cindex telephone directory order @vindex LC_CTYPE Sort in @dfn{phone directory} order: ignore all characters except letters, digits and blanks when sorting. By default letters and digits are those of ASCII and a blank is a space or a tab, but the @env{LC_CTYPE} locale can change this. @item -f @itemx --ignore-case @opindex -f @opindex --ignore-case @cindex ignoring case @cindex case folding @vindex LC_CTYPE Fold lowercase characters into the equivalent uppercase characters when comparing so that, for example, @samp{b} and @samp{B} sort as equal. The @env{LC_CTYPE} locale determines character types. When used with @option{--unique} those lower case equivalent lines are thrown away. (There is currently no way to throw away the upper case equivalent instead. (Any @option{--reverse} given would only affect the final result, after the throwing away.)) @item -g @itemx --general-numeric-sort @itemx --sort=general-numeric @opindex -g @opindex --general-numeric-sort @opindex --sort @cindex general numeric sort @vindex LC_NUMERIC Sort numerically, converting a prefix of each line to a long double-precision floating point number. @xref{Floating point}. Do not report overflow, underflow, or conversion errors. Use the following collating sequence: @itemize @bullet @item Lines that do not start with numbers (all considered to be equal). @item NaNs (``Not a Number'' values, in IEEE floating point arithmetic) in a consistent but machine-dependent order. @item Minus infinity. @item Finite numbers in ascending numeric order (with @math{-0} and @math{+0} equal). @item Plus infinity. @end itemize Use this option only if there is no alternative; it is much slower than @option{--numeric-sort} (@option{-n}) and it can lose information when converting to floating point. @item -h @itemx --human-numeric-sort @itemx --sort=human-numeric @opindex -h @opindex --human-numeric-sort @opindex --sort @cindex human numeric sort @vindex LC_NUMERIC Sort numerically, first by numeric sign (negative, zero, or positive); then by SI suffix (either empty, or @samp{k} or @samp{K}, or one of @samp{MGTPEZY}, in that order; @pxref{Block size}); and finally by numeric value. For example, @samp{1023M} sorts before @samp{1G} because @samp{M} (mega) precedes @samp{G} (giga) as an SI suffix. This option sorts values that are consistently scaled to the nearest suffix, regardless of whether suffixes denote powers of 1000 or 1024, and it therefore sorts the output of any single invocation of the @command{df}, @command{du}, or @command{ls} commands that are invoked with their @option{--human-readable} or @option{--si} options. The syntax for numbers is the same as for the @option{--numeric-sort} option; the SI suffix must immediately follow the number. Note also the @command{numfmt} command, which can be used to reformat numbers to human format @emph{after} the sort, thus often allowing sort to operate on more accurate numbers. @item -i @itemx --ignore-nonprinting @opindex -i @opindex --ignore-nonprinting @cindex nonprinting characters, ignoring @cindex unprintable characters, ignoring @vindex LC_CTYPE Ignore nonprinting characters. The @env{LC_CTYPE} locale determines character types. This option has no effect if the stronger @option{--dictionary-order} (@option{-d}) option is also given. @item -M @itemx --month-sort @itemx --sort=month @opindex -M @opindex --month-sort @opindex --sort @cindex months, sorting by @vindex LC_TIME An initial string, consisting of any amount of blanks, followed by a month name abbreviation, is folded to UPPER case and compared in the order @samp{JAN} < @samp{FEB} < @dots{} < @samp{DEC}@. Invalid names compare low to valid names. The @env{LC_TIME} locale category determines the month spellings. By default a blank is a space or a tab, but the @env{LC_CTYPE} locale can change this. @item -n @itemx --numeric-sort @itemx --sort=numeric @opindex -n @opindex --numeric-sort @opindex --sort @cindex numeric sort @vindex LC_NUMERIC Sort numerically. The number begins each line and consists of optional blanks, an optional @samp{-} sign, and zero or more digits possibly separated by thousands separators, optionally followed by a decimal-point character and zero or more digits. An empty number is treated as @samp{0}. The @env{LC_NUMERIC} locale specifies the decimal-point character and thousands separator. By default a blank is a space or a tab, but the @env{LC_CTYPE} locale can change this. Comparison is exact; there is no rounding error. Neither a leading @samp{+} nor exponential notation is recognized. To compare such strings numerically, use the @option{--general-numeric-sort} (@option{-g}) option. @item -V @itemx --version-sort @opindex -V @opindex --version-sort @cindex version number sort Sort by version name and number. It behaves like a standard sort, except that each sequence of decimal digits is treated numerically as an index/version number. (@xref{Details about version sort}.) @item -r @itemx --reverse @opindex -r @opindex --reverse @cindex reverse sorting Reverse the result of comparison, so that lines with greater key values appear earlier in the output instead of later. @item -R @itemx --random-sort @itemx --sort=random @opindex -R @opindex --random-sort @opindex --sort @cindex random sort Sort by hashing the input keys and then sorting the hash values. Choose the hash function at random, ensuring that it is free of collisions so that differing keys have differing hash values. This is like a random permutation of the inputs (@pxref{shuf invocation}), except that keys with the same value sort together. If multiple random sort fields are specified, the same random hash function is used for all fields. To use different random hash functions for different fields, you can invoke @command{sort} more than once. The choice of hash function is affected by the @option{--random-source} option. @end table Other options are: @table @samp @item --compress-program=@var{prog} Compress any temporary files with the program @var{prog}. With no arguments, @var{prog} must compress standard input to standard output, and when given the @option{-d} option it must decompress standard input to standard output. Terminate with an error if @var{prog} exits with nonzero status. White space and the backslash character should not appear in @var{prog}; they are reserved for future use. @filesZeroFromOption{sort,,sorted output} @item -k @var{pos1}[,@var{pos2}] @itemx --key=@var{pos1}[,@var{pos2}] @opindex -k @opindex --key @cindex sort field Specify a sort field that consists of the part of the line between @var{pos1} and @var{pos2} (or the end of the line, if @var{pos2} is omitted), @emph{inclusive}. In its simplest form @var{pos} specifies a field number (starting with 1), with fields being separated by runs of blank characters, and by default those blanks being included in the comparison at the start of each field. To adjust the handling of blank characters see the @option{-b} and @option{-t} options. More generally, each @var{pos} has the form @samp{@var{f}[.@var{c}][@var{opts}]}, where @var{f} is the number of the field to use, and @var{c} is the number of the first character from the beginning of the field. Fields and character positions are numbered starting with 1; a character position of zero in @var{pos2} indicates the field's last character. If @samp{.@var{c}} is omitted from @var{pos1}, it defaults to 1 (the beginning of the field); if omitted from @var{pos2}, it defaults to 0 (the end of the field). @var{opts} are ordering options, allowing individual keys to be sorted according to different rules; see below for details. Keys can span multiple fields. Example: To sort on the second field, use @option{--key=2,2} (@option{-k 2,2}). See below for more notes on keys and more examples. See also the @option{--debug} option to help determine the part of the line being used in the sort. @item --debug Highlight the portion of each line used for sorting. Also issue warnings about questionable usage to stderr. @item --batch-size=@var{nmerge} @opindex --batch-size @cindex number of inputs to merge, nmerge Merge at most @var{nmerge} inputs at once. When @command{sort} has to merge more than @var{nmerge} inputs, it merges them in groups of @var{nmerge}, saving the result in a temporary file, which is then used as an input in a subsequent merge. A large value of @var{nmerge} may improve merge performance and decrease temporary storage utilization at the expense of increased memory usage and I/O@. Conversely a small value of @var{nmerge} may reduce memory requirements and I/O at the expense of temporary storage consumption and merge performance. The value of @var{nmerge} must be at least 2. The default value is currently 16, but this is implementation-dependent and may change in the future. The value of @var{nmerge} may be bounded by a resource limit for open file descriptors. The commands @samp{ulimit -n} or @samp{getconf OPEN_MAX} may display limits for your systems; these limits may be modified further if your program already has some files open, or if the operating system has other limits on the number of open files. If the value of @var{nmerge} exceeds the resource limit, @command{sort} silently uses a smaller value. @item -o @var{output-file} @itemx --output=@var{output-file} @opindex -o @opindex --output @cindex overwriting of input, allowed Write output to @var{output-file} instead of standard output. Normally, @command{sort} reads all input before opening @var{output-file}, so you can sort a file in place by using commands like @code{sort -o F F} and @code{cat F | sort -o F}@. However, it is often safer to output to an otherwise-unused file, as data may be lost if the system crashes or @command{sort} encounters an I/O or other serious error while a file is being sorted in place. Also, @command{sort} with @option{--merge} (@option{-m}) can open the output file before reading all input, so a command like @code{cat F | sort -m -o F - G} is not safe as @command{sort} might start writing @file{F} before @command{cat} is done reading it. @vindex POSIXLY_CORRECT On newer systems, @option{-o} cannot appear after an input file if @env{POSIXLY_CORRECT} is set, e.g., @samp{sort F -o F}@. Portable scripts should specify @option{-o @var{output-file}} before any input files. @item --random-source=@var{file} @opindex --random-source @cindex random source for sorting Use @var{file} as a source of random data used to determine which random hash function to use with the @option{-R} option. @xref{Random sources}. @item -s @itemx --stable @opindex -s @opindex --stable @cindex sort stability @cindex sort's last-resort comparison Make @command{sort} stable by disabling its last-resort comparison. This option has no effect if no fields or global ordering options other than @option{--reverse} (@option{-r}) are specified. @item -S @var{size} @itemx --buffer-size=@var{size} @opindex -S @opindex --buffer-size @cindex size for main memory sorting Use a main-memory sort buffer of the given @var{size}. By default, @var{size} is in units of 1024 bytes. Appending @samp{%} causes @var{size} to be interpreted as a percentage of physical memory. Appending @samp{K} multiplies @var{size} by 1024 (the default), @samp{M} by 1,048,576, @samp{G} by 1,073,741,824, and so on for @samp{T}, @samp{P}, @samp{E}, @samp{Z}, and @samp{Y}@. Appending @samp{b} causes @var{size} to be interpreted as a byte count, with no multiplication. This option can improve the performance of @command{sort} by causing it to start with a larger or smaller sort buffer than the default. However, this option affects only the initial buffer size. The buffer grows beyond @var{size} if @command{sort} encounters input lines larger than @var{size}. @item -t @var{separator} @itemx --field-separator=@var{separator} @opindex -t @opindex --field-separator @cindex field separator character Use character @var{separator} as the field separator when finding the sort keys in each line. By default, fields are separated by the empty string between a non-blank character and a blank character. By default a blank is a space or a tab, but the @env{LC_CTYPE} locale can change this. That is, given the input line @w{@samp{ foo bar}}, @command{sort} breaks it into fields @w{@samp{ foo}} and @w{@samp{ bar}}. The field separator is not considered to be part of either the field preceding or the field following, so with @samp{sort @w{-t " "}} the same input line has three fields: an empty field, @samp{foo}, and @samp{bar}. However, fields that extend to the end of the line, as @option{-k 2}, or fields consisting of a range, as @option{-k 2,3}, retain the field separators present between the endpoints of the range. To specify ASCII NUL as the field separator, use the two-character string @samp{\0}, e.g., @samp{sort -t '\0'}. @item -T @var{tempdir} @itemx --temporary-directory=@var{tempdir} @opindex -T @opindex --temporary-directory @cindex temporary directory @vindex TMPDIR Use directory @var{tempdir} to store temporary files, overriding the @env{TMPDIR} environment variable. If this option is given more than once, temporary files are stored in all the directories given. If you have a large sort or merge that is I/O-bound, you can often improve performance by using this option to specify directories on different disks and controllers. @item --parallel=@var{n} @opindex --parallel @cindex multithreaded sort Set the number of sorts run in parallel to @var{n}. By default, @var{n} is set to the number of available processors, but limited to 8, as there are diminishing performance gains after that. Note also that using @var{n} threads increases the memory usage by a factor of log @var{n}. Also see @ref{nproc invocation}. @item -u @itemx --unique @opindex -u @opindex --unique @cindex uniquifying output Normally, output only the first of a sequence of lines that compare equal. For the @option{--check} (@option{-c} or @option{-C}) option, check that no pair of consecutive lines compares equal. This option also disables the default last-resort comparison. The commands @code{sort -u} and @code{sort | uniq} are equivalent, but this equivalence does not extend to arbitrary @command{sort} options. For example, @code{sort -n -u} inspects only the value of the initial numeric string when checking for uniqueness, whereas @code{sort -n | uniq} inspects the entire line. @xref{uniq invocation}. @optZeroTerminated @macro newlineFieldSeparator Note with @option{-z} the newline character is treated as a field separator. @end macro @end table Historical (BSD and System V) implementations of @command{sort} have differed in their interpretation of some options, particularly @option{-b}, @option{-f}, and @option{-n}. GNU sort follows the POSIX behavior, which is usually (but not always!) like the System V behavior. According to POSIX, @option{-n} no longer implies @option{-b}. For consistency, @option{-M} has been changed in the same way. This may affect the meaning of character positions in field specifications in obscure cases. The only fix is to add an explicit @option{-b}. A position in a sort field specified with @option{-k} may have any of the option letters @samp{MbdfghinRrV} appended to it, in which case no global ordering options are inherited by that particular field. The @option{-b} option may be independently attached to either or both of the start and end positions of a field specification, and if it is inherited from the global options it will be attached to both. If input lines can contain leading or adjacent blanks and @option{-t} is not used, then @option{-k} is typically combined with @option{-b} or an option that implicitly ignores leading blanks (@samp{Mghn}) as otherwise the varying numbers of leading blanks in fields can cause confusing results. If the start position in a sort field specifier falls after the end of the line or after the end field, the field is empty. If the @option{-b} option was specified, the @samp{.@var{c}} part of a field specification is counted from the first nonblank character of the field. @vindex _POSIX2_VERSION @vindex POSIXLY_CORRECT On systems not conforming to POSIX 1003.1-2001, @command{sort} supports a traditional origin-zero syntax @samp{+@var{pos1} [-@var{pos2}]} for specifying sort keys. The traditional command @samp{sort +@var{a}.@var{x} -@var{b}.@var{y}} is equivalent to @samp{sort -k @var{a+1}.@var{x+1},@var{b}} if @var{y} is @samp{0} or absent, otherwise it is equivalent to @samp{sort -k @var{a+1}.@var{x+1},@var{b+1}.@var{y}}. This traditional behavior can be controlled with the @env{_POSIX2_VERSION} environment variable (@pxref{Standards conformance}); it can also be enabled when @env{POSIXLY_CORRECT} is not set by using the traditional syntax with @samp{-@var{pos2}} present. Scripts intended for use on standard hosts should avoid traditional syntax and should use @option{-k} instead. For example, avoid @samp{sort +2}, since it might be interpreted as either @samp{sort ./+2} or @samp{sort -k 3}. If your script must also run on hosts that support only the traditional syntax, it can use a test like @samp{if sort -k 1 /dev/null 2>&1; then @dots{}} to decide which syntax to use. Here are some examples to illustrate various combinations of options. @itemize @bullet @item Sort in descending (reverse) numeric order. @example sort -n -r @end example @item Run no more than 4 sorts concurrently, using a buffer size of 10M. @example sort --parallel=4 -S 10M @end example @item Sort alphabetically, omitting the first and second fields and the blanks at the start of the third field. This uses a single key composed of the characters beginning at the start of the first nonblank character in field three and extending to the end of each line. @example sort -k 3b @end example @item Sort numerically on the second field and resolve ties by sorting alphabetically on the third and fourth characters of field five. Use @samp{:} as the field delimiter. @example sort -t : -k 2,2n -k 5.3,5.4 @end example Note that if you had written @option{-k 2n} instead of @option{-k 2,2n} @command{sort} would have used all characters beginning in the second field and extending to the end of the line as the primary @emph{numeric} key. For the large majority of applications, treating keys spanning more than one field as numeric will not do what you expect. Also note that the @samp{n} modifier was applied to the field-end specifier for the first key. It would have been equivalent to specify @option{-k 2n,2} or @option{-k 2n,2n}. All modifiers except @samp{b} apply to the associated @emph{field}, regardless of whether the modifier character is attached to the field-start and/or the field-end part of the key specifier. @item Sort the password file on the fifth field and ignore any leading blanks. Sort lines with equal values in field five on the numeric user ID in field three. Fields are separated by @samp{:}. @example sort -t : -k 5b,5 -k 3,3n /etc/passwd sort -t : -n -k 5b,5 -k 3,3 /etc/passwd sort -t : -b -k 5,5 -k 3,3n /etc/passwd @end example These three commands have equivalent effect. The first specifies that the first key's start position ignores leading blanks and the second key is sorted numerically. The other two commands rely on global options being inherited by sort keys that lack modifiers. The inheritance works in this case because @option{-k 5b,5b} and @option{-k 5b,5} are equivalent, as the location of a field-end lacking a @samp{.@var{c}} character position is not affected by whether initial blanks are skipped. @item Sort a set of log files, primarily by IPv4 address and secondarily by timestamp. If two lines' primary and secondary keys are identical, output the lines in the same order that they were input. The log files contain lines that look like this: @example 4.150.156.3 - - [01/Apr/2004:06:31:51 +0000] message 1 211.24.3.231 - - [24/Apr/2004:20:17:39 +0000] message 2 @end example Fields are separated by exactly one space. Sort IPv4 addresses lexicographically, e.g., 212.61.52.2 sorts before 212.129.233.201 because 61 is less than 129. @example sort -s -t ' ' -k 4.9n -k 4.5M -k 4.2n -k 4.14,4.21 file*.log | sort -s -t '.' -k 1,1n -k 2,2n -k 3,3n -k 4,4n @end example This example cannot be done with a single @command{sort} invocation, since IPv4 address components are separated by @samp{.} while dates come just after a space. So it is broken down into two invocations of @command{sort}: the first sorts by timestamp and the second by IPv4 address. The timestamp is sorted by year, then month, then day, and finally by hour-minute-second field, using @option{-k} to isolate each field. Except for hour-minute-second there's no need to specify the end of each key field, since the @samp{n} and @samp{M} modifiers sort based on leading prefixes that cannot cross field boundaries. The IPv4 addresses are sorted lexicographically. The second sort uses @samp{-s} so that ties in the primary key are broken by the secondary key; the first sort uses @samp{-s} so that the combination of the two sorts is stable. @item Generate a tags file in case-insensitive sorted order. @smallexample find src -type f -print0 | sort -z -f | xargs -0 etags --append @end smallexample The use of @option{-print0}, @option{-z}, and @option{-0} in this case means that file names that contain blanks or other special characters are not broken up by the sort operation. @c This example is a bit contrived and needs more explanation. @c @item @c Sort records separated by an arbitrary string by using a pipe to convert @c each record delimiter string to @samp{\0}, then using sort's -z option, @c and converting each @samp{\0} back to the original record delimiter. @c @c @example @c printf 'c\n\nb\n\na\n' | @c perl -0pe 's/\n\n/\n\0/g' | @c sort -z | @c perl -0pe 's/\0/\n/g' @c @end example @item Use the common DSU, Decorate Sort Undecorate idiom to sort lines according to their length. @example awk '@{print length, $0@}' /etc/passwd | sort -n | cut -f2- -d' ' @end example In general this technique can be used to sort data that the @command{sort} command does not support, or is inefficient at, sorting directly. @item Shuffle a list of directories, but preserve the order of files within each directory. For instance, one could use this to generate a music playlist in which albums are shuffled but the songs of each album are played in order. @example ls */* | sort -t / -k 1,1R -k 2,2 @end example @end itemize @node shuf invocation @section @command{shuf}: Shuffling text @pindex shuf @cindex shuffling files @command{shuf} shuffles its input by outputting a random permutation of its input lines. Each output permutation is equally likely. Synopses: @example shuf [@var{option}]@dots{} [@var{file}] shuf -e [@var{option}]@dots{} [@var{arg}]@dots{} shuf -i @var{lo}-@var{hi} [@var{option}]@dots{} @end example @command{shuf} has three modes of operation that affect where it obtains its input lines. By default, it reads lines from standard input. The following options change the operation mode: @table @samp @item -e @itemx --echo @opindex -c @opindex --echo @cindex command-line operands to shuffle Treat each command-line operand as an input line. @item -i @var{lo}-@var{hi} @itemx --input-range=@var{lo}-@var{hi} @opindex -i @opindex --input-range @cindex input range to shuffle Act as if input came from a file containing the range of unsigned decimal integers @var{lo}@dots{}@var{hi}, one per line. @end table @command{shuf}'s other options can affect its behavior in all operation modes: @table @samp @item -n @var{count} @itemx --head-count=@var{count} @opindex -n @opindex --head-count @cindex head of output Output at most @var{count} lines. By default, all input lines are output. @item -o @var{output-file} @itemx --output=@var{output-file} @opindex -o @opindex --output @cindex overwriting of input, allowed Write output to @var{output-file} instead of standard output. @command{shuf} reads all input before opening @var{output-file}, so you can safely shuffle a file in place by using commands like @code{shuf -o F file1 $ printf '%s\n' b c d e f g > file2 $ comm --total -123 file1 file2 1 2 4 total @end example This option is a GNU extension. Portable scripts should use @command{wc} to get the totals, e.g. for the above example files: @example $ comm -23 file1 file2 | wc -l # number of lines only in file1 1 $ comm -13 file1 file2 | wc -l # number of lines only in file2 2 $ comm -12 file1 file2 | wc -l # number of lines common to both files 4 @end example @optZeroTerminated @end table @node ptx invocation @section @command{ptx}: Produce permuted indexes @pindex ptx @command{ptx} reads a text file and essentially produces a permuted index, with each keyword in its context. The calling sketch is either one of: @example ptx [@var{option} @dots{}] [@var{file} @dots{}] ptx -G [@var{option} @dots{}] [@var{input} [@var{output}]] @end example The @option{-G} (or its equivalent: @option{--traditional}) option disables all GNU extensions and reverts to traditional mode, thus introducing some limitations and changing several of the program's default option values. When @option{-G} is not specified, GNU extensions are always enabled. GNU extensions to @command{ptx} are documented wherever appropriate in this document. @xref{Compatibility in ptx}, for the full list. Individual options are explained in the following sections. When GNU extensions are enabled, there may be zero, one or several @var{file}s after the options. If there is no @var{file}, the program reads the standard input. If there is one or several @var{file}s, they give the name of input files which are all read in turn, as if all the input files were concatenated. However, there is a full contextual break between each file and, when automatic referencing is requested, file names and line numbers refer to individual text input files. In all cases, the program outputs the permuted index to the standard output. When GNU extensions are @emph{not} enabled, that is, when the program operates in traditional mode, there may be zero, one or two parameters besides the options. If there are no parameters, the program reads the standard input and outputs the permuted index to the standard output. If there is only one parameter, it names the text @var{input} to be read instead of the standard input. If two parameters are given, they give respectively the name of the @var{input} file to read and the name of the @var{output} file to produce. @emph{Be very careful} to note that, in this case, the contents of file given by the second parameter is destroyed. This behavior is dictated by System V @command{ptx} compatibility; GNU Standards normally discourage output parameters not introduced by an option. Note that for @emph{any} file named as the value of an option or as an input text file, a single dash @samp{-} may be used, in which case standard input is assumed. However, it would not make sense to use this convention more than once per program invocation. @menu * General options in ptx:: Options which affect general program behavior. * Charset selection in ptx:: Underlying character set considerations. * Input processing in ptx:: Input fields, contexts, and keyword selection. * Output formatting in ptx:: Types of output format, and sizing the fields. * Compatibility in ptx:: @end menu @node General options in ptx @subsection General options @table @samp @item -G @itemx --traditional As already explained, this option disables all GNU extensions to @command{ptx} and switches to traditional mode. @item --help Print a short help on standard output, then exit without further processing. @item --version Print the program version on standard output, then exit without further processing. @end table @exitstatus @node Charset selection in ptx @subsection Charset selection @c FIXME: People don't necessarily know what an IBM-PC was these days. As it is set up now, the program assumes that the input file is coded using 8-bit ISO 8859-1 code, also known as Latin-1 character set, @emph{unless} it is compiled for MS-DOS, in which case it uses the character set of the IBM-PC@. (GNU @command{ptx} is not known to work on smaller MS-DOS machines anymore.) Compared to 7-bit ASCII, the set of characters which are letters is different; this alters the behavior of regular expression matching. Thus, the default regular expression for a keyword allows foreign or diacriticized letters. Keyword sorting, however, is still crude; it obeys the underlying character set ordering quite blindly. @table @samp @item -f @itemx --ignore-case @opindex -f @opindex --ignore-case Fold lower case letters to upper case for sorting. @end table @node Input processing in ptx @subsection Word selection and input processing @table @samp @item -b @var{file} @itemx --break-file=@var{file} @opindex -b @opindex --break-file This option provides an alternative (to @option{-W}) method of describing which characters make up words. It introduces the name of a file which contains a list of characters which can@emph{not} be part of one word; this file is called the @dfn{Break file}. Any character which is not part of the Break file is a word constituent. If both options @option{-b} and @option{-W} are specified, then @option{-W} has precedence and @option{-b} is ignored. When GNU extensions are enabled, the only way to avoid newline as a break character is to write all the break characters in the file with no newline at all, not even at the end of the file. When GNU extensions are disabled, spaces, tabs and newlines are always considered as break characters even if not included in the Break file. @item -i @var{file} @itemx --ignore-file=@var{file} @opindex -i @opindex --ignore-file The file associated with this option contains a list of words which will never be taken as keywords in concordance output. It is called the @dfn{Ignore file}. The file contains exactly one word in each line; the end of line separation of words is not subject to the value of the @option{-S} option. @item -o @var{file} @itemx --only-file=@var{file} @opindex -o @opindex --only-file The file associated with this option contains a list of words which will be retained in concordance output; any word not mentioned in this file is ignored. The file is called the @dfn{Only file}. The file contains exactly one word in each line; the end of line separation of words is not subject to the value of the @option{-S} option. There is no default for the Only file. When both an Only file and an Ignore file are specified, a word is considered a keyword only if it is listed in the Only file and not in the Ignore file. @item -r @itemx --references @opindex -r @opindex --references On each input line, the leading sequence of non-white space characters will be taken to be a reference that has the purpose of identifying this input line in the resulting permuted index. @xref{Output formatting in ptx}, for more information about reference production. Using this option changes the default value for option @option{-S}. Using this option, the program does not try very hard to remove references from contexts in output, but it succeeds in doing so @emph{when} the context ends exactly at the newline. If option @option{-r} is used with @option{-S} default value, or when GNU extensions are disabled, this condition is always met and references are completely excluded from the output contexts. @item -S @var{regexp} @itemx --sentence-regexp=@var{regexp} @opindex -S @opindex --sentence-regexp This option selects which regular expression will describe the end of a line or the end of a sentence. In fact, this regular expression is not the only distinction between end of lines or end of sentences, and input line boundaries have no special significance outside this option. By default, when GNU extensions are enabled and if @option{-r} option is not used, end of sentences are used. In this case, this @var{regex} is imported from GNU Emacs: @example [.?!][]\"')@}]*\\($\\|\t\\| \\)[ \t\n]* @end example Whenever GNU extensions are disabled or if @option{-r} option is used, end of lines are used; in this case, the default @var{regexp} is just: @example \n @end example Using an empty @var{regexp} is equivalent to completely disabling end of line or end of sentence recognition. In this case, the whole file is considered to be a single big line or sentence. The user might want to disallow all truncation flag generation as well, through option @option{-F ""}. @xref{Regexps, , Syntax of Regular Expressions, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}. When the keywords happen to be near the beginning of the input line or sentence, this often creates an unused area at the beginning of the output context line; when the keywords happen to be near the end of the input line or sentence, this often creates an unused area at the end of the output context line. The program tries to fill those unused areas by wrapping around context in them; the tail of the input line or sentence is used to fill the unused area on the left of the output line; the head of the input line or sentence is used to fill the unused area on the right of the output line. As a matter of convenience to the user, many usual backslashed escape sequences from the C language are recognized and converted to the corresponding characters by @command{ptx} itself. @item -W @var{regexp} @itemx --word-regexp=@var{regexp} @opindex -W @opindex --word-regexp This option selects which regular expression will describe each keyword. By default, if GNU extensions are enabled, a word is a sequence of letters; the @var{regexp} used is @samp{\w+}. When GNU extensions are disabled, a word is by default anything which ends with a space, a tab or a newline; the @var{regexp} used is @samp{[^ \t\n]+}. An empty @var{regexp} is equivalent to not using this option. @xref{Regexps, , Syntax of Regular Expressions, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}. As a matter of convenience to the user, many usual backslashed escape sequences, as found in the C language, are recognized and converted to the corresponding characters by @command{ptx} itself. @end table @node Output formatting in ptx @subsection Output formatting Output format is mainly controlled by the @option{-O} and @option{-T} options described in the table below. When neither @option{-O} nor @option{-T} are selected, and if GNU extensions are enabled, the program chooses an output format suitable for a dumb terminal. Each keyword occurrence is output to the center of one line, surrounded by its left and right contexts. Each field is properly justified, so the concordance output can be readily observed. As a special feature, if automatic references are selected by option @option{-A} and are output before the left context, that is, if option @option{-R} is @emph{not} selected, then a colon is added after the reference; this nicely interfaces with GNU Emacs @code{next-error} processing. In this default output format, each white space character, like newline and tab, is merely changed to exactly one space, with no special attempt to compress consecutive spaces. This might change in the future. Except for those white space characters, every other character of the underlying set of 256 characters is transmitted verbatim. Output format is further controlled by the following options. @table @samp @item -g @var{number} @itemx --gap-size=@var{number} @opindex -g @opindex --gap-size Select the size of the minimum white space gap between the fields on the output line. @item -w @var{number} @itemx --width=@var{number} @opindex -w @opindex --width Select the maximum output width of each final line. If references are used, they are included or excluded from the maximum output width depending on the value of option @option{-R}@. If this option is not selected, that is, when references are output before the left context, the maximum output width takes into account the maximum length of all references. If this option is selected, that is, when references are output after the right context, the maximum output width does not take into account the space taken by references, nor the gap that precedes them. @item -A @itemx --auto-reference @opindex -A @opindex --auto-reference Select automatic references. Each input line will have an automatic reference made up of the file name and the line ordinal, with a single colon between them. However, the file name will be empty when standard input is being read. If both @option{-A} and @option{-r} are selected, then the input reference is still read and skipped, but the automatic reference is used at output time, overriding the input reference. @item -R @itemx --right-side-refs @opindex -R @opindex --right-side-refs In the default output format, when option @option{-R} is not used, any references produced by the effect of options @option{-r} or @option{-A} are placed to the far right of output lines, after the right context. With default output format, when the @option{-R} option is specified, references are rather placed at the beginning of each output line, before the left context. For any other output format, option @option{-R} is ignored, with one exception: with @option{-R} the width of references is @emph{not} taken into account in total output width given by @option{-w}. This option is automatically selected whenever GNU extensions are disabled. @item -F @var{string} @itemx --flag-truncation=@var{string} @opindex -F @opindex --flag-truncation This option will request that any truncation in the output be reported using the string @var{string}. Most output fields theoretically extend towards the beginning or the end of the current line, or current sentence, as selected with option @option{-S}@. But there is a maximum allowed output line width, changeable through option @option{-w}, which is further divided into space for various output fields. When a field has to be truncated because it cannot extend beyond the beginning or the end of the current line to fit in, then a truncation occurs. By default, the string used is a single slash, as in @option{-F /}. @var{string} may have more than one character, as in @option{-F @dots{}}. Also, in the particular case when @var{string} is empty (@option{-F ""}), truncation flagging is disabled, and no truncation marks are appended in this case. As a matter of convenience to the user, many usual backslashed escape sequences, as found in the C language, are recognized and converted to the corresponding characters by @command{ptx} itself. @item -M @var{string} @itemx --macro-name=@var{string} @opindex -M @opindex --macro-name Select another @var{string} to be used instead of @samp{xx}, while generating output suitable for @command{nroff}, @command{troff} or @TeX{}. @item -O @itemx --format=roff @opindex -O @opindex --format=roff Choose an output format suitable for @command{nroff} or @command{troff} processing. Each output line will look like: @smallexample .xx "@var{tail}" "@var{before}" "@var{keyword_and_after}"@c "@var{head}" "@var{ref}" @end smallexample so it will be possible to write a @samp{.xx} roff macro to take care of the output typesetting. This is the default output format when GNU extensions are disabled. Option @option{-M} can be used to change @samp{xx} to another macro name. In this output format, each non-graphical character, like newline and tab, is merely changed to exactly one space, with no special attempt to compress consecutive spaces. Each quote character @samp{"} is doubled so it will be correctly processed by @command{nroff} or @command{troff}. @item -T @itemx --format=tex @opindex -T @opindex --format=tex Choose an output format suitable for @TeX{} processing. Each output line will look like: @smallexample \xx @{@var{tail}@}@{@var{before}@}@{@var{keyword}@}@c @{@var{after}@}@{@var{head}@}@{@var{ref}@} @end smallexample @noindent so it will be possible to write a @code{\xx} definition to take care of the output typesetting. Note that when references are not being produced, that is, neither option @option{-A} nor option @option{-r} is selected, the last parameter of each @code{\xx} call is inhibited. Option @option{-M} can be used to change @samp{xx} to another macro name. In this output format, some special characters, like @samp{$}, @samp{%}, @samp{&}, @samp{#} and @samp{_} are automatically protected with a backslash. Curly brackets @samp{@{}, @samp{@}} are protected with a backslash and a pair of dollar signs (to force mathematical mode). The backslash itself produces the sequence @code{\backslash@{@}}. Circumflex and tilde diacritical marks produce the sequence @code{^\@{ @}} and @code{~\@{ @}} respectively. Other diacriticized characters of the underlying character set produce an appropriate @TeX{} sequence as far as possible. The other non-graphical characters, like newline and tab, and all other characters which are not part of ASCII, are merely changed to exactly one space, with no special attempt to compress consecutive spaces. Let me know how to improve this special character processing for @TeX{}. @end table @node Compatibility in ptx @subsection The GNU extensions to @command{ptx} This version of @command{ptx} contains a few features which do not exist in System V @command{ptx}. These extra features are suppressed by using the @option{-G} command line option, unless overridden by other command line options. Some GNU extensions cannot be recovered by overriding, so the simple rule is to avoid @option{-G} if you care about GNU extensions. Here are the differences between this program and System V @command{ptx}. @itemize @bullet @item This program can read many input files at once, it always writes the resulting concordance on standard output. On the other hand, System V @command{ptx} reads only one file and sends the result to standard output or, if a second @var{file} parameter is given on the command, to that @var{file}. Having output parameters not introduced by options is a dangerous practice which GNU avoids as far as possible. So, for using @command{ptx} portably between GNU and System V, you should always use it with a single input file, and always expect the result on standard output. You might also want to automatically configure in a @option{-G} option to @command{ptx} calls in products using @command{ptx}, if the configurator finds that the installed @command{ptx} accepts @option{-G}. @item The only options available in System V @command{ptx} are options @option{-b}, @option{-f}, @option{-g}, @option{-i}, @option{-o}, @option{-r}, @option{-t} and @option{-w}. All other options are GNU extensions and are not repeated in this enumeration. Moreover, some options have a slightly different meaning when GNU extensions are enabled, as explained below. @item By default, concordance output is not formatted for @command{troff} or @command{nroff}. It is rather formatted for a dumb terminal. @command{troff} or @command{nroff} output may still be selected through option @option{-O}. @item Unless @option{-R} option is used, the maximum reference width is subtracted from the total output line width. With GNU extensions disabled, width of references is not taken into account in the output line width computations. @item All 256 bytes, even ASCII NUL bytes, are always read and processed from input file with no adverse effect, even if GNU extensions are disabled. However, System V @command{ptx} does not accept 8-bit characters, a few control characters are rejected, and the tilde @samp{~} is also rejected. @item Input line length is only limited by available memory, even if GNU extensions are disabled. However, System V @command{ptx} processes only the first 200 characters in each line. @item The break (non-word) characters default to be every character except all letters of the underlying character set, diacriticized or not. When GNU extensions are disabled, the break characters default to space, tab and newline only. @item The program makes better use of output line width. If GNU extensions are disabled, the program rather tries to imitate System V @command{ptx}, but still, there are some slight disposition glitches this program does not completely reproduce. @item The user can specify both an Ignore file and an Only file. This is not allowed with System V @command{ptx}. @end itemize @node tsort invocation @section @command{tsort}: Topological sort @pindex tsort @cindex topological sort @command{tsort} performs a topological sort on the given @var{file}, or standard input if no input file is given or for a @var{file} of @samp{-}. For more details and some history, see @ref{tsort background}. Synopsis: @example tsort [@var{option}] [@var{file}] @end example @command{tsort} reads its input as pairs of strings, separated by blanks, indicating a partial ordering. The output is a total ordering that corresponds to the given partial ordering. For example @example tsort < out $ dd bs=1 skip=222 count=6 < out 2>/dev/null; echo deeper @end example Note that although the listing above includes a trailing slash for the @samp{deeper} entry, the offsets select the name without the trailing slash. However, if you invoke @command{ls} with @option{--dired} along with an option like @option{--escape} (aka @option{-b}) and operate on a file whose name contains special characters, notice that the backslash @emph{is} included: @example $ touch 'a b' $ ls -blog --dired 'a b' -rw-r--r-- 1 0 Jun 10 12:28 a\ b //DIRED// 30 34 //DIRED-OPTIONS// --quoting-style=escape @end example If you use a quoting style that adds quote marks (e.g., @option{--quoting-style=c}), then the offsets include the quote marks. So beware that the user may select the quoting style via the environment variable @env{QUOTING_STYLE}@. Hence, applications using @option{--dired} should either specify an explicit @option{--quoting-style=literal} option (aka @option{-N} or @option{--literal}) on the command line, or else be prepared to parse the escaped names. @item --full-time @opindex --full-time Produce long format directory listings, and list times in full. It is equivalent to using @option{--format=long} with @option{--time-style=full-iso} (@pxref{Formatting file timestamps}). @item -g @opindex -g Produce long format directory listings, but don't display owner information. @item -G @itemx --no-group @opindex -G @opindex --no-group Inhibit display of group information in a long format directory listing. (This is the default in some non-GNU versions of @command{ls}, so we provide this option for compatibility.) @optHumanReadable @item -i @itemx --inode @opindex -i @opindex --inode @cindex inode number, printing Print the inode number (also called the file serial number and index number) of each file to the left of the file name. (This number uniquely identifies each file within a particular file system.) @item -l @itemx --format=long @itemx --format=verbose @opindex -l @opindex --format @opindex long ls @r{format} @opindex verbose ls @r{format} In addition to the name of each file, print the file type, file mode bits, number of hard links, owner name, group name, size, and timestamp (@pxref{Formatting file timestamps}), normally the modification timestamp (the mtime, @pxref{File timestamps}). Print question marks for information that cannot be determined. Normally the size is printed as a byte count without punctuation, but this can be overridden (@pxref{Block size}). For example, @option{-h} prints an abbreviated, human-readable count, and @samp{--block-size="'1"} prints a byte count with the thousands separator of the current locale. For each directory that is listed, preface the files with a line @samp{total @var{blocks}}, where @var{blocks} is the total disk allocation for all files in that directory. The block size currently defaults to 1024 bytes, but this can be overridden (@pxref{Block size}). The @var{blocks} computed counts each hard link separately; this is arguably a deficiency. The file type is one of the following characters: @c The commented-out entries are ones we're not sure about. @table @samp @item - regular file @item b block special file @item c character special file @item C high performance (``contiguous data'') file @item d directory @item D door (Solaris 2.5 and up) @c @item F @c semaphore, if this is a distinct file type @item l symbolic link @c @item m @c multiplexed file (7th edition Unix; obsolete) @item M off-line (``migrated'') file (Cray DMF) @item n network special file (HP-UX) @item p FIFO (named pipe) @item P port (Solaris 10 and up) @c @item Q @c message queue, if this is a distinct file type @item s socket @c @item S @c shared memory object, if this is a distinct file type @c @item T @c typed memory object, if this is a distinct file type @c @item w @c whiteout (4.4BSD; not implemented) @item ? some other file type @end table @cindex permissions, output by @command{ls} The file mode bits listed are similar to symbolic mode specifications (@pxref{Symbolic Modes}). But @command{ls} combines multiple bits into the third character of each set of permissions as follows: @table @samp @item s If the set-user-ID or set-group-ID bit and the corresponding executable bit are both set. @item S If the set-user-ID or set-group-ID bit is set but the corresponding executable bit is not set. @item t If the restricted deletion flag or sticky bit, and the other-executable bit, are both set. The restricted deletion flag is another name for the sticky bit. @xref{Mode Structure}. @item T If the restricted deletion flag or sticky bit is set but the other-executable bit is not set. @item x If the executable bit is set and none of the above apply. @item - Otherwise. @end table Following the file mode bits is a single character that specifies whether an alternate access method such as an access control list applies to the file. When the character following the file mode bits is a space, there is no alternate access method. When it is a printing character, then there is such a method. GNU @command{ls} uses a @samp{.} character to indicate a file with a security context, but no other alternate access method. A file with any other combination of alternate access methods is marked with a @samp{+} character. @item -n @itemx --numeric-uid-gid @opindex -n @opindex --numeric-uid-gid @cindex numeric uid and gid @cindex numeric user and group IDs Produce long format directory listings, but display numeric user and group IDs instead of the owner and group names. @item -o @opindex -o Produce long format directory listings, but don't display group information. It is equivalent to using @option{--format=long} with @option{--no-group} . @item -s @itemx --size @opindex -s @opindex --size @cindex disk allocation @cindex size of files, reporting Print the disk allocation of each file to the left of the file name. This is the amount of disk space used by the file, which is usually a bit more than the file's size, but it can be less if the file has holes. Normally the disk allocation is printed in units of 1024 bytes, but this can be overridden (@pxref{Block size}). @cindex NFS mounts from BSD to HP-UX For files that are NFS-mounted from an HP-UX system to a BSD system, this option reports sizes that are half the correct values. On HP-UX systems, it reports sizes that are twice the correct values for files that are NFS-mounted from BSD systems. This is due to a flaw in HP-UX; it also affects the HP-UX @command{ls} program. @optSi @item -Z @itemx --context @opindex -Z @opindex --context @cindex SELinux @cindex security context Display the SELinux security context or @samp{?} if none is found. When used with the @option{-l} option, print the security context to the left of the size column. @end table @node Sorting the output @subsection Sorting the output @cindex sorting @command{ls} output These options change the order in which @command{ls} sorts the information it outputs. By default, sorting is done by character code (e.g., ASCII order). @table @samp @item -c @itemx --time=ctime @itemx --time=status @opindex -c @opindex --time @opindex ctime@r{, printing or sorting by} @opindex status time@r{, printing or sorting by} @opindex use time@r{, printing or sorting files by} If the long listing format (e.g., @option{-l}, @option{-o}) is being used, print the status change timestamp (the ctime) instead of the mtime. When explicitly sorting by time (@option{--sort=time} or @option{-t}) or when not using a long listing format, sort according to the ctime. @xref{File timestamps}. @item -f @opindex -f @cindex unsorted directory listing @cindex directory order, listing by Primarily, like @option{-U}---do not sort; list the files in whatever order they are stored in the directory. But also enable @option{-a} (list all files) and disable @option{-l}, @option{--color}, and @option{-s} (if they were specified before the @option{-f}). @item -r @itemx --reverse @opindex -r @opindex --reverse @cindex reverse sorting Reverse whatever the sorting method is---e.g., list files in reverse alphabetical order, youngest first, smallest first, or whatever. @item -S @itemx --sort=size @opindex -S @opindex --sort @opindex size of files@r{, sorting files by} Sort by file size, largest first. @item -t @itemx --sort=time @opindex -t @opindex --sort @opindex modification timestamp@r{, sorting files by} Sort by modification timestamp (mtime), newest first. @xref{File timestamps}. @item -u @itemx --time=atime @itemx --time=access @itemx --time=use @opindex -u @opindex --time @opindex use time@r{, printing or sorting files by} @opindex atime@r{, printing or sorting files by} @opindex access timestamp@r{, printing or sorting files by} If the long listing format (e.g., @option{--format=long}) is being used, print the last access timestamp (the atime). When explicitly sorting by time (@option{--sort=time} or @option{-t}) or when not using a long listing format, sort according to the atime. @xref{File timestamps}. @item -U @itemx --sort=none @opindex -U @opindex --sort @opindex none@r{, sorting option for @command{ls}} Do not sort; list the files in whatever order they are stored in the directory. (Do not do any of the other unrelated things that @option{-f} does.) This is especially useful when listing very large directories, since not doing any sorting can be noticeably faster. @item -v @itemx --sort=version @opindex -v @opindex --sort @opindex version@r{, sorting option for @command{ls}} Sort by version name and number, lowest first. It behaves like a default sort, except that each sequence of decimal digits is treated numerically as an index/version number. (@xref{Details about version sort}.) @item -X @itemx --sort=extension @opindex -X @opindex --sort @opindex extension@r{, sorting files by} Sort directory contents alphabetically by file extension (characters after the last @samp{.}); files with no extension are sorted first. @end table @node Details about version sort @subsection Details about version sort Version sorting handles the fact that file names frequently include indices or version numbers. Standard sorting usually does not produce the order that one expects because comparisons are made on a character-by-character basis. Version sorting is especially useful when browsing directories that contain many files with indices/version numbers in their names: @example $ ls -1 $ ls -1v abc.zml-1.gz abc.zml-1.gz abc.zml-12.gz abc.zml-2.gz abc.zml-2.gz abc.zml-12.gz @end example Version-sorted strings are compared such that if @var{ver1} and @var{ver2} are version numbers and @var{prefix} and @var{suffix} (@var{suffix} matching the regular expression @samp{(\.[A-Za-z~][A-Za-z0-9~]*)*}) are strings then @var{ver1} < @var{ver2} implies that the name composed of ``@var{prefix} @var{ver1} @var{suffix}'' sorts before ``@var{prefix} @var{ver2} @var{suffix}''. Note also that leading zeros of numeric parts are ignored: @example $ ls -1 $ ls -1v abc-1.007.tgz abc-1.01a.tgz abc-1.012b.tgz abc-1.007.tgz abc-1.01a.tgz abc-1.012b.tgz @end example This functionality is implemented using gnulib's @code{filevercmp} function, which has some caveats worth noting. @itemize @bullet @item @env{LC_COLLATE} is ignored, which means @samp{ls -v} and @samp{sort -V} will sort non-numeric prefixes as if the @env{LC_COLLATE} locale category was set to @samp{C}@. @item Some suffixes will not be matched by the regular expression mentioned above. Consequently these examples may not sort as you expect: @example abc-1.2.3.4.7z abc-1.2.3.7z @end example @example abc-1.2.3.4.x86_64.rpm abc-1.2.3.x86_64.rpm @end example @end itemize @node General output formatting @subsection General output formatting These options affect the appearance of the overall output. @table @samp @item -1 @itemx --format=single-column @opindex -1 @opindex --format @opindex single-column @r{output of files} List one file per line. This is the default for @command{ls} when standard output is not a terminal. See also the @option{-b} and @option{-q} options to suppress direct output of newline characters within a file name. @item -C @itemx --format=vertical @opindex -C @opindex --format @opindex vertical @r{sorted files in columns} List files in columns, sorted vertically. This is the default for @command{ls} if standard output is a terminal. It is always the default for the @command{dir} program. GNU @command{ls} uses variable width columns to display as many files as possible in the fewest lines. @item --color [=@var{when}] @opindex --color @cindex color, distinguishing file types with Specify whether to use color for distinguishing file types. @var{when} may be omitted, or one of: @itemize @bullet @item none @vindex none @r{color option} - Do not use color at all. This is the default. @item auto @vindex auto @r{color option} @cindex terminal, using color iff - Only use color if standard output is a terminal. @item always @vindex always @r{color option} - Always use color. @end itemize Specifying @option{--color} and no @var{when} is equivalent to @option{--color=always}. Piping a colorized listing through a pager like @command{more} or @command{less} usually produces unreadable results. However, using @code{more -f} does seem to work. @vindex LS_COLORS @vindex SHELL @r{environment variable, and color} Note that using the @option{--color} option may incur a noticeable performance penalty when run in a directory with very many entries, because the default settings require that @command{ls} @code{stat} every single file it lists. However, if you would like most of the file-type coloring but can live without the other coloring options (e.g., executable, orphan, sticky, other-writable, capability), use @command{dircolors} to set the @env{LS_COLORS} environment variable like this, @example eval $(dircolors -p | perl -pe \ 's/^((CAP|S[ET]|O[TR]|M|E)\w+).*/$1 00/' | dircolors -) @end example and on a @code{dirent.d_type}-capable file system, @command{ls} will perform only one @code{stat} call per command line argument. @item -F @itemx --classify @itemx --indicator-style=classify @opindex -F @opindex --classify @opindex --indicator-style @cindex file type and executables, marking @cindex executables and file type, marking Append a character to each file name indicating the file type. Also, for regular files that are executable, append @samp{*}. The file type indicators are @samp{/} for directories, @samp{@@} for symbolic links, @samp{|} for FIFOs, @samp{=} for sockets, @samp{>} for doors, and nothing for regular files. @c The following sentence is the same as the one for -d. Do not follow symbolic links listed on the command line unless the @option{--dereference-command-line} (@option{-H}), @option{--dereference} (@option{-L}), or @option{--dereference-command-line-symlink-to-dir} options are specified. @item --file-type @itemx --indicator-style=file-type @opindex --file-type @opindex --indicator-style @cindex file type, marking Append a character to each file name indicating the file type. This is like @option{-F}, except that executables are not marked. @item --indicator-style=@var{word} @opindex --indicator-style Append a character indicator with style @var{word} to entry names, as follows: @table @samp @item none Do not append any character indicator; this is the default. @item slash Append @samp{/} for directories. This is the same as the @option{-p} option. @item file-type Append @samp{/} for directories, @samp{@@} for symbolic links, @samp{|} for FIFOs, @samp{=} for sockets, and nothing for regular files. This is the same as the @option{--file-type} option. @item classify Append @samp{*} for executable regular files, otherwise behave as for @samp{file-type}. This is the same as the @option{-F} or @option{--classify} option. @end table @item -k @itemx --kibibytes @opindex -k @opindex --kibibytes Set the default block size to its normal value of 1024 bytes, overriding any contrary specification in environment variables (@pxref{Block size}). This option is in turn overridden by the @option{--block-size}, @option{-h} or @option{--human-readable}, and @option{--si} options. The @option{-k} or @option{--kibibytes} option affects the per-directory block count written by the @option{-l} and similar options, and the size written by the @option{-s} or @option{--size} option. It does not affect the file size written by @option{-l}. @item -m @itemx --format=commas @opindex -m @opindex --format @opindex commas@r{, outputting between files} List files horizontally, with as many as will fit on each line, separated by @samp{, } (a comma and a space). @item -p @itemx --indicator-style=slash @opindex -p @opindex --indicator-style @cindex file type, marking Append a @samp{/} to directory names. @item -x @itemx --format=across @itemx --format=horizontal @opindex -x @opindex --format @opindex across@r{, listing files} @opindex horizontal@r{, listing files} List the files in columns, sorted horizontally. @item -T @var{cols} @itemx --tabsize=@var{cols} @opindex -T @opindex --tabsize Assume that each tab stop is @var{cols} columns wide. The default is 8. @command{ls} uses tabs where possible in the output, for efficiency. If @var{cols} is zero, do not use tabs at all. Some terminal emulators might not properly align columns to the right of a TAB following a non-ASCII byte. You can avoid that issue by using the @option{-T0} option or put @code{TABSIZE=0} in your environment, to tell @command{ls} to align using spaces, not tabs. @item -w @var{cols} @itemx --width=@var{cols} @opindex -w @opindex --width @vindex COLUMNS Assume the screen is @var{cols} columns wide. The default is taken from the terminal settings if possible; otherwise the environment variable @env{COLUMNS} is used if it is set; otherwise the default is 80. With a @var{cols} value of @samp{0}, there is no limit on the length of the output line, and that single output line will be delimited with spaces, not tabs. @end table @node Formatting file timestamps @subsection Formatting file timestamps By default, file timestamps are listed in abbreviated form, using a date like @samp{Mar 30@ @ 2002} for non-recent timestamps, and a date-without-year and time like @samp{Mar 30 23:45} for recent timestamps. This format can change depending on the current locale as detailed below. @cindex clock skew A timestamp is considered to be @dfn{recent} if it is less than six months old, and is not dated in the future. If a timestamp dated today is not listed in recent form, the timestamp is in the future, which means you probably have clock skew problems which may break programs like @command{make} that rely on file timestamps. @xref{File timestamps}. @vindex TZ Timestamps are listed according to the time zone rules specified by the @env{TZ} environment variable, or by the system default rules if @env{TZ} is not set. @xref{TZ Variable,, Specifying the Time Zone with @env{TZ}, libc, The GNU C Library Reference Manual}. The following option changes how file timestamps are printed. @table @samp @item --time-style=@var{style} @opindex --time-style @cindex time style List timestamps in style @var{style}. The @var{style} should be one of the following: @table @samp @item +@var{format} @vindex LC_TIME List timestamps using @var{format}, where @var{format} is interpreted like the format argument of @command{date} (@pxref{date invocation}). For example, @option{--time-style="+%Y-%m-%d %H:%M:%S"} causes @command{ls} to list timestamps like @samp{2002-03-30 23:45:56}. As with @command{date}, @var{format}'s interpretation is affected by the @env{LC_TIME} locale category. If @var{format} contains two format strings separated by a newline, the former is used for non-recent files and the latter for recent files; if you want output columns to line up, you may need to insert spaces in one of the two formats. @item full-iso List timestamps in full using ISO 8601-like date, time, and time zone components with nanosecond precision, e.g., @samp{2002-03-30 23:45:56.477817180 -0700}. This style is equivalent to @samp{+%Y-%m-%d %H:%M:%S.%N %z}. This is useful because the time output includes all the information that is available from the operating system. For example, this can help explain @command{make}'s behavior, since GNU @command{make} uses the full timestamp to determine whether a file is out of date. @item long-iso List ISO 8601 date and time components with minute precision, e.g., @samp{2002-03-30 23:45}. These timestamps are shorter than @samp{full-iso} timestamps, and are usually good enough for everyday work. This style is equivalent to @samp{+%Y-%m-%d %H:%M}. @item iso List ISO 8601 dates for non-recent timestamps (e.g., @samp{2002-03-30@ }), and ISO 8601-like month, day, hour, and minute for recent timestamps (e.g., @samp{03-30 23:45}). These timestamps are uglier than @samp{long-iso} timestamps, but they carry nearly the same information in a smaller space and their brevity helps @command{ls} output fit within traditional 80-column output lines. The following two @command{ls} invocations are equivalent: @example newline=' ' ls -l --time-style="+%Y-%m-%d $newline%m-%d %H:%M" ls -l --time-style="iso" @end example @item locale @vindex LC_TIME List timestamps in a locale-dependent form. For example, a Finnish locale might list non-recent timestamps like @samp{maalis 30@ @ 2002} and recent timestamps like @samp{maalis 30 23:45}. Locale-dependent timestamps typically consume more space than @samp{iso} timestamps and are harder for programs to parse because locale conventions vary so widely, but they are easier for many people to read. The @env{LC_TIME} locale category specifies the timestamp format. The default POSIX locale uses timestamps like @samp{Mar 30@ @ 2002} and @samp{Mar 30 23:45}; in this locale, the following two @command{ls} invocations are equivalent: @example newline=' ' ls -l --time-style="+%b %e %Y$newline%b %e %H:%M" ls -l --time-style="locale" @end example Other locales behave differently. For example, in a German locale, @option{--time-style="locale"} might be equivalent to @option{--time-style="+%e. %b %Y $newline%e. %b %H:%M"} and might generate timestamps like @samp{30. M@"ar 2002@ } and @samp{30. M@"ar 23:45}. @item posix-@var{style} @vindex LC_TIME List POSIX-locale timestamps if the @env{LC_TIME} locale category is POSIX, @var{style} timestamps otherwise. For example, the @samp{posix-long-iso} style lists timestamps like @samp{Mar 30@ @ 2002} and @samp{Mar 30 23:45} when in the POSIX locale, and like @samp{2002-03-30 23:45} otherwise. @end table @end table @vindex TIME_STYLE You can specify the default value of the @option{--time-style} option with the environment variable @env{TIME_STYLE}; if @env{TIME_STYLE} is not set the default style is @samp{locale}. GNU Emacs 21.3 and later use the @option{--dired} option and therefore can parse any date format, but if you are using Emacs 21.1 or 21.2 and specify a non-POSIX locale you may need to set @samp{TIME_STYLE="posix-long-iso"}. To avoid certain denial-of-service attacks, timestamps that would be longer than 1000 bytes may be treated as errors. @node Formatting the file names @subsection Formatting the file names These options change how file names themselves are printed. @table @samp @item -b @itemx --escape @itemx --quoting-style=escape @opindex -b @opindex --escape @opindex --quoting-style @cindex backslash sequences for file names Quote nongraphic characters in file names using alphabetic and octal backslash sequences like those used in C. @item -N @itemx --literal @itemx --quoting-style=literal @opindex -N @opindex --literal @opindex --quoting-style Do not quote file names. However, with @command{ls} nongraphic characters are still printed as question marks if the output is a terminal and you do not specify the @option{--show-control-chars} option. @item -q @itemx --hide-control-chars @opindex -q @opindex --hide-control-chars Print question marks instead of nongraphic characters in file names. This is the default if the output is a terminal and the program is @command{ls}. @item -Q @itemx --quote-name @itemx --quoting-style=c @opindex -Q @opindex --quote-name @opindex --quoting-style Enclose file names in double quotes and quote nongraphic characters as in C. @item --quoting-style=@var{word} @opindex --quoting-style @cindex quoting style Use style @var{word} to quote file names and other strings that may contain arbitrary characters. The @var{word} should be one of the following: @macro quotingStyles @table @samp @item literal Output strings as-is; this is the same as the @option{-N} or @option{--literal} option. @item shell Quote strings for the shell if they contain shell metacharacters or would cause ambiguous output. The quoting is suitable for POSIX-compatible shells like @command{bash}, but it does not always work for incompatible shells like @command{csh}. @item shell-always Quote strings for the shell, even if they would normally not require quoting. @item shell-escape Like @samp{shell}, but also quoting non-printable characters using the POSIX proposed @samp{$''} syntax suitable for most shells. @item shell-escape-always Like @samp{shell-escape}, but quote strings even if they would normally not require quoting. @item c Quote strings as for C character string literals, including the surrounding double-quote characters; this is the same as the @option{-Q} or @option{--quote-name} option. @item escape Quote strings as for C character string literals, except omit the surrounding double-quote characters; this is the same as the @option{-b} or @option{--escape} option. @item clocale Quote strings as for C character string literals, except use surrounding quotation marks appropriate for the locale. @item locale @c Use @t instead of @samp to avoid duplicate quoting in some output styles. Quote strings as for C character string literals, except use surrounding quotation marks appropriate for the locale, and quote @t{'like this'} instead of @t{"like this"} in the default C locale. This looks nicer on many displays. @end table @end macro @quotingStyles You can specify the default value of the @option{--quoting-style} option with the environment variable @env{QUOTING_STYLE}@. If that environment variable is not set, the default value is @samp{shell-escape} when the output is a terminal, and @samp{literal} otherwise. @item --show-control-chars @opindex --show-control-chars Print nongraphic characters as-is in file names. This is the default unless the output is a terminal and the program is @command{ls}. @end table @node dir invocation @section @command{dir}: Briefly list directory contents @pindex dir @cindex directory listing, brief @command{dir} is equivalent to @code{ls -C -b}; that is, by default files are listed in columns, sorted vertically, and special characters are represented by backslash escape sequences. @xref{ls invocation, @command{ls}}. @node vdir invocation @section @command{vdir}: Verbosely list directory contents @pindex vdir @cindex directory listing, verbose @command{vdir} is equivalent to @code{ls -l -b}; that is, by default files are listed in long format and special characters are represented by backslash escape sequences. @xref{ls invocation, @command{ls}}. @node dircolors invocation @section @command{dircolors}: Color setup for @command{ls} @pindex dircolors @cindex color setup @cindex setup for color @command{dircolors} outputs a sequence of shell commands to set up the terminal for color output from @command{ls} (and @command{dir}, etc.). Typical usage: @example eval "$(dircolors [@var{option}]@dots{} [@var{file}])" @end example If @var{file} is specified, @command{dircolors} reads it to determine which colors to use for which file types and extensions. Otherwise, a precompiled database is used. For details on the format of these files, run @samp{dircolors --print-database}. To make @command{dircolors} read a @file{~/.dircolors} file if it exists, you can put the following lines in your @file{~/.bashrc} (or adapt them to your favorite shell): @example d=.dircolors test -r $d && eval "$(dircolors $d)" @end example @vindex LS_COLORS @vindex SHELL @r{environment variable, and color} The output is a shell command to set the @env{LS_COLORS} environment variable. You can specify the shell syntax to use on the command line, or @command{dircolors} will guess it from the value of the @env{SHELL} environment variable. The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @item -b @itemx --sh @itemx --bourne-shell @opindex -b @opindex --sh @opindex --bourne-shell @cindex Bourne shell syntax for color setup @cindex @command{sh} syntax for color setup Output Bourne shell commands. This is the default if the @env{SHELL} environment variable is set and does not end with @samp{csh} or @samp{tcsh}. @item -c @itemx --csh @itemx --c-shell @opindex -c @opindex --csh @opindex --c-shell @cindex C shell syntax for color setup @cindex @command{csh} syntax for color setup Output C shell commands. This is the default if @code{SHELL} ends with @command{csh} or @command{tcsh}. @item -p @itemx --print-database @opindex -p @opindex --print-database @cindex color database, printing @cindex database for color setup, printing @cindex printing color database Print the (compiled-in) default color configuration database. This output is itself a valid configuration file, and is fairly descriptive of the possibilities. @end table @exitstatus @node Basic operations @chapter Basic operations @cindex manipulating files This chapter describes the commands for basic file manipulation: copying, moving (renaming), and deleting (removing). @menu * cp invocation:: Copy files. * dd invocation:: Convert and copy a file. * install invocation:: Copy files and set attributes. * mv invocation:: Move (rename) files. * rm invocation:: Remove files or directories. * shred invocation:: Remove files more securely. @end menu @node cp invocation @section @command{cp}: Copy files and directories @pindex cp @cindex copying files and directories @cindex files, copying @cindex directories, copying @command{cp} copies files (or, optionally, directories). The copy is completely independent of the original. You can either copy one file to another, or copy arbitrarily many files to a destination directory. Synopses: @example cp [@var{option}]@dots{} [-T] @var{source} @var{dest} cp [@var{option}]@dots{} @var{source}@dots{} @var{directory} cp [@var{option}]@dots{} -t @var{directory} @var{source}@dots{} @end example @itemize @bullet @item If two file names are given, @command{cp} copies the first file to the second. @item If the @option{--target-directory} (@option{-t}) option is given, or failing that if the last file is a directory and the @option{--no-target-directory} (@option{-T}) option is not given, @command{cp} copies each @var{source} file to the specified directory, using the @var{source}s' names. @end itemize Generally, files are written just as they are read. For exceptions, see the @option{--sparse} option below. By default, @command{cp} does not copy directories. However, the @option{-R}, @option{-a}, and @option{-r} options cause @command{cp} to copy recursively by descending into source directories and copying files to corresponding destination directories. When copying from a symbolic link, @command{cp} normally follows the link only when not copying recursively or when @option{--link} (@option{-l}) is used. This default can be overridden with the @option{--archive} (@option{-a}), @option{-d}, @option{--dereference} (@option{-L}), @option{--no-dereference} (@option{-P}), and @option{-H} options. If more than one of these options is specified, the last one silently overrides the others. When copying to a symbolic link, @command{cp} follows the link only when it refers to an existing regular file. However, when copying to a dangling symbolic link, @command{cp} refuses by default, and fails with a diagnostic, since the operation is inherently dangerous. This behavior is contrary to historical practice and to POSIX@. Set @env{POSIXLY_CORRECT} to make @command{cp} attempt to create the target of a dangling destination symlink, in spite of the possible risk. Also, when an option like @option{--backup} or @option{--link} acts to rename or remove the destination before copying, @command{cp} renames or removes the symbolic link rather than the file it points to. By default, @command{cp} copies the contents of special files only when not copying recursively. This default can be overridden with the @option{--copy-contents} option. @cindex self-backups @cindex backups, making only @command{cp} generally refuses to copy a file onto itself, with the following exception: if @option{--force --backup} is specified with @var{source} and @var{dest} identical, and referring to a regular file, @command{cp} will make a backup file, either regular or numbered, as specified in the usual ways (@pxref{Backup options}). This is useful when you simply want to make a backup of an existing file before changing it. The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @item -a @itemx --archive @opindex -a @opindex --archive Preserve as much as possible of the structure and attributes of the original files in the copy (but do not attempt to preserve internal directory structure; i.e., @samp{ls -U} may list the entries in a copied directory in a different order). Try to preserve SELinux security context and extended attributes (xattr), but ignore any failure to do that and print no corresponding diagnostic. Equivalent to @option{-dR --preserve=all} with the reduced diagnostics. @item --attributes-only @opindex --attributes-only Copy only the specified attributes of the source file to the destination. If the destination already exists, do not alter its contents. See the @option{--preserve} option for controlling which attributes to copy. @item -b @itemx --backup[=@var{method}] @opindex -b @opindex --backup @vindex VERSION_CONTROL @cindex backups, making @xref{Backup options}. Make a backup of each file that would otherwise be overwritten or removed. As a special case, @command{cp} makes a backup of @var{source} when the force and backup options are given and @var{source} and @var{dest} are the same name for an existing, regular file. One useful application of this combination of options is this tiny Bourne shell script: @example #!/bin/sh # Usage: backup FILE... # Create a GNU-style backup of each listed FILE. fail=0 for i; do cp --backup --force --preserve=all -- "$i" "$i" || fail=1 done exit $fail @end example @item --copy-contents @cindex directories, copying recursively @cindex copying directories recursively @cindex recursively copying directories @cindex non-directories, copying as special files If copying recursively, copy the contents of any special files (e.g., FIFOs and device files) as if they were regular files. This means trying to read the data in each source file and writing it to the destination. It is usually a mistake to use this option, as it normally has undesirable effects on special files like FIFOs and the ones typically found in the @file{/dev} directory. In most cases, @code{cp -R --copy-contents} will hang indefinitely trying to read from FIFOs and special files like @file{/dev/console}, and it will fill up your destination disk if you use it to copy @file{/dev/zero}. This option has no effect unless copying recursively, and it does not affect the copying of symbolic links. @item -d @opindex -d @cindex symbolic links, copying @cindex hard links, preserving Copy symbolic links as symbolic links rather than copying the files that they point to, and preserve hard links between source files in the copies. Equivalent to @option{--no-dereference --preserve=links}. @item -f @itemx --force @opindex -f @opindex --force When copying without this option and an existing destination file cannot be opened for writing, the copy fails. However, with @option{--force}, when a destination file cannot be opened, @command{cp} then removes it and tries to open it again. Contrast this behavior with that enabled by @option{--link} and @option{--symbolic-link}, whereby the destination file is never opened but rather is removed unconditionally. Also see the description of @option{--remove-destination}. This option is independent of the @option{--interactive} or @option{-i} option: neither cancels the effect of the other. This option is ignored when the @option{--no-clobber} or @option{-n} option is also used. @item -H @opindex -H If a command line argument specifies a symbolic link, then copy the file it points to rather than the symbolic link itself. However, copy (preserving its nature) any symbolic link that is encountered via recursive traversal. @item -i @itemx --interactive @opindex -i @opindex --interactive When copying a file other than a directory, prompt whether to overwrite an existing destination file. The @option{-i} option overrides a previous @option{-n} option. @item -l @itemx --link @opindex -l @opindex --link Make hard links instead of copies of non-directories. @item -L @itemx --dereference @opindex -L @opindex --dereference Follow symbolic links when copying from them. With this option, @command{cp} cannot create a symbolic link. For example, a symlink (to regular file) in the source tree will be copied to a regular file in the destination tree. @item -n @itemx --no-clobber @opindex -n @opindex --no-clobber Do not overwrite an existing file. The @option{-n} option overrides a previous @option{-i} option. This option is mutually exclusive with @option{-b} or @option{--backup} option. @item -P @itemx --no-dereference @opindex -P @opindex --no-dereference @cindex symbolic links, copying Copy symbolic links as symbolic links rather than copying the files that they point to. This option affects only symbolic links in the source; symbolic links in the destination are always followed if possible. @item -p @itemx --preserve[=@var{attribute_list}] @opindex -p @opindex --preserve @cindex file information, preserving, extended attributes, xattr Preserve the specified attributes of the original files. If specified, the @var{attribute_list} must be a comma-separated list of one or more of the following strings: @table @samp @item mode Preserve the file mode bits and access control lists. @item ownership Preserve the owner and group. On most modern systems, only users with appropriate privileges may change the owner of a file, and ordinary users may preserve the group ownership of a file only if they happen to be a member of the desired group. @item timestamps Preserve the times of last access and last modification, when possible. On older systems, it is not possible to preserve these attributes when the affected file is a symbolic link. However, many systems now provide the @code{utimensat} function, which makes it possible even for symbolic links. @item links Preserve in the destination files any links between corresponding source files. Note that with @option{-L} or @option{-H}, this option can convert symbolic links to hard links. For example, @example $ mkdir c; : > a; ln -s a b; cp -aH a b c; ls -i1 c 74161745 a 74161745 b @end example @noindent Note the inputs: @file{b} is a symlink to regular file @file{a}, yet the files in destination directory, @file{c/}, are hard-linked. Since @option{-a} implies @option{--no-dereference} it would copy the symlink, but the later @option{-H} tells @command{cp} to dereference the command line arguments where it then sees two files with the same inode number. Then the @option{--preserve=links} option also implied by @option{-a} will preserve the perceived hard link. Here is a similar example that exercises @command{cp}'s @option{-L} option: @smallexample $ mkdir b c; (cd b; : > a; ln -s a b); cp -aL b c; ls -i1 c/b 74163295 a 74163295 b @end smallexample @item context Preserve SELinux security context of the file, or fail with full diagnostics. @item xattr Preserve extended attributes of the file, or fail with full diagnostics. If @command{cp} is built without xattr support, ignore this option. If SELinux context, ACLs or Capabilities are implemented using xattrs, they are preserved implicitly by this option as well, i.e., even without specifying @option{--preserve=mode} or @option{--preserve=context}. @item all Preserve all file attributes. Equivalent to specifying all of the above, but with the difference that failure to preserve SELinux security context or extended attributes does not change @command{cp}'s exit status. In contrast to @option{-a}, all but @samp{Operation not supported} warnings are output. @end table Using @option{--preserve} with no @var{attribute_list} is equivalent to @option{--preserve=mode,ownership,timestamps}. In the absence of this option, the permissions of existing destination files are unchanged. Each new file is created with the mode of the corresponding source file minus the set-user-ID, set-group-ID, and sticky bits as the create mode; the operating system then applies either the umask or a default ACL, possibly resulting in a more restrictive file mode. @xref{File permissions}. @item --no-preserve=@var{attribute_list} @cindex file information, preserving Do not preserve the specified attributes. The @var{attribute_list} has the same form as for @option{--preserve}. @item --parents @opindex --parents @cindex parent directories and @command{cp} Form the name of each destination file by appending to the target directory a slash and the specified name of the source file. The last argument given to @command{cp} must be the name of an existing directory. For example, the command: @example cp --parents a/b/c existing_dir @end example @noindent copies the file @file{a/b/c} to @file{existing_dir/a/b/c}, creating any missing intermediate directories. @item -R @itemx -r @itemx --recursive @opindex -R @opindex -r @opindex --recursive @cindex directories, copying recursively @cindex copying directories recursively @cindex recursively copying directories @cindex non-directories, copying as special files Copy directories recursively. By default, do not follow symbolic links in the source unless used together with the @option{--link} (@option{-l}) option; see the @option{--archive} (@option{-a}), @option{-d}, @option{--dereference} (@option{-L}), @option{--no-dereference} (@option{-P}), and @option{-H} options. Special files are copied by creating a destination file of the same type as the source; see the @option{--copy-contents} option. It is not portable to use @option{-r} to copy symbolic links or special files. On some non-GNU systems, @option{-r} implies the equivalent of @option{-L} and @option{--copy-contents} for historical reasons. Also, it is not portable to use @option{-R} to copy symbolic links unless you also specify @option{-P}, as POSIX allows implementations that dereference symbolic links by default. @item --reflink[=@var{when}] @opindex --reflink[=@var{when}] @cindex COW @cindex clone @cindex copy on write Perform a lightweight, copy-on-write (COW) copy, if supported by the file system. Once it has succeeded, beware that the source and destination files share the same disk data blocks as long as they remain unmodified. Thus, if a disk I/O error affects data blocks of one of the files, the other suffers the same fate. The @var{when} value can be one of the following: @table @samp @item always The default behavior: if the copy-on-write operation is not supported then report the failure for each file and exit with a failure status. @item auto If the copy-on-write operation is not supported then fall back to the standard copy behavior. @end table This option is overridden by the @option{--link}, @option{--symbolic-link} and @option{--attributes-only} options, thus allowing it to be used to configure the default data copying behavior for @command{cp}. For example, with the following alias, @command{cp} will use the minimum amount of space supported by the file system. @example alias cp='cp --reflink=auto --sparse=always' @end example @item --remove-destination @opindex --remove-destination Remove each existing destination file before attempting to open it (contrast with @option{-f} above). @item --sparse=@var{when} @opindex --sparse=@var{when} @cindex sparse files, copying @cindex holes, copying files with @findex read @r{system call, and holes} A @dfn{sparse file} contains @dfn{holes}---a sequence of zero bytes that does not occupy any physical disk blocks; the @samp{read} system call reads these as zeros. This can both save considerable disk space and increase speed, since many binary files contain lots of consecutive zero bytes. By default, @command{cp} detects holes in input source files via a crude heuristic and makes the corresponding output file sparse as well. Only regular files may be sparse. The @var{when} value can be one of the following: @table @samp @item auto The default behavior: if the input file is sparse, attempt to make the output file sparse, too. However, if an output file exists but refers to a non-regular file, then do not attempt to make it sparse. @item always For each sufficiently long sequence of zero bytes in the input file, attempt to create a corresponding hole in the output file, even if the input file does not appear to be sparse. This is useful when the input file resides on a file system that does not support sparse files (for example, @samp{efs} file systems in SGI IRIX 5.3 and earlier), but the output file is on a type of file system that does support them. Holes may be created only in regular files, so if the destination file is of some other type, @command{cp} does not even try to make it sparse. @item never Never make the output file sparse. This is useful in creating a file for use with the @command{mkswap} command, since such a file must not have any holes. @end table @optStripTrailingSlashes @item -s @itemx --symbolic-link @opindex -s @opindex --symbolic-link @cindex symbolic links, copying with Make symbolic links instead of copies of non-directories. All source file names must be absolute (starting with @samp{/}) unless the destination files are in the current directory. This option merely results in an error message on systems that do not support symbolic links. @optBackupSuffix @optTargetDirectory @optNoTargetDirectory @item -u @itemx --update @opindex -u @opindex --update @cindex newer files, copying only Do not copy a non-directory that has an existing destination with the same or newer modification timestamp. If timestamps are being preserved, the comparison is to the source timestamp truncated to the resolutions of the destination file system and of the system calls used to update timestamps; this avoids duplicate work if several @samp{cp -pu} commands are executed with the same source and destination. If @option{--preserve=links} is also specified (like with @samp{cp -au} for example), that will take precedence. Consequently, depending on the order that files are processed from the source, newer files in the destination may be replaced, to mirror hard links in the source. @item -v @itemx --verbose @opindex -v @opindex --verbose Print the name of each file before copying it. @item -x @itemx --one-file-system @opindex -x @opindex --one-file-system @cindex file systems, omitting copying to different Skip subdirectories that are on different file systems from the one that the copy started on. However, mount point directories @emph{are} copied. @macro optContext @item -Z @itemx --context[=@var{context}] @opindex -Z @opindex --context @cindex SELinux, setting/restoring security context @cindex security context Without a specified @var{context}, adjust the SELinux security context according to the system default type for destination files, similarly to the @command{restorecon} command. The long form of this option with a specific context specified, will set the context for newly created files only. With a specified context, if both SELinux and SMACK are disabled, a warning is issued. @end macro @optContext This option is mutually exclusive with the @option{--preserve=context} option, and overrides the @option{--preserve=all} and @option{-a} options. @end table @exitstatus @node dd invocation @section @command{dd}: Convert and copy a file @pindex dd @cindex converting while copying a file @command{dd} copies a file (from standard input to standard output, by default) with a changeable I/O block size, while optionally performing conversions on it. Synopses: @example dd [@var{operand}]@dots{} dd @var{option} @end example The only options are @option{--help} and @option{--version}. @xref{Common options}. @command{dd} accepts the following operands, whose syntax was inspired by the DD (data definition) statement of OS/360 JCL. @table @samp @item if=@var{file} @opindex if Read from @var{file} instead of standard input. @item of=@var{file} @opindex of Write to @var{file} instead of standard output. Unless @samp{conv=notrunc} is given, @command{dd} truncates @var{file} to zero bytes (or the size specified with @samp{seek=}). @item ibs=@var{bytes} @opindex ibs @cindex block size of input @cindex input block size Set the input block size to @var{bytes}. This makes @command{dd} read @var{bytes} per block. The default is 512 bytes. @item obs=@var{bytes} @opindex obs @cindex block size of output @cindex output block size Set the output block size to @var{bytes}. This makes @command{dd} write @var{bytes} per block. The default is 512 bytes. @item bs=@var{bytes} @opindex bs @cindex block size Set both input and output block sizes to @var{bytes}. This makes @command{dd} read and write @var{bytes} per block, overriding any @samp{ibs} and @samp{obs} settings. In addition, if no data-transforming @option{conv} option is specified, input is copied to the output as soon as it's read, even if it is smaller than the block size. @item cbs=@var{bytes} @opindex cbs @cindex block size of conversion @cindex conversion block size @cindex fixed-length records, converting to variable-length @cindex variable-length records, converting to fixed-length Set the conversion block size to @var{bytes}. When converting variable-length records to fixed-length ones (@option{conv=block}) or the reverse (@option{conv=unblock}), use @var{bytes} as the fixed record length. @item skip=@var{n} @opindex skip Skip @var{n} @samp{ibs}-byte blocks in the input file before copying. If @samp{iflag=skip_bytes} is specified, @var{n} is interpreted as a byte count rather than a block count. @item seek=@var{n} @opindex seek Skip @var{n} @samp{obs}-byte blocks in the output file before copying. if @samp{oflag=seek_bytes} is specified, @var{n} is interpreted as a byte count rather than a block count. @item count=@var{n} @opindex count Copy @var{n} @samp{ibs}-byte blocks from the input file, instead of everything until the end of the file. if @samp{iflag=count_bytes} is specified, @var{n} is interpreted as a byte count rather than a block count. Note if the input may return short reads as could be the case when reading from a pipe for example, @samp{iflag=fullblock} will ensure that @samp{count=} corresponds to complete input blocks rather than the traditional POSIX specified behavior of counting input read operations. @item status=@var{level} @opindex status Transfer information is normally output to stderr upon receipt of the @samp{INFO} signal or when @command{dd} exits. Specifying @var{level} will adjust the amount of information printed, with the last @var{level} specified taking precedence. @table @samp @item none @opindex none @r{dd status=} Do not print any informational or warning messages to stderr. Error messages are output as normal. @item noxfer @opindex noxfer @r{dd status=} Do not print the final transfer rate and volume statistics that normally make up the last status line. @item progress @opindex progress @r{dd status=} Print the transfer rate and volume statistics on stderr, when processing each input block. Statistics are output on a single line at most once every second, but updates can be delayed when waiting on I/O. @end table @item conv=@var{conversion}[,@var{conversion}]@dots{} @opindex conv Convert the file as specified by the @var{conversion} argument(s). (No spaces around any comma(s).) Conversions: @table @samp @item ascii @opindex ascii@r{, converting to} Convert EBCDIC to ASCII, using the conversion table specified by POSIX@. This provides a 1:1 translation for all 256 bytes. This option implies @samp{conv=unblock}; input is converted to ASCII before trailing spaces are deleted. @item ebcdic @opindex ebcdic@r{, converting to} Convert ASCII to EBCDIC@. This is the inverse of the @samp{ascii} conversion. This option implies @samp{conv=block}; trailing spaces are added before being converted to EBCDIC@. @item ibm @opindex alternate ebcdic@r{, converting to} This acts like @samp{conv=ebcdic}, except it uses the alternate conversion table specified by POSIX@. This is not a 1:1 translation, but reflects common historical practice for @samp{~}, @samp{[}, and @samp{]}. The @samp{ascii}, @samp{ebcdic}, and @samp{ibm} conversions are mutually exclusive. If you use any of these options, you should also use the @samp{cbs=} option. @item block @opindex block @r{(space-padding)} For each line in the input, output @samp{cbs} bytes, replacing the input newline with a space and padding with spaces as necessary. @item unblock @opindex unblock Remove any trailing spaces in each @samp{cbs}-sized input block, and append a newline. The @samp{block} and @samp{unblock} conversions are mutually exclusive. @item lcase @opindex lcase@r{, converting to} Change uppercase letters to lowercase. @item ucase @opindex ucase@r{, converting to} Change lowercase letters to uppercase. The @samp{lcase} and @samp{ucase} conversions are mutually exclusive. @item sparse @opindex sparse Try to seek rather than write NUL output blocks. On a file system that supports sparse files, this will create sparse output when extending the output file. Be careful when using this option in conjunction with @samp{conv=notrunc} or @samp{oflag=append}. With @samp{conv=notrunc}, existing data in the output file corresponding to NUL blocks from the input, will be untouched. With @samp{oflag=append} the seeks performed will be ineffective. Similarly, when the output is a device rather than a file, NUL input blocks are not copied, and therefore this option is most useful with virtual or pre zeroed devices. @item swab @opindex swab @r{(byte-swapping)} @cindex byte-swapping Swap every pair of input bytes. GNU @command{dd}, unlike others, works when an odd number of bytes are read---the last byte is simply copied (since there is nothing to swap it with). @item sync @opindex sync @r{(padding with ASCII NULs)} Pad every input block to size of @samp{ibs} with trailing zero bytes. When used with @samp{block} or @samp{unblock}, pad with spaces instead of zero bytes. @end table The following ``conversions'' are really file flags and don't affect internal processing: @table @samp @item excl @opindex excl @cindex creating output file, requiring Fail if the output file already exists; @command{dd} must create the output file itself. @item nocreat @opindex nocreat @cindex creating output file, avoiding Do not create the output file; the output file must already exist. The @samp{excl} and @samp{nocreat} conversions are mutually exclusive. @item notrunc @opindex notrunc @cindex truncating output file, avoiding Do not truncate the output file. @item noerror @opindex noerror @cindex read errors, ignoring Continue after read errors. @item fdatasync @opindex fdatasync @cindex synchronized data writes, before finishing Synchronize output data just before finishing. This forces a physical write of output data. @item fsync @opindex fsync @cindex synchronized data and metadata writes, before finishing Synchronize output data and metadata just before finishing. This forces a physical write of output data and metadata. @end table @item iflag=@var{flag}[,@var{flag}]@dots{} @opindex iflag Access the input file using the flags specified by the @var{flag} argument(s). (No spaces around any comma(s).) @item oflag=@var{flag}[,@var{flag}]@dots{} @opindex oflag Access the output file using the flags specified by the @var{flag} argument(s). (No spaces around any comma(s).) Here are the flags. Not every flag is supported on every operating system. @table @samp @item append @opindex append @cindex appending to the output file Write in append mode, so that even if some other process is writing to this file, every @command{dd} write will append to the current contents of the file. This flag makes sense only for output. If you combine this flag with the @samp{of=@var{file}} operand, you should also specify @samp{conv=notrunc} unless you want the output file to be truncated before being appended to. @item cio @opindex cio @cindex concurrent I/O Use concurrent I/O mode for data. This mode performs direct I/O and drops the POSIX requirement to serialize all I/O to the same file. A file cannot be opened in CIO mode and with a standard open at the same time. @item direct @opindex direct @cindex direct I/O Use direct I/O for data, avoiding the buffer cache. Note that the kernel may impose restrictions on read or write buffer sizes. For example, with an ext4 destination file system and a Linux-based kernel, using @samp{oflag=direct} will cause writes to fail with @code{EINVAL} if the output buffer size is not a multiple of 512. @item directory @opindex directory @cindex directory I/O Fail unless the file is a directory. Most operating systems do not allow I/O to a directory, so this flag has limited utility. @item dsync @opindex dsync @cindex synchronized data reads Use synchronized I/O for data. For the output file, this forces a physical write of output data on each write. For the input file, this flag can matter when reading from a remote file that has been written to synchronously by some other process. Metadata (e.g., last-access and last-modified time) is not necessarily synchronized. @item sync @opindex sync @cindex synchronized data and metadata I/O Use synchronized I/O for both data and metadata. @item nocache @opindex nocache @cindex discarding file cache Request to discard the system data cache for a file. When count=0 all cached data for the file is specified, otherwise the cache is dropped for the processed portion of the file. Also when count=0, failure to discard the cache is diagnosed and reflected in the exit status. Note data that is not already persisted to storage will not be discarded from cache, so note the use of the ``sync'' options in the examples below, which are used to maximize the effectiveness of the @samp{nocache} flag. Here are some usage examples: @example # Advise to drop cache for whole file dd if=ifile iflag=nocache count=0 # Ensure drop cache for the whole file dd of=ofile oflag=nocache conv=notrunc,fdatasync count=0 # Drop cache for part of file dd if=ifile iflag=nocache skip=10 count=10 of=/dev/null # Stream data using just the read-ahead cache. # See also the @samp{direct} flag. dd if=ifile of=ofile iflag=nocache oflag=nocache,sync @end example @item nonblock @opindex nonblock @cindex nonblocking I/O Use non-blocking I/O. @item noatime @opindex noatime @cindex access timestamp Do not update the file's access timestamp. @xref{File timestamps}. Some older file systems silently ignore this flag, so it is a good idea to test it on your files before relying on it. @item noctty @opindex noctty @cindex controlling terminal Do not assign the file to be a controlling terminal for @command{dd}. This has no effect when the file is not a terminal. On many hosts (e.g., GNU/Linux hosts), this option has no effect at all. @item nofollow @opindex nofollow @cindex symbolic links, following Do not follow symbolic links. @item nolinks @opindex nolinks @cindex hard links Fail if the file has multiple hard links. @item binary @opindex binary @cindex binary I/O Use binary I/O@. This option has an effect only on nonstandard platforms that distinguish binary from text I/O. @item text @opindex text @cindex text I/O Use text I/O@. Like @samp{binary}, this option has no effect on standard platforms. @item fullblock @opindex fullblock Accumulate full blocks from input. The @code{read} system call may return early if a full block is not available. When that happens, continue calling @code{read} to fill the remainder of the block. This flag can be used only with @code{iflag}. This flag is useful with pipes for example as they may return short reads. In that case, this flag is needed to ensure that a @samp{count=} argument is interpreted as a block count rather than a count of read operations. @item count_bytes @opindex count_bytes Interpret the @samp{count=} operand as a byte count, rather than a block count, which allows specifying a length that is not a multiple of the I/O block size. This flag can be used only with @code{iflag}. @item skip_bytes @opindex skip_bytes Interpret the @samp{skip=} operand as a byte count, rather than a block count, which allows specifying an offset that is not a multiple of the I/O block size. This flag can be used only with @code{iflag}. @item seek_bytes @opindex seek_bytes Interpret the @samp{seek=} operand as a byte count, rather than a block count, which allows specifying an offset that is not a multiple of the I/O block size. This flag can be used only with @code{oflag}. @end table These flags are not supported on all systems, and @samp{dd} rejects attempts to use them when they are not supported. When reading from standard input or writing to standard output, the @samp{nofollow} and @samp{noctty} flags should not be specified, and the other flags (e.g., @samp{nonblock}) can affect how other processes behave with the affected file descriptors, even after @command{dd} exits. @end table @cindex multipliers after numbers The numeric-valued strings above (@var{n} and @var{bytes}) can be followed by a multiplier: @samp{b}=512, @samp{c}=1, @samp{w}=2, @samp{x@var{m}}=@var{m}, or any of the standard block size suffixes like @samp{k}=1024 (@pxref{Block size}). Any block size you specify via @samp{bs=}, @samp{ibs=}, @samp{obs=}, @samp{cbs=} should not be too large---values larger than a few megabytes are generally wasteful or (as in the gigabyte..exabyte case) downright counterproductive or error-inducing. To process data that is at an offset or size that is not a multiple of the I/O@ block size, you can use the @samp{skip_bytes}, @samp{seek_bytes} and @samp{count_bytes} flags. Alternatively the traditional method of separate @command{dd} invocations can be used. For example, the following shell commands copy data in 512 KiB blocks between a disk and a tape, but do not save or restore a 4 KiB label at the start of the disk: @example disk=/dev/rdsk/c0t1d0s2 tape=/dev/rmt/0 # Copy all but the label from disk to tape. (dd bs=4k skip=1 count=0 && dd bs=512k) <$disk >$tape # Copy from tape back to disk, but leave the disk label alone. (dd bs=4k seek=1 count=0 && dd bs=512k) <$tape >$disk @end example @cindex ddrescue @cindex disks, failing For failing disks, other tools come with a great variety of extra functionality to ease the saving of as much data as possible before the disk finally dies, e.g. @uref{https://www.gnu.org/software/ddrescue/, GNU @command{ddrescue}}. However, in some cases such a tool is not available or the administrator feels more comfortable with the handling of @command{dd}. As a simple rescue method, call @command{dd} as shown in the following example: the options @samp{conv=noerror,sync} are used to continue after read errors and to pad out bad reads with NULs, while @samp{iflag=fullblock} caters for short reads (which traditionally never occur on disk based devices): @example # Rescue data from an (unmounted!) partition of a failing disk. dd conv=noerror,sync iflag=fullblock /mnt/rescue.img @end example Sending an @samp{INFO} signal (or @samp{USR1} signal where that is unavailable) to a running @command{dd} process makes it print I/O statistics to standard error and then resume copying. In the example below, @command{dd} is run in the background to copy 5GB of data. The @command{kill} command makes it output intermediate I/O statistics, and when @command{dd} completes normally or is killed by the @code{SIGINT} signal, it outputs the final statistics. @example # Ignore the signal so we never inadvertently terminate the dd child. # Note this is not needed when SIGINFO is available. trap '' USR1 # Run dd with the fullblock iflag to avoid short reads # which can be triggered by reception of signals. dd iflag=fullblock if=/dev/zero of=/dev/null count=5000000 bs=1000 & pid=$! # Output stats every second. while kill -s USR1 $pid 2>/dev/null; do sleep 1; done @end example The above script will output in the following format: @example 3441325+0 records in 3441325+0 records out 3441325000 bytes (3.4 GB, 3.2 GiB) copied, 1.00036 s, 3.4 GB/s 5000000+0 records in 5000000+0 records out 5000000000 bytes (5.0 GB, 4.7 GiB) copied, 1.44433 s, 3.5 GB/s @end example The @samp{status=progress} option periodically updates the last line of the transfer statistics above. @vindex POSIXLY_CORRECT On systems lacking the @samp{INFO} signal @command{dd} responds to the @samp{USR1} signal instead, unless the @env{POSIXLY_CORRECT} environment variable is set. @exitstatus @node install invocation @section @command{install}: Copy files and set attributes @pindex install @cindex copying files and setting attributes @command{install} copies files while setting their file mode bits and, if possible, their owner and group. Synopses: @example install [@var{option}]@dots{} [-T] @var{source} @var{dest} install [@var{option}]@dots{} @var{source}@dots{} @var{directory} install [@var{option}]@dots{} -t @var{directory} @var{source}@dots{} install [@var{option}]@dots{} -d @var{directory}@dots{} @end example @itemize @bullet @item If two file names are given, @command{install} copies the first file to the second. @item If the @option{--target-directory} (@option{-t}) option is given, or failing that if the last file is a directory and the @option{--no-target-directory} (@option{-T}) option is not given, @command{install} copies each @var{source} file to the specified directory, using the @var{source}s' names. @item If the @option{--directory} (@option{-d}) option is given, @command{install} creates each @var{directory} and any missing parent directories. Parent directories are created with mode @samp{u=rwx,go=rx} (755), regardless of the @option{-m} option or the current umask. @xref{Directory Setuid and Setgid}, for how the set-user-ID and set-group-ID bits of parent directories are inherited. @end itemize @cindex Makefiles, installing programs in @command{install} is similar to @command{cp}, but allows you to control the attributes of destination files. It is typically used in Makefiles to copy programs into their destination directories. It refuses to copy files onto themselves. @cindex extended attributes, xattr @command{install} never preserves extended attributes (xattr). The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @optBackup @item -C @itemx --compare @opindex -C @opindex --compare Compare each pair of source and destination files, and if the destination has identical content and any specified owner, group, permissions, and possibly SELinux context, then do not modify the destination at all. Note this option is best used in conjunction with @option{--user}, @option{--group} and @option{--mode} options, lest @command{install} incorrectly determines the default attributes that installed files would have (as it doesn't consider setgid directories and POSIX default ACLs for example). This could result in redundant copies or attributes that are not reset to the correct defaults. @item -c @opindex -c Ignored; for compatibility with old Unix versions of @command{install}. @item -D @opindex -D Create any missing parent directories of @var{dest}, then copy @var{source} to @var{dest}. Explicitly specifying the @option{--target-directory=@var{dir}} will similarly ensure the presence of that hierarchy before copying @var{source} arguments. @item -d @itemx --directory @opindex -d @opindex --directory @cindex directories, creating with given attributes @cindex parent directories, creating missing @cindex leading directories, creating missing Create any missing parent directories, giving them the default attributes. Then create each given directory, setting their owner, group and mode as given on the command line or to the defaults. @item -g @var{group} @itemx --group=@var{group} @opindex -g @opindex --group @cindex group ownership of installed files, setting Set the group ownership of installed files or directories to @var{group}. The default is the process's current group. @var{group} may be either a group name or a numeric group ID. @item -m @var{mode} @itemx --mode=@var{mode} @opindex -m @opindex --mode @cindex permissions of installed files, setting Set the file mode bits for the installed file or directory to @var{mode}, which can be either an octal number, or a symbolic mode as in @command{chmod}, with @samp{a=} (no access allowed to anyone) as the point of departure (@pxref{File permissions}). The default mode is @samp{u=rwx,go=rx,a-s}---read, write, and execute for the owner, read and execute for group and other, and with set-user-ID and set-group-ID disabled. This default is not quite the same as @samp{755}, since it disables instead of preserving set-user-ID and set-group-ID on directories. @xref{Directory Setuid and Setgid}. @item -o @var{owner} @itemx --owner=@var{owner} @opindex -o @opindex --owner @cindex ownership of installed files, setting @cindex appropriate privileges @vindex root @r{as default owner} If @command{install} has appropriate privileges (is run as root), set the ownership of installed files or directories to @var{owner}. The default is @code{root}. @var{owner} may be either a user name or a numeric user ID. @item --preserve-context @opindex --preserve-context @cindex SELinux @cindex security context Preserve the SELinux security context of files and directories. Failure to preserve the context in all of the files or directories will result in an exit status of 1. If SELinux is disabled then print a warning and ignore the option. @item -p @itemx --preserve-timestamps @opindex -p @opindex --preserve-timestamps @cindex timestamps of installed files, preserving Set the time of last access and the time of last modification of each installed file to match those of each corresponding original file. When a file is installed without this option, its last access and last modification timestamps are both set to the time of installation. This option is useful if you want to use the last modification timestamps of installed files to keep track of when they were last built as opposed to when they were last installed. @item -s @itemx --strip @opindex -s @opindex --strip @cindex symbol table information, stripping @cindex stripping symbol table information Strip the symbol tables from installed binary executables. @item --strip-program=@var{program} @opindex --strip-program @cindex symbol table information, stripping, program Program used to strip binaries. @optBackupSuffix @optTargetDirectory Also specifying the @option{-D} option will ensure the directory is present. @optNoTargetDirectory @item -v @itemx --verbose @opindex -v @opindex --verbose Print the name of each file before copying it. @optContext This option is mutually exclusive with the @option{--preserve-context} option. @end table @exitstatus @node mv invocation @section @command{mv}: Move (rename) files @pindex mv @command{mv} moves or renames files (or directories). Synopses: @example mv [@var{option}]@dots{} [-T] @var{source} @var{dest} mv [@var{option}]@dots{} @var{source}@dots{} @var{directory} mv [@var{option}]@dots{} -t @var{directory} @var{source}@dots{} @end example @itemize @bullet @item If two file names are given, @command{mv} moves the first file to the second. @item If the @option{--target-directory} (@option{-t}) option is given, or failing that if the last file is a directory and the @option{--no-target-directory} (@option{-T}) option is not given, @command{mv} moves each @var{source} file to the specified directory, using the @var{source}s' names. @end itemize @command{mv} can move any type of file from one file system to another. Prior to version @code{4.0} of the fileutils, @command{mv} could move only regular files between file systems. For example, now @command{mv} can move an entire directory hierarchy including special device files from one partition to another. It first uses some of the same code that's used by @code{cp -a} to copy the requested directories and files, then (assuming the copy succeeded) it removes the originals. If the copy fails, then the part that was copied to the destination partition is removed. If you were to copy three directories from one partition to another and the copy of the first directory succeeded, but the second didn't, the first would be left on the destination partition and the second and third would be left on the original partition. @cindex extended attributes, xattr @command{mv} always tries to copy extended attributes (xattr), which may include SELinux context, ACLs or Capabilities. Upon failure all but @samp{Operation not supported} warnings are output. @cindex prompting, and @command{mv} If a destination file exists but is normally unwritable, standard input is a terminal, and the @option{-f} or @option{--force} option is not given, @command{mv} prompts the user for whether to replace the file. (You might own the file, or have write permission on its directory.) If the response is not affirmative, the file is skipped. @emph{Warning}: Avoid specifying a source name with a trailing slash, when it might be a symlink to a directory. Otherwise, @command{mv} may do something very surprising, since its behavior depends on the underlying rename system call. On a system with a modern Linux-based kernel, it fails with @code{errno=ENOTDIR}@. However, on other systems (at least FreeBSD 6.1 and Solaris 10) it silently renames not the symlink but rather the directory referenced by the symlink. @xref{Trailing slashes}. @emph{Note}: @command{mv} will only replace empty directories in the destination. Conflicting populated directories are skipped with a diagnostic. The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @optBackup @item -f @itemx --force @opindex -f @opindex --force @cindex prompts, omitting Do not prompt the user before removing a destination file. @macro mvOptsIfn If you specify more than one of the @option{-i}, @option{-f}, @option{-n} options, only the final one takes effect. @end macro @mvOptsIfn @item -i @itemx --interactive @opindex -i @opindex --interactive @cindex prompts, forcing Prompt whether to overwrite each existing destination file, regardless of its permissions. If the response is not affirmative, the file is skipped. @mvOptsIfn @item -n @itemx --no-clobber @opindex -n @opindex --no-clobber @cindex prompts, omitting Do not overwrite an existing file. @mvOptsIfn This option is mutually exclusive with @option{-b} or @option{--backup} option. @item -u @itemx --update @opindex -u @opindex --update @cindex newer files, moving only Do not move a non-directory that has an existing destination with the same or newer modification timestamp. If the move is across file system boundaries, the comparison is to the source timestamp truncated to the resolutions of the destination file system and of the system calls used to update timestamps; this avoids duplicate work if several @samp{mv -u} commands are executed with the same source and destination. @item -v @itemx --verbose @opindex -v @opindex --verbose Print the name of each file before moving it. @optStripTrailingSlashes @optBackupSuffix @optTargetDirectory @optNoTargetDirectory @item -Z @itemx --context @opindex -Z @opindex --context @cindex SELinux, restoring security context @cindex security context This option functions similarly to the @command{restorecon} command, by adjusting the SELinux security context according to the system default type for destination files and each created directory. @end table @exitstatus @node rm invocation @section @command{rm}: Remove files or directories @pindex rm @cindex removing files or directories @command{rm} removes each given @var{file}. By default, it does not remove directories. Synopsis: @example rm [@var{option}]@dots{} [@var{file}]@dots{} @end example @cindex prompting, and @command{rm} If the @option{-I} or @option{--interactive=once} option is given, and there are more than three files or the @option{-r}, @option{-R}, or @option{--recursive} are given, then @command{rm} prompts the user for whether to proceed with the entire operation. If the response is not affirmative, the entire command is aborted. Otherwise, if a file is unwritable, standard input is a terminal, and the @option{-f} or @option{--force} option is not given, or the @option{-i} or @option{--interactive=always} option @emph{is} given, @command{rm} prompts the user for whether to remove the file. If the response is not affirmative, the file is skipped. Any attempt to remove a file whose last file name component is @file{.} or @file{..} is rejected without any prompting, as mandated by POSIX. @emph{Warning}: If you use @command{rm} to remove a file, it is usually possible to recover the contents of that file. If you want more assurance that the contents are truly unrecoverable, consider using @command{shred}. The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @item -d @itemx --dir @opindex -d @opindex --dir @cindex directories, removing Remove the listed directories if they are empty. @item -f @itemx --force @opindex -f @opindex --force Ignore nonexistent files and missing operands, and never prompt the user. Ignore any previous @option{--interactive} (@option{-i}) option. @item -i @opindex -i Prompt whether to remove each file. If the response is not affirmative, the file is skipped. Ignore any previous @option{--force} (@option{-f}) option. Equivalent to @option{--interactive=always}. @item -I @opindex -I Prompt once whether to proceed with the command, if more than three files are named or if a recursive removal is requested. Ignore any previous @option{--force} (@option{-f}) option. Equivalent to @option{--interactive=once}. @item --interactive [=@var{when}] @opindex --interactive Specify when to issue an interactive prompt. @var{when} may be omitted, or one of: @itemize @bullet @item never @vindex never @r{interactive option} - Do not prompt at all. @item once @vindex once @r{interactive option} - Prompt once if more than three files are named or if a recursive removal is requested. Equivalent to @option{-I}. @item always @vindex always @r{interactive option} - Prompt for every file being removed. Equivalent to @option{-i}. @end itemize @option{--interactive} with no @var{when} is equivalent to @option{--interactive=always}. @item --one-file-system @opindex --one-file-system @cindex one file system, restricting @command{rm} to When removing a hierarchy recursively, skip any directory that is on a file system different from that of the corresponding command line argument. @cindex bind mount This option is useful when removing a build ``chroot'' hierarchy, which normally contains no valuable data. However, it is not uncommon to bind-mount @file{/home} into such a hierarchy, to make it easier to use one's start-up file. The catch is that it's easy to forget to unmount @file{/home}. Then, when you use @command{rm -rf} to remove your normally throw-away chroot, that command will remove everything under @file{/home}, too. Use the @option{--one-file-system} option, and it will warn about and skip directories on other file systems. Of course, this will not save your @file{/home} if it and your chroot happen to be on the same file system. @item --preserve-root @opindex --preserve-root @cindex root directory, disallow recursive destruction Fail upon any attempt to remove the root directory, @file{/}, when used with the @option{--recursive} option. This is the default behavior. @xref{Treating / specially}. @item --no-preserve-root @opindex --no-preserve-root @cindex root directory, allow recursive destruction Do not treat @file{/} specially when removing recursively. This option is not recommended unless you really want to remove all the files on your computer. @xref{Treating / specially}. @item -r @itemx -R @itemx --recursive @opindex -r @opindex -R @opindex --recursive @cindex directories, removing (recursively) Remove the listed directories and their contents recursively. @item -v @itemx --verbose @opindex -v @opindex --verbose Print the name of each file before removing it. @end table @cindex files beginning with @samp{-}, removing @cindex @samp{-}, removing files beginning with One common question is how to remove files whose names begin with a @samp{-}. GNU @command{rm}, like every program that uses the @code{getopt} function to parse its arguments, lets you use the @samp{--} option to indicate that all following arguments are non-options. To remove a file called @file{-f} in the current directory, you could type either: @example rm -- -f @end example @noindent or: @example rm ./-f @end example @opindex - @r{and Unix @command{rm}} The Unix @command{rm} program's use of a single @samp{-} for this purpose predates the development of the @code{getopt} standard syntax. @exitstatus @node shred invocation @section @command{shred}: Remove files more securely @pindex shred @cindex data, erasing @cindex erasing data @command{shred} overwrites devices or files, to help prevent even very expensive hardware from recovering the data. Ordinarily when you remove a file (@pxref{rm invocation}), the data is not actually destroyed. Only the index listing where the file is stored is destroyed, and the storage is made available for reuse. There are undelete utilities that will attempt to reconstruct the index and can bring the file back if the parts were not reused. On a busy system with a nearly-full drive, space can get reused in a few seconds. But there is no way to know for sure. If you have sensitive data, you may want to be sure that recovery is not possible by actually overwriting the file with non-sensitive data. However, even after doing that, it is possible to take the disk back to a laboratory and use a lot of sensitive (and expensive) equipment to look for the faint ``echoes'' of the original data underneath the overwritten data. If the data has only been overwritten once, it's not even that hard. The best way to remove something irretrievably is to destroy the media it's on with acid, melt it down, or the like. For cheap removable media like floppy disks, this is the preferred method. However, hard drives are expensive and hard to melt, so the @command{shred} utility tries to achieve a similar effect non-destructively. This uses many overwrite passes, with the data patterns chosen to maximize the damage they do to the old data. While this will work on floppies, the patterns are designed for best effect on hard drives. For more details, see the source code and Peter Gutmann's paper @uref{https://www.cs.auckland.ac.nz/~pgut001/pubs/secure_del.html, @cite{Secure Deletion of Data from Magnetic and Solid-State Memory}}, from the proceedings of the Sixth USENIX Security Symposium (San Jose, California, July 22--25, 1996). @strong{Please note} that @command{shred} relies on a very important assumption: that the file system overwrites data in place. This is the traditional way to do things, but many modern file system designs do not satisfy this assumption. Exceptions include: @itemize @bullet @item Log-structured or journaled file systems, such as those supplied with AIX and Solaris, and JFS, ReiserFS, XFS, Ext3 (in @code{data=journal} mode), BFS, NTFS, etc., when they are configured to journal @emph{data}. @item File systems that write redundant data and carry on even if some writes fail, such as RAID-based file systems. @item File systems that make snapshots, such as Network Appliance's NFS server. @item File systems that cache in temporary locations, such as NFS version 3 clients. @item Compressed file systems. @end itemize In the particular case of ext3 file systems, the above disclaimer applies (and @command{shred} is thus of limited effectiveness) only in @code{data=journal} mode, which journals file data in addition to just metadata. In both the @code{data=ordered} (default) and @code{data=writeback} modes, @command{shred} works as usual. Ext3 journaling modes can be changed by adding the @code{data=something} option to the mount options for a particular file system in the @file{/etc/fstab} file, as documented in the mount man page (man mount). If you are not sure how your file system operates, then you should assume that it does not overwrite data in place, which means that shred cannot reliably operate on regular files in your file system. Generally speaking, it is more reliable to shred a device than a file, since this bypasses the problem of file system design mentioned above. However, even shredding devices is not always completely reliable. For example, most disks map out bad sectors invisibly to the application; if the bad sectors contain sensitive data, @command{shred} won't be able to destroy it. @command{shred} makes no attempt to detect or report this problem, just as it makes no attempt to do anything about backups. However, since it is more reliable to shred devices than files, @command{shred} by default does not truncate or remove the output file. This default is more suitable for devices, which typically cannot be truncated and should not be removed. Finally, consider the risk of backups and mirrors. File system backups and remote mirrors may contain copies of the file that cannot be removed, and that will allow a shredded file to be recovered later. So if you keep any data you may later want to destroy using @command{shred}, be sure that it is not backed up or mirrored. @example shred [@var{option}]@dots{} @var{file}[@dots{}] @end example The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @item -f @itemx --force @opindex -f @opindex --force @cindex force deletion Override file permissions if necessary to allow overwriting. @item -n @var{number} @itemx --iterations=@var{number} @opindex -n @var{number} @opindex --iterations=@var{number} @cindex iterations, selecting the number of By default, @command{shred} uses @value{SHRED_DEFAULT_PASSES} passes of overwrite. You can reduce this to save time, or increase it if you think it's appropriate. After 25 passes all of the internal overwrite patterns will have been used at least once. @item --random-source=@var{file} @opindex --random-source @cindex random source for shredding Use @var{file} as a source of random data used to overwrite and to choose pass ordering. @xref{Random sources}. @item -s @var{bytes} @itemx --size=@var{bytes} @opindex -s @var{bytes} @opindex --size=@var{bytes} @cindex size of file to shred Shred the first @var{bytes} bytes of the file. The default is to shred the whole file. @var{bytes} can be followed by a size specification like @samp{K}, @samp{M}, or @samp{G} to specify a multiple. @xref{Block size}. @item -u @itemx --remove[=@var{how}] @opindex -u @opindex --remove @opindex --remove=unlink @opindex --remove=wipe @opindex --remove=wipesync @cindex removing files after shredding After shredding a file, truncate it (if possible) and then remove it. If a file has multiple links, only the named links will be removed. Often the file name is less sensitive than the file data, in which case the optional @var{how} parameter, supported with the long form option, gives control of how to more efficiently remove each directory entry. The @samp{unlink} parameter will just use a standard unlink call, @samp{wipe} will also first obfuscate bytes in the name, and @samp{wipesync} will also sync each obfuscated byte in the name to disk. Note @samp{wipesync} is the default method, but can be expensive, requiring a sync for every character in every file. This can become significant with many files, or is redundant if your file system provides synchronous metadata updates. @item -v @itemx --verbose @opindex -v @opindex --verbose Display to standard error all status updates as sterilization proceeds. @item -x @itemx --exact @opindex -x @opindex --exact By default, @command{shred} rounds the size of a regular file up to the next multiple of the file system block size to fully erase the slack space in the last block of the file. This space may contain portions of the current system memory on some systems for example. Use @option{--exact} to suppress that behavior. Thus, by default if you shred a 10-byte regular file on a system with 512-byte blocks, the resulting file will be 512 bytes long. With this option, shred does not increase the apparent size of the file. @item -z @itemx --zero @opindex -z @opindex --zero Normally, the last pass that @command{shred} writes is made up of random data. If this would be conspicuous on your hard drive (for example, because it looks like encrypted data), or you just think it's tidier, the @option{--zero} option adds an additional overwrite pass with all zero bits. This is in addition to the number of passes specified by the @option{--iterations} option. @end table You might use the following command to erase all trace of the file system you'd created on the floppy disk in your first drive. That command takes about 20 minutes to erase a ``1.44MB'' (actually 1440 KiB) floppy. @example shred --verbose /dev/fd0 @end example Similarly, to erase all data on a selected partition of your hard disk, you could give a command like this: @example shred --verbose /dev/sda5 @end example On modern disks, a single pass should be adequate, and it will take one third the time of the default three-pass approach. @example # 1 pass, write pseudo-random data; 3x faster than the default shred --verbose -n1 /dev/sda5 @end example To be on the safe side, use at least one pass that overwrites using pseudo-random data. I.e., don't be tempted to use @samp{-n0 --zero}, in case some disk controller optimizes the process of writing blocks of all zeros, and thereby does not clear all bytes in a block. Some SSDs may do just that. A @var{file} of @samp{-} denotes standard output. The intended use of this is to shred a removed temporary file. For example: @example i=$(mktemp) exec 3<>"$i" rm -- "$i" echo "Hello, world" >&3 shred - >&3 exec 3>- @end example However, the command @samp{shred - >file} does not shred the contents of @var{file}, since the shell truncates @var{file} before invoking @command{shred}. Use the command @samp{shred file} or (if using a Bourne-compatible shell) the command @samp{shred - 1<>file} instead. @exitstatus @node Special file types @chapter Special file types @cindex special file types @cindex file types, special This chapter describes commands which create special types of files (and @command{rmdir}, which removes directories, one special file type). @cindex special file types @cindex file types Although Unix-like operating systems have markedly fewer special file types than others, not @emph{everything} can be treated only as the undifferentiated byte stream of @dfn{normal files}. For example, when a file is created or removed, the system must record this information, which it does in a @dfn{directory}---a special type of file. Although you can read directories as normal files, if you're curious, in order for the system to do its job it must impose a structure, a certain order, on the bytes of the file. Thus it is a ``special'' type of file. Besides directories, other special file types include named pipes (FIFOs), symbolic links, sockets, and so-called @dfn{special files}. @menu * link invocation:: Make a hard link via the link syscall * ln invocation:: Make links between files. * mkdir invocation:: Make directories. * mkfifo invocation:: Make FIFOs (named pipes). * mknod invocation:: Make block or character special files. * readlink invocation:: Print value of a symlink or canonical file name. * rmdir invocation:: Remove empty directories. * unlink invocation:: Remove files via the unlink syscall @end menu @node link invocation @section @command{link}: Make a hard link via the link syscall @pindex link @cindex links, creating @cindex hard links, creating @cindex creating links (hard only) @command{link} creates a single hard link at a time. It is a minimalist interface to the system-provided @code{link} function. @xref{Hard Links, , , libc, The GNU C Library Reference Manual}. It avoids the bells and whistles of the more commonly-used @command{ln} command (@pxref{ln invocation}). Synopsis: @example link @var{filename} @var{linkname} @end example @var{filename} must specify an existing file, and @var{linkname} must specify a nonexistent entry in an existing directory. @command{link} simply calls @code{link (@var{filename}, @var{linkname})} to create the link. On a GNU system, this command acts like @samp{ln --directory --no-target-directory @var{filename} @var{linkname}}. However, the @option{--directory} and @option{--no-target-directory} options are not specified by POSIX, and the @command{link} command is more portable in practice. If @var{filename} is a symbolic link, it is unspecified whether @var{linkname} will be a hard link to the symbolic link or to the target of the symbolic link. Use @command{ln -P} or @command{ln -L} to specify which behavior is desired. @exitstatus @node ln invocation @section @command{ln}: Make links between files @pindex ln @cindex links, creating @cindex hard links, creating @cindex symbolic (soft) links, creating @cindex creating links (hard or soft) @cindex file systems and hard links @command{ln} makes links between files. By default, it makes hard links; with the @option{-s} option, it makes symbolic (or @dfn{soft}) links. Synopses: @example ln [@var{option}]@dots{} [-T] @var{target} @var{linkname} ln [@var{option}]@dots{} @var{target} ln [@var{option}]@dots{} @var{target}@dots{} @var{directory} ln [@var{option}]@dots{} -t @var{directory} @var{target}@dots{} @end example @itemize @bullet @item If two file names are given, @command{ln} creates a link to the first file from the second. @item If one @var{target} is given, @command{ln} creates a link to that file in the current directory. @item If the @option{--target-directory} (@option{-t}) option is given, or failing that if the last file is a directory and the @option{--no-target-directory} (@option{-T}) option is not given, @command{ln} creates a link to each @var{target} file in the specified directory, using the @var{target}s' names. @end itemize Normally @command{ln} does not remove existing files. Use the @option{--force} (@option{-f}) option to remove them unconditionally, the @option{--interactive} (@option{-i}) option to remove them conditionally, and the @option{--backup} (@option{-b}) option to rename them. @cindex hard link, defined @cindex inode, and hard links A @dfn{hard link} is another name for an existing file; the link and the original are indistinguishable. Technically speaking, they share the same inode, and the inode contains all the information about a file---indeed, it is not incorrect to say that the inode @emph{is} the file. Most systems prohibit making a hard link to a directory; on those where it is allowed, only the super-user can do so (and with caution, since creating a cycle will cause problems to many other utilities). Hard links cannot cross file system boundaries. (These restrictions are not mandated by POSIX, however.) @cindex dereferencing symbolic links @cindex symbolic link, defined @dfn{Symbolic links} (@dfn{symlinks} for short), on the other hand, are a special file type (which not all kernels support: System V release 3 (and older) systems lack symlinks) in which the link file actually refers to a different file, by name. When most operations (opening, reading, writing, and so on) are passed the symbolic link file, the kernel automatically @dfn{dereferences} the link and operates on the target of the link. But some operations (e.g., removing) work on the link file itself, rather than on its target. The owner and group of a symlink are not significant to file access performed through the link, but do have implications on deleting a symbolic link from a directory with the restricted deletion bit set. On the GNU system, the mode of a symlink has no significance and cannot be changed, but on some BSD systems, the mode can be changed and will affect whether the symlink will be traversed in file name resolution. @xref{Symbolic Links,,, libc, The GNU C Library Reference Manual}. Symbolic links can contain arbitrary strings; a @dfn{dangling symlink} occurs when the string in the symlink does not resolve to a file. There are no restrictions against creating dangling symbolic links. There are trade-offs to using absolute or relative symlinks. An absolute symlink always points to the same file, even if the directory containing the link is moved. However, if the symlink is visible from more than one machine (such as on a networked file system), the file pointed to might not always be the same. A relative symbolic link is resolved in relation to the directory that contains the link, and is often useful in referring to files on the same device without regards to what name that device is mounted on when accessed via networked machines. When creating a relative symlink in a different location than the current directory, the resolution of the symlink will be different than the resolution of the same string from the current directory. Therefore, many users prefer to first change directories to the location where the relative symlink will be created, so that tab-completion or other file resolution will find the same target as what will be placed in the symlink. The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @optBackup @item -d @itemx -F @itemx --directory @opindex -d @opindex -F @opindex --directory @cindex hard links to directories Allow users with appropriate privileges to attempt to make hard links to directories. However, note that this will probably fail due to system restrictions, even for the super-user. @item -f @itemx --force @opindex -f @opindex --force Remove existing destination files. @item -i @itemx --interactive @opindex -i @opindex --interactive @cindex prompting, and @command{ln} Prompt whether to remove existing destination files. @item -L @itemx --logical @opindex -L @opindex --logical If @option{-s} is not in effect, and the source file is a symbolic link, create the hard link to the file referred to by the symbolic link, rather than the symbolic link itself. @item -n @itemx --no-dereference @opindex -n @opindex --no-dereference Do not treat the last operand specially when it is a symbolic link to a directory. Instead, treat it as if it were a normal file. When the destination is an actual directory (not a symlink to one), there is no ambiguity. The link is created in that directory. But when the specified destination is a symlink to a directory, there are two ways to treat the user's request. @command{ln} can treat the destination just as it would a normal directory and create the link in it. On the other hand, the destination can be viewed as a non-directory---as the symlink itself. In that case, @command{ln} must delete or backup that symlink before creating the new link. The default is to treat a destination that is a symlink to a directory just like a directory. This option is weaker than the @option{--no-target-directory} (@option{-T}) option, so it has no effect if both options are given. @item -P @itemx --physical @opindex -P @opindex --physical If @option{-s} is not in effect, and the source file is a symbolic link, create the hard link to the symbolic link itself. On platforms where this is not supported by the kernel, this option creates a symbolic link with identical contents; since symbolic link contents cannot be edited, any file name resolution performed through either link will be the same as if a hard link had been created. @item -r @itemx --relative @opindex -r @opindex --relative Make symbolic links relative to the link location. Example: @smallexample ln -srv /a/file /tmp '/tmp/file' -> '../a/file' @end smallexample Relative symbolic links are generated based on their canonicalized containing directory, and canonicalized targets. I.e., all symbolic links in these file names will be resolved. @xref{realpath invocation}, which gives greater control over relative file name generation, as demonstrated in the following example: @example @verbatim ln--relative() { test "$1" = --no-symlinks && { nosym=$1; shift; } target="$1"; test -d "$2" && link="$2/." || link="$2" rtarget="$(realpath $nosym -m "$target" \ --relative-to "$(dirname "$link")")" ln -s -v "$rtarget" "$link" } @end verbatim @end example @item -s @itemx --symbolic @opindex -s @opindex --symbolic Make symbolic links instead of hard links. This option merely produces an error message on systems that do not support symbolic links. @optBackupSuffix @optTargetDirectory @optNoTargetDirectory @item -v @itemx --verbose @opindex -v @opindex --verbose Print the name of each file after linking it successfully. @end table @cindex hard links to symbolic links @cindex symbolic links and @command{ln} If @option{-L} and @option{-P} are both given, the last one takes precedence. If @option{-s} is also given, @option{-L} and @option{-P} are silently ignored. If neither option is given, then this implementation defaults to @option{-P} if the system @code{link} supports hard links to symbolic links (such as the GNU system), and @option{-L} if @code{link} follows symbolic links (such as on BSD). @exitstatus Examples: @smallexample Bad Example: # Create link ../a pointing to a in that directory. # Not really useful because it points to itself. ln -s a .. Better Example: # Change to the target before creating symlinks to avoid being confused. cd .. ln -s adir/a . Bad Example: # Hard coded file names don't move well. ln -s $(pwd)/a /some/dir/ Better Example: # Relative file names survive directory moves and also # work across networked file systems. ln -s afile anotherfile ln -s ../adir/afile yetanotherfile @end smallexample @node mkdir invocation @section @command{mkdir}: Make directories @pindex mkdir @cindex directories, creating @cindex creating directories @command{mkdir} creates directories with the specified names. Synopsis: @example mkdir [@var{option}]@dots{} @var{name}@dots{} @end example @command{mkdir} creates each directory @var{name} in the order given. It reports an error if @var{name} already exists, unless the @option{-p} option is given and @var{name} is a directory. The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @item -m @var{mode} @itemx --mode=@var{mode} @opindex -m @opindex --mode @cindex modes of created directories, setting Set the file permission bits of created directories to @var{mode}, which uses the same syntax as in @command{chmod} and uses @samp{a=rwx} (read, write and execute allowed for everyone) for the point of the departure. @xref{File permissions}. Normally the directory has the desired file mode bits at the moment it is created. As a GNU extension, @var{mode} may also mention special mode bits, but in this case there may be a temporary window during which the directory exists but its special mode bits are incorrect. @xref{Directory Setuid and Setgid}, for how the set-user-ID and set-group-ID bits of directories are inherited unless overridden in this way. @item -p @itemx --parents @opindex -p @opindex --parents @cindex parent directories, creating Make any missing parent directories for each argument, setting their file permission bits to the umask modified by @samp{u+wx}. Ignore existing parent directories, and do not change their file permission bits. To set the file permission bits of any newly-created parent directories to a value that includes @samp{u+wx}, you can set the umask before invoking @command{mkdir}. For example, if the shell command @samp{(umask u=rwx,go=rx; mkdir -p P/Q)} creates the parent @file{P} it sets the parent's permission bits to @samp{u=rwx,go=rx}. To set a parent's special mode bits as well, you can invoke @command{chmod} after @command{mkdir}. @xref{Directory Setuid and Setgid}, for how the set-user-ID and set-group-ID bits of newly-created parent directories are inherited. @item -v @itemx --verbose @opindex -v @opindex --verbose Print a message for each created directory. This is most useful with @option{--parents}. @optContext @end table @exitstatus @node mkfifo invocation @section @command{mkfifo}: Make FIFOs (named pipes) @pindex mkfifo @cindex FIFOs, creating @cindex named pipes, creating @cindex creating FIFOs (named pipes) @command{mkfifo} creates FIFOs (also called @dfn{named pipes}) with the specified names. Synopsis: @example mkfifo [@var{option}] @var{name}@dots{} @end example A @dfn{FIFO} is a special file type that permits independent processes to communicate. One process opens the FIFO file for writing, and another for reading, after which data can flow as with the usual anonymous pipe in shells or elsewhere. The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @item -m @var{mode} @itemx --mode=@var{mode} @opindex -m @opindex --mode @cindex modes of created FIFOs, setting Set the mode of created FIFOs to @var{mode}, which is symbolic as in @command{chmod} and uses @samp{a=rw} (read and write allowed for everyone) for the point of departure. @var{mode} should specify only file permission bits. @xref{File permissions}. @optContext @end table @exitstatus @node mknod invocation @section @command{mknod}: Make block or character special files @pindex mknod @cindex block special files, creating @cindex character special files, creating @command{mknod} creates a FIFO, character special file, or block special file with the specified name. Synopsis: @example mknod [@var{option}]@dots{} @var{name} @var{type} [@var{major} @var{minor}] @end example @cindex special files @cindex block special files @cindex character special files Unlike the phrase ``special file type'' above, the term @dfn{special file} has a technical meaning on Unix: something that can generate or receive data. Usually this corresponds to a physical piece of hardware, e.g., a printer or a disk. (These files are typically created at system-configuration time.) The @command{mknod} command is what creates files of this type. Such devices can be read either a character at a time or a ``block'' (many characters) at a time, hence we say there are @dfn{block special} files and @dfn{character special} files. @c mknod is a shell built-in at least with OpenBSD's /bin/sh @mayConflictWithShellBuiltIn{mknod} The arguments after @var{name} specify the type of file to make: @table @samp @item p @opindex p @r{for FIFO file} for a FIFO @item b @opindex b @r{for block special file} for a block special file @item c @c Don't document the 'u' option -- it's just a synonym for 'c'. @c Do *any* versions of mknod still use it? @c @itemx u @opindex c @r{for character special file} @c @opindex u @r{for character special file} for a character special file @end table When making a block or character special file, the major and minor device numbers must be given after the file type. If a major or minor device number begins with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X}, it is interpreted as hexadecimal; otherwise, if it begins with @samp{0}, as octal; otherwise, as decimal. The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @item -m @var{mode} @itemx --mode=@var{mode} @opindex -m @opindex --mode Set the mode of created files to @var{mode}, which is symbolic as in @command{chmod} and uses @samp{a=rw} as the point of departure. @var{mode} should specify only file permission bits. @xref{File permissions}. @optContext @end table @exitstatus @node readlink invocation @section @command{readlink}: Print value of a symlink or canonical file name @pindex readlink @cindex displaying value of a symbolic link @cindex canonical file name @cindex canonicalize a file name @findex realpath @command{readlink} may work in one of two supported modes: @table @samp @item Readlink mode @command{readlink} outputs the value of the given symbolic links. If @command{readlink} is invoked with an argument other than the name of a symbolic link, it produces no output and exits with a nonzero exit code. @item Canonicalize mode @command{readlink} outputs the absolute name of the given files which contain no @file{.}, @file{..} components nor any repeated separators (@file{/}) or symbolic links. Note the @command{realpath} command is the preferred command to use for canonicalization. @xref{realpath invocation} @end table @example readlink [@var{option}]@dots{} @var{file}@dots{} @end example By default, @command{readlink} operates in readlink mode. The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @item -f @itemx --canonicalize @opindex -f @opindex --canonicalize Activate canonicalize mode. If any component of the file name except the last one is missing or unavailable, @command{readlink} produces no output and exits with a nonzero exit code. A trailing slash is ignored. @item -e @itemx --canonicalize-existing @opindex -e @opindex --canonicalize-existing Activate canonicalize mode. If any component is missing or unavailable, @command{readlink} produces no output and exits with a nonzero exit code. A trailing slash requires that the name resolve to a directory. @item -m @itemx --canonicalize-missing @opindex -m @opindex --canonicalize-missing Activate canonicalize mode. If any component is missing or unavailable, @command{readlink} treats it as a directory. @item -n @itemx --no-newline @opindex -n @opindex --no-newline Do not print the output delimiter, when a single @var{file} is specified. Print a warning if specified along with multiple @var{file}s. @item -s @itemx -q @itemx --silent @itemx --quiet @opindex -s @opindex -q @opindex --silent @opindex --quiet Suppress most error messages. On by default. @item -v @itemx --verbose @opindex -v @opindex --verbose Report error messages. @optZero @end table The @command{readlink} utility first appeared in OpenBSD 2.1. The @command{realpath} command without options, operates like @command{readlink} in canonicalize mode. @exitstatus @node rmdir invocation @section @command{rmdir}: Remove empty directories @pindex rmdir @cindex removing empty directories @cindex directories, removing empty @command{rmdir} removes empty directories. Synopsis: @example rmdir [@var{option}]@dots{} @var{directory}@dots{} @end example If any @var{directory} argument does not refer to an existing empty directory, it is an error. The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @item --ignore-fail-on-non-empty @opindex --ignore-fail-on-non-empty @cindex directory deletion, ignoring failures Ignore each failure to remove a directory that is solely because the directory is non-empty. @item -p @itemx --parents @opindex -p @opindex --parents @cindex parent directories, removing Remove @var{directory}, then try to remove each component of @var{directory}. So, for example, @samp{rmdir -p a/b/c} is similar to @samp{rmdir a/b/c a/b a}. As such, it fails if any of those directories turns out not to be empty. Use the @option{--ignore-fail-on-non-empty} option to make it so such a failure does not evoke a diagnostic and does not cause @command{rmdir} to exit unsuccessfully. @item -v @itemx --verbose @opindex -v @opindex --verbose @cindex directory deletion, reporting Give a diagnostic for each successful removal. @var{directory} is removed. @end table @xref{rm invocation}, for how to remove non-empty directories (recursively). @exitstatus @node unlink invocation @section @command{unlink}: Remove files via the unlink syscall @pindex unlink @cindex removing files or directories (via the unlink syscall) @command{unlink} deletes a single specified file name. It is a minimalist interface to the system-provided @code{unlink} function. @xref{Deleting Files, , , libc, The GNU C Library Reference Manual}. Synopsis: It avoids the bells and whistles of the more commonly-used @command{rm} command (@pxref{rm invocation}). @example unlink @var{filename} @end example On some systems @code{unlink} can be used to delete the name of a directory. On others, it can be used that way only by a privileged user. In the GNU system @code{unlink} can never delete the name of a directory. The @command{unlink} command honors the @option{--help} and @option{--version} options. To remove a file whose name begins with @samp{-}, prefix the name with @samp{./}, e.g., @samp{unlink ./--help}. @exitstatus @node Changing file attributes @chapter Changing file attributes @cindex changing file attributes @cindex file attributes, changing @cindex attributes, file A file is not merely its contents, a name, and a file type (@pxref{Special file types}). A file also has an owner (a user ID), a group (a group ID), permissions (what the owner can do with the file, what people in the group can do, and what everyone else can do), various timestamps, and other information. Collectively, we call these a file's @dfn{attributes}. These commands change file attributes. @menu * chown invocation:: Change file owners and groups. * chgrp invocation:: Change file groups. * chmod invocation:: Change access permissions. * touch invocation:: Change file timestamps. @end menu @node chown invocation @section @command{chown}: Change file owner and group @pindex chown @cindex file ownership, changing @cindex group ownership, changing @cindex changing file ownership @cindex changing group ownership @command{chown} changes the user and/or group ownership of each given @var{file} to @var{new-owner} or to the user and group of an existing reference file. Synopsis: @example chown [@var{option}]@dots{} @{@var{new-owner} | --reference=@var{ref_file}@}@c @var{file}@dots{} @end example If used, @var{new-owner} specifies the new owner and/or group as follows (with no embedded white space): @example [@var{owner}] [ : [@var{group}] ] @end example Specifically: @table @var @item owner If only an @var{owner} (a user name or numeric user ID) is given, that user is made the owner of each given file, and the files' group is not changed. @item owner@samp{:}group If the @var{owner} is followed by a colon and a @var{group} (a group name or numeric group ID), with no spaces between them, the group ownership of the files is changed as well (to @var{group}). @item owner@samp{:} If a colon but no group name follows @var{owner}, that user is made the owner of the files and the group of the files is changed to @var{owner}'s login group. @item @samp{:}group If the colon and following @var{group} are given, but the owner is omitted, only the group of the files is changed; in this case, @command{chown} performs the same function as @command{chgrp}. @item @samp{:} If only a colon is given, or if @var{new-owner} is empty, neither the owner nor the group is changed. @end table If @var{owner} or @var{group} is intended to represent a numeric user or group ID, then you may specify it with a leading @samp{+}. @xref{Disambiguating names and IDs}. Some older scripts may still use @samp{.} in place of the @samp{:} separator. POSIX 1003.1-2001 (@pxref{Standards conformance}) does not require support for that, but for backward compatibility GNU @command{chown} supports @samp{.} so long as no ambiguity results. New scripts should avoid the use of @samp{.} because it is not portable, and because it has undesirable results if the entire @var{owner@samp{.}group} happens to identify a user whose name contains @samp{.}. @macro chownGroupRestrictions It is system dependent whether a user can change the group to an arbitrary one, or the more portable behavior of being restricted to setting a group of which the user is a member. @end macro @chownGroupRestrictions The @command{chown} command sometimes clears the set-user-ID or set-group-ID permission bits. This behavior depends on the policy and functionality of the underlying @code{chown} system call, which may make system-dependent file mode modifications outside the control of the @command{chown} command. For example, the @command{chown} command might not affect those bits when invoked by a user with appropriate privileges, or when the bits signify some function other than executable permission (e.g., mandatory locking). When in doubt, check the underlying system behavior. The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @item -c @itemx --changes @opindex -c @opindex --changes @cindex changed owners, verbosely describing Verbosely describe the action for each @var{file} whose ownership actually changes. @item -f @itemx --silent @itemx --quiet @opindex -f @opindex --silent @opindex --quiet @cindex error messages, omitting Do not print error messages about files whose ownership cannot be changed. @item --from=@var{old-owner} @opindex --from @cindex symbolic links, changing owner Change a @var{file}'s ownership only if it has current attributes specified by @var{old-owner}. @var{old-owner} has the same form as @var{new-owner} described above. This option is useful primarily from a security standpoint in that it narrows considerably the window of potential abuse. For example, to reflect a user ID numbering change for one user's files without an option like this, @code{root} might run @smallexample find / -owner OLDUSER -print0 | xargs -0 chown -h NEWUSER @end smallexample But that is dangerous because the interval between when the @command{find} tests the existing file's owner and when the @command{chown} is actually run may be quite large. One way to narrow the gap would be to invoke chown for each file as it is found: @example find / -owner OLDUSER -exec chown -h NEWUSER @{@} \; @end example But that is very slow if there are many affected files. With this option, it is safer (the gap is narrower still) though still not perfect: @example chown -h -R --from=OLDUSER NEWUSER / @end example @item --dereference @opindex --dereference @cindex symbolic links, changing owner @findex lchown Do not act on symbolic links themselves but rather on what they point to. This is the default. @item -h @itemx --no-dereference @opindex -h @opindex --no-dereference @cindex symbolic links, changing owner @findex lchown Act on symbolic links themselves instead of what they point to. This mode relies on the @code{lchown} system call. On systems that do not provide the @code{lchown} system call, @command{chown} fails when a file specified on the command line is a symbolic link. By default, no diagnostic is issued for symbolic links encountered during a recursive traversal, but see @option{--verbose}. @item --preserve-root @opindex --preserve-root @cindex root directory, disallow recursive modification Fail upon any attempt to recursively change the root directory, @file{/}. Without @option{--recursive}, this option has no effect. @xref{Treating / specially}. @item --no-preserve-root @opindex --no-preserve-root @cindex root directory, allow recursive modification Cancel the effect of any preceding @option{--preserve-root} option. @xref{Treating / specially}. @item --reference=@var{ref_file} @opindex --reference Change the user and group of each @var{file} to be the same as those of @var{ref_file}. If @var{ref_file} is a symbolic link, do not use the user and group of the symbolic link, but rather those of the file it refers to. @item -v @itemx --verbose @opindex -v @opindex --verbose Output a diagnostic for every file processed. If a symbolic link is encountered during a recursive traversal on a system without the @code{lchown} system call, and @option{--no-dereference} is in effect, then issue a diagnostic saying neither the symbolic link nor its referent is being changed. @item -R @itemx --recursive @opindex -R @opindex --recursive @cindex recursively changing file ownership Recursively change ownership of directories and their contents. @choptH @xref{Traversing symlinks}. @choptL @xref{Traversing symlinks}. @choptP @xref{Traversing symlinks}. @end table @exitstatus Examples: @smallexample # Change the owner of /u to "root". chown root /u # Likewise, but also change its group to "staff". chown root:staff /u # Change the owner of /u and subfiles to "root". chown -hR root /u @end smallexample @node chgrp invocation @section @command{chgrp}: Change group ownership @pindex chgrp @cindex group ownership, changing @cindex changing group ownership @command{chgrp} changes the group ownership of each given @var{file} to @var{group} (which can be either a group name or a numeric group ID) or to the group of an existing reference file. @xref{chown invocation}. Synopsis: @example chgrp [@var{option}]@dots{} @{@var{group} | --reference=@var{ref_file}@}@c @var{file}@dots{} @end example If @var{group} is intended to represent a numeric group ID, then you may specify it with a leading @samp{+}. @xref{Disambiguating names and IDs}. @chownGroupRestrictions The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @item -c @itemx --changes @opindex -c @opindex --changes @cindex changed files, verbosely describing Verbosely describe the action for each @var{file} whose group actually changes. @item -f @itemx --silent @itemx --quiet @opindex -f @opindex --silent @opindex --quiet @cindex error messages, omitting Do not print error messages about files whose group cannot be changed. @item --dereference @opindex --dereference @cindex symbolic links, changing owner @findex lchown Do not act on symbolic links themselves but rather on what they point to. This is the default. @item -h @itemx --no-dereference @opindex -h @opindex --no-dereference @cindex symbolic links, changing group @findex lchown Act on symbolic links themselves instead of what they point to. This mode relies on the @code{lchown} system call. On systems that do not provide the @code{lchown} system call, @command{chgrp} fails when a file specified on the command line is a symbolic link. By default, no diagnostic is issued for symbolic links encountered during a recursive traversal, but see @option{--verbose}. @item --preserve-root @opindex --preserve-root @cindex root directory, disallow recursive modification Fail upon any attempt to recursively change the root directory, @file{/}. Without @option{--recursive}, this option has no effect. @xref{Treating / specially}. @item --no-preserve-root @opindex --no-preserve-root @cindex root directory, allow recursive modification Cancel the effect of any preceding @option{--preserve-root} option. @xref{Treating / specially}. @item --reference=@var{ref_file} @opindex --reference Change the group of each @var{file} to be the same as that of @var{ref_file}. If @var{ref_file} is a symbolic link, do not use the group of the symbolic link, but rather that of the file it refers to. @item -v @itemx --verbose @opindex -v @opindex --verbose Output a diagnostic for every file processed. If a symbolic link is encountered during a recursive traversal on a system without the @code{lchown} system call, and @option{--no-dereference} is in effect, then issue a diagnostic saying neither the symbolic link nor its referent is being changed. @item -R @itemx --recursive @opindex -R @opindex --recursive @cindex recursively changing group ownership Recursively change the group ownership of directories and their contents. @choptH @xref{Traversing symlinks}. @choptL @xref{Traversing symlinks}. @choptP @xref{Traversing symlinks}. @end table @exitstatus Examples: @smallexample # Change the group of /u to "staff". chgrp staff /u # Change the group of /u and subfiles to "staff". chgrp -hR staff /u @end smallexample @node chmod invocation @section @command{chmod}: Change access permissions @pindex chmod @cindex changing access permissions @cindex access permissions, changing @cindex permissions, changing access @command{chmod} changes the access permissions of the named files. Synopsis: @example chmod [@var{option}]@dots{} @{@var{mode} | --reference=@var{ref_file}@}@c @var{file}@dots{} @end example @cindex symbolic links, permissions of @command{chmod} never changes the permissions of symbolic links, since the @command{chmod} system call cannot change their permissions. This is not a problem since the permissions of symbolic links are never used. However, for each symbolic link listed on the command line, @command{chmod} changes the permissions of the pointed-to file. In contrast, @command{chmod} ignores symbolic links encountered during recursive directory traversals. A successful use of @command{chmod} clears the set-group-ID bit of a regular file if the file's group ID does not match the user's effective group ID or one of the user's supplementary group IDs, unless the user has appropriate privileges. Additional restrictions may cause the set-user-ID and set-group-ID bits of @var{mode} or @var{ref_file} to be ignored. This behavior depends on the policy and functionality of the underlying @code{chmod} system call. When in doubt, check the underlying system behavior. If used, @var{mode} specifies the new file mode bits. For details, see the section on @ref{File permissions}. If you really want @var{mode} to have a leading @samp{-}, you should use @option{--} first, e.g., @samp{chmod -- -w file}. Typically, though, @samp{chmod a-w file} is preferable, and @command{chmod -w file} (without the @option{--}) complains if it behaves differently from what @samp{chmod a-w file} would do. The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @item -c @itemx --changes @opindex -c @opindex --changes Verbosely describe the action for each @var{file} whose permissions actually changes. @item -f @itemx --silent @itemx --quiet @opindex -f @opindex --silent @opindex --quiet @cindex error messages, omitting Do not print error messages about files whose permissions cannot be changed. @item --preserve-root @opindex --preserve-root @cindex root directory, disallow recursive modification Fail upon any attempt to recursively change the root directory, @file{/}. Without @option{--recursive}, this option has no effect. @xref{Treating / specially}. @item --no-preserve-root @opindex --no-preserve-root @cindex root directory, allow recursive modification Cancel the effect of any preceding @option{--preserve-root} option. @xref{Treating / specially}. @item -v @itemx --verbose @opindex -v @opindex --verbose Verbosely describe the action or non-action taken for every @var{file}. @item --reference=@var{ref_file} @opindex --reference Change the mode of each @var{file} to be the same as that of @var{ref_file}. @xref{File permissions}. If @var{ref_file} is a symbolic link, do not use the mode of the symbolic link, but rather that of the file it refers to. @item -R @itemx --recursive @opindex -R @opindex --recursive @cindex recursively changing access permissions Recursively change permissions of directories and their contents. @end table @exitstatus @node touch invocation @section @command{touch}: Change file timestamps @pindex touch @cindex changing file timestamps @cindex file timestamps, changing @cindex timestamps, changing file @command{touch} changes the access and/or modification timestamps of the specified files. Synopsis: @example touch [@var{option}]@dots{} @var{file}@dots{} @end example @cindex empty files, creating Any @var{file} argument that does not exist is created empty, unless option @option{--no-create} (@option{-c}) or @option{--no-dereference} (@option{-h}) was in effect. A @var{file} argument string of @samp{-} is handled specially and causes @command{touch} to change the times of the file associated with standard output. By default, @command{touch} sets file timestamps to the current time. Because @command{touch} acts on its operands left to right, the resulting timestamps of earlier and later operands may disagree. @cindex permissions, for changing file timestamps When setting file timestamps to the current time, @command{touch} can change the timestamps for files that the user does not own but has write permission for. Otherwise, the user must own the files. Some older systems have a further restriction: the user must own the files unless both the access and modification timestamps are being set to the current time. The @command{touch} command cannot set a file's status change timestamp to a user-specified value, and cannot change the file's birth time (if supported) at all. Also, @command{touch} has issues similar to those affecting all programs that update file timestamps. For example, @command{touch} may set a file's timestamp to a value that differs slightly from the requested time. @xref{File timestamps}. @vindex TZ Timestamps assume the time zone rules specified by the @env{TZ} environment variable, or by the system default rules if @env{TZ} is not set. @xref{TZ Variable,, Specifying the Time Zone with @env{TZ}, libc, The GNU C Library Reference Manual}. You can avoid ambiguities during daylight saving transitions by using UTC timestamps. The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @item -a @itemx --time=atime @itemx --time=access @itemx --time=use @opindex -a @opindex --time @opindex atime@r{, changing} @opindex access @r{time, changing} @opindex use @r{time, changing} Change the access timestamp only. @xref{File timestamps}. @item -c @itemx --no-create @opindex -c @opindex --no-create Do not warn about or create files that do not exist. @item -d @var{time} @itemx --date=@var{time} @opindex -d @opindex --date @opindex time Use @var{time} instead of the current time. It can contain month names, time zones, @samp{am} and @samp{pm}, @samp{yesterday}, etc. For example, @option{--date="2004-02-27 14:19:13.489392193 +0530"} specifies the instant of time that is 489,392,193 nanoseconds after February 27, 2004 at 2:19:13 PM in a time zone that is 5 hours and 30 minutes east of UTC@. @xref{Date input formats}. File systems that do not support high-resolution timestamps silently ignore any excess precision here. @item -f @opindex -f @cindex BSD @command{touch} compatibility Ignored; for compatibility with BSD versions of @command{touch}. @item -h @itemx --no-dereference @opindex -h @opindex --no-dereference @cindex symbolic links, changing time @findex lutimes Attempt to change the timestamps of a symbolic link, rather than what the link refers to. When using this option, empty files are not created, but option @option{-c} must also be used to avoid warning about files that do not exist. Not all systems support changing the timestamps of symlinks, since underlying system support for this action was not required until POSIX 2008. Also, on some systems, the mere act of examining a symbolic link changes the access timestamp, such that only changes to the modification timestamp will persist long enough to be observable. When coupled with option @option{-r}, a reference timestamp is taken from a symbolic link rather than the file it refers to. @item -m @itemx --time=mtime @itemx --time=modify @opindex -m @opindex --time @opindex mtime@r{, changing} @opindex modify @r{time, changing} Change the modification timestamp only. @item -r @var{file} @itemx --reference=@var{file} @opindex -r @opindex --reference Use the times of the reference @var{file} instead of the current time. If this option is combined with the @option{--date=@var{time}} (@option{-d @var{time}}) option, the reference @var{file}'s time is the origin for any relative @var{time}s given, but is otherwise ignored. For example, @samp{-r foo -d '-5 seconds'} specifies a timestamp equal to five seconds before the corresponding timestamp for @file{foo}. If @var{file} is a symbolic link, the reference timestamp is taken from the target of the symlink, unless @option{-h} was also in effect. @item -t [[@var{cc}]@var{yy}]@var{mmddhhmm}[.@var{ss}] @cindex leap seconds Use the argument (optional four-digit or two-digit years, months, days, hours, minutes, optional seconds) instead of the current time. If the year is specified with only two digits, then @var{cc} is 20 for years in the range 0 @dots{} 68, and 19 for years in 69 @dots{} 99. If no digits of the year are specified, the argument is interpreted as a date in the current year. On the atypical systems that support leap seconds, @var{ss} may be @samp{60}. @end table @vindex _POSIX2_VERSION On systems predating POSIX 1003.1-2001, @command{touch} supports an obsolete syntax, as follows. If no timestamp is given with any of the @option{-d}, @option{-r}, or @option{-t} options, and if there are two or more @var{file}s and the first @var{file} is of the form @samp{@var{mmddhhmm}[@var{yy}]} and this would be a valid argument to the @option{-t} option (if the @var{yy}, if any, were moved to the front), and if the represented year is in the range 1969--1999, that argument is interpreted as the time for the other files instead of as a file name. Although this obsolete behavior can be controlled with the @env{_POSIX2_VERSION} environment variable (@pxref{Standards conformance}), portable scripts should avoid commands whose behavior depends on this variable. For example, use @samp{touch ./12312359 main.c} or @samp{touch -t 12312359 main.c} rather than the ambiguous @samp{touch 12312359 main.c}. @exitstatus @node Disk usage @chapter Disk usage @cindex disk usage No disk can hold an infinite amount of data. These commands report how much disk storage is in use or available, report other file and file status information, and write buffers to disk. @menu * df invocation:: Report file system disk space usage. * du invocation:: Estimate file space usage. * stat invocation:: Report file or file system status. * sync invocation:: Synchronize cached writes to persistent storage. * truncate invocation:: Shrink or extend the size of a file. @end menu @node df invocation @section @command{df}: Report file system disk space usage @pindex df @cindex file system disk usage @cindex disk usage by file system @command{df} reports the amount of disk space used and available on file systems. Synopsis: @example df [@var{option}]@dots{} [@var{file}]@dots{} @end example With no arguments, @command{df} reports the space used and available on all currently mounted file systems (of all types). Otherwise, @command{df} reports on the file system containing each argument @var{file}. Normally the disk space is printed in units of 1024 bytes, but this can be overridden (@pxref{Block size}). Non-integer quantities are rounded up to the next higher unit. For bind mounts and without arguments, @command{df} only outputs the statistics for that device with the shortest mount point name in the list of file systems (@var{mtab}), i.e., it hides duplicate entries, unless the @option{-a} option is specified. With the same logic, @command{df} elides a mount entry of a dummy pseudo device if there is another mount entry of a real block device for that mount point with the same device number, e.g. the early-boot pseudo file system @samp{rootfs} is not shown per default when already the real root device has been mounted. @cindex disk device file @cindex device file, disk If an argument @var{file} resolves to a special file containing a mounted file system, @command{df} shows the space available on that file system rather than on the file system containing the device node. GNU @command{df} does not attempt to determine the disk usage on unmounted file systems, because on most kinds of systems doing so requires extremely nonportable intimate knowledge of file system structures. The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @item -a @itemx --all @opindex -a @opindex --all @cindex ignore file systems Include in the listing dummy, duplicate, or inaccessible file systems, which are omitted by default. Dummy file systems are typically special purpose pseudo file systems such as @samp{/proc}, with no associated storage. Duplicate file systems are local or remote file systems that are mounted at separate locations in the local file hierarchy, or bind mounted locations. Inaccessible file systems are those which are mounted but subsequently over-mounted by another file system at that point, or otherwise inaccessible due to permissions of the mount point etc. @item -B @var{size} @itemx --block-size=@var{size} @opindex -B @opindex --block-size @cindex file system sizes Scale sizes by @var{size} before printing them (@pxref{Block size}). For example, @option{-BG} prints sizes in units of 1,073,741,824 bytes. @optHumanReadable @item -H @opindex -H Equivalent to @option{--si}. @item -i @itemx --inodes @opindex -i @opindex --inodes @cindex inode usage List inode usage information instead of block usage. An inode (short for index node) contains information about a file such as its owner, permissions, timestamps, and location on the disk. @item -k @opindex -k @cindex kibibytes for file system sizes Print sizes in 1024-byte blocks, overriding the default block size (@pxref{Block size}). This option is equivalent to @option{--block-size=1K}. @item -l @itemx --local @opindex -l @opindex --local @cindex file system types, limiting output to certain Limit the listing to local file systems. By default, remote file systems are also listed. @item --no-sync @opindex --no-sync @cindex file system space, retrieving old data more quickly Do not invoke the @code{sync} system call before getting any usage data. This may make @command{df} run significantly faster on systems with many disks, but on some systems (notably SunOS) the results may be slightly out of date. This is the default. @item --output @itemx --output[=@var{field_list}] @opindex --output Use the output format defined by @var{field_list}, or print all fields if @var{field_list} is omitted. In the latter case, the order of the columns conforms to the order of the field descriptions below. The use of the @option{--output} together with each of the options @option{-i}, @option{-P}, and @option{-T} is mutually exclusive. FIELD_LIST is a comma-separated list of columns to be included in @command{df}'s output and therefore effectively controls the order of output columns. Each field can thus be used at the place of choice, but yet must only be used once. Valid field names in the @var{field_list} are: @table @samp @item source The source of the mount point, usually a device. @item fstype File system type. @item itotal Total number of inodes. @item iused Number of used inodes. @item iavail Number of available inodes. @item ipcent Percentage of @var{iused} divided by @var{itotal}. @item size Total number of blocks. @item used Number of used blocks. @item avail Number of available blocks. @item pcent Percentage of @var{used} divided by @var{size}. @item file The file name if specified on the command line. @item target The mount point. @end table The fields for block and inodes statistics are affected by the scaling options like @option{-h} as usual. The definition of the @var{field_list} can even be split among several @option{--output} uses. @example #!/bin/sh # Print the TARGET (i.e., the mount point) along with their percentage # statistic regarding the blocks and the inodes. df --out=target --output=pcent,ipcent # Print all available fields. df --o @end example @item -P @itemx --portability @opindex -P @opindex --portability @cindex one-line output format @cindex POSIX output format @cindex portable output format @cindex output format, portable Use the POSIX output format. This is like the default format except for the following: @enumerate @item The information about each file system is always printed on exactly one line; a mount device is never put on a line by itself. This means that if the mount device name is more than 20 characters long (e.g., for some network mounts), the columns are misaligned. @item The labels in the header output line are changed to conform to POSIX. @item The default block size and output format are unaffected by the @env{DF_BLOCK_SIZE}, @env{BLOCK_SIZE} and @env{BLOCKSIZE} environment variables. However, the default block size is still affected by @env{POSIXLY_CORRECT}: it is 512 if @env{POSIXLY_CORRECT} is set, 1024 otherwise. @xref{Block size}. @end enumerate @optSi @item --sync @opindex --sync @cindex file system space, retrieving current data more slowly Invoke the @code{sync} system call before getting any usage data. On some systems (notably SunOS), doing this yields more up to date results, but in general this option makes @command{df} much slower, especially when there are many or very busy file systems. @item --total @opindex --total @cindex grand total of disk size, usage and available space Print a grand total of all arguments after all arguments have been processed. This can be used to find out the total disk size, usage and available space of all listed devices. If no arguments are specified df will try harder to elide file systems insignificant to the total available space, by suppressing duplicate remote file systems. For the grand total line, @command{df} prints @samp{"total"} into the @var{source} column, and @samp{"-"} into the @var{target} column. If there is no @var{source} column (see @option{--output}), then @command{df} prints @samp{"total"} into the @var{target} column, if present. @item -t @var{fstype} @itemx --type=@var{fstype} @opindex -t @opindex --type @cindex file system types, limiting output to certain Limit the listing to file systems of type @var{fstype}. Multiple file system types can be specified by giving multiple @option{-t} options. By default, nothing is omitted. @item -T @itemx --print-type @opindex -T @opindex --print-type @cindex file system types, printing Print each file system's type. The types printed here are the same ones you can include or exclude with @option{-t} and @option{-x}. The particular types printed are whatever is supported by the system. Here are some of the common names (this list is certainly not exhaustive): @table @samp @item nfs @cindex NFS file system type An NFS file system, i.e., one mounted over a network from another machine. This is the one type name which seems to be used uniformly by all systems. @item ext2@r{, }ext3@r{, }ext4@r{, }xfs@r{, }btrfs@dots{} @cindex Linux file system types @cindex local file system types @opindex ext2 @r{file system type} @opindex ext3 @r{file system type} @opindex ext4 @r{file system type} @opindex xfs @r{file system type} @opindex btrfs @r{file system type} A file system on a locally-mounted hard disk. (The system might even support more than one type here; Linux does.) @item iso9660@r{, }cdfs @cindex CD-ROM file system type @cindex DVD file system type @cindex ISO9660 file system type @opindex iso9660 @r{file system type} @opindex cdfs @r{file system type} A file system on a CD or DVD drive. HP-UX uses @samp{cdfs}, most other systems use @samp{iso9660}. @item ntfs@r{,}fat @cindex NTFS file system @cindex DOS file system @cindex MS-DOS file system @cindex MS-Windows file system @opindex ntfs @r{file system file} @opindex fat @r{file system file} File systems used by MS-Windows / MS-DOS. @end table @item -x @var{fstype} @itemx --exclude-type=@var{fstype} @opindex -x @opindex --exclude-type Limit the listing to file systems not of type @var{fstype}. Multiple file system types can be eliminated by giving multiple @option{-x} options. By default, no file system types are omitted. @item -v Ignored; for compatibility with System V versions of @command{df}. @end table @command{df} is installed only on systems that have usable mount tables, so portable scripts should not rely on its existence. @exitstatus Failure includes the case where no output is generated, so you can inspect the exit status of a command like @samp{df -t ext3 -t reiserfs @var{dir}} to test whether @var{dir} is on a file system of type @samp{ext3} or @samp{reiserfs}. Since the list of file systems (@var{mtab}) is needed to determine the file system type, failure includes the cases when that list cannot be read and one or more of the options @option{-a}, @option{-l}, @option{-t} or @option{-x} is used together with a file name argument. @node du invocation @section @command{du}: Estimate file space usage @pindex du @cindex file space usage @cindex disk usage for files @command{du} reports the amount of disk space used by the set of specified files and for each subdirectory (of directory arguments). Synopsis: @example du [@var{option}]@dots{} [@var{file}]@dots{} @end example With no arguments, @command{du} reports the disk space for the current directory. Normally the disk space is printed in units of 1024 bytes, but this can be overridden (@pxref{Block size}). Non-integer quantities are rounded up to the next higher unit. If two or more hard links point to the same file, only one of the hard links is counted. The @var{file} argument order affects which links are counted, and changing the argument order may change the numbers and entries that @command{du} outputs. The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @optNull @item -a @itemx --all @opindex -a @opindex --all Show counts for all files, not just directories. @item --apparent-size @opindex --apparent-size Print apparent sizes, rather than disk usage. The apparent size of a file is the number of bytes reported by @code{wc -c} on regular files, or more generally, @code{ls -l --block-size=1} or @code{stat --format=%s}. For example, a file containing the word @samp{zoo} with no newline would, of course, have an apparent size of 3. Such a small file may require anywhere from 0 to 16 KiB or more of disk space, depending on the type and configuration of the file system on which the file resides. However, a sparse file created with this command: @example dd bs=1 seek=2GiB if=/dev/null of=big @end example @noindent has an apparent size of 2 GiB, yet on most modern systems, it actually uses almost no disk space. @item -B @var{size} @itemx --block-size=@var{size} @opindex -B @opindex --block-size @cindex file sizes Scale sizes by @var{size} before printing them (@pxref{Block size}). For example, @option{-BG} prints sizes in units of 1,073,741,824 bytes. @item -b @itemx --bytes @opindex -b @opindex --bytes Equivalent to @code{--apparent-size --block-size=1}. @item -c @itemx --total @opindex -c @opindex --total @cindex grand total of disk space Print a grand total of all arguments after all arguments have been processed. This can be used to find out the total disk usage of a given set of files or directories. @item -D @itemx --dereference-args @opindex -D @opindex --dereference-args Dereference symbolic links that are command line arguments. Does not affect other symbolic links. This is helpful for finding out the disk usage of directories, such as @file{/usr/tmp}, which are often symbolic links. @item -d @var{depth} @itemx --max-depth=@var{depth} @opindex -d @var{depth} @opindex --max-depth=@var{depth} @cindex limiting output of @command{du} Show the total for each directory (and file if --all) that is at most MAX_DEPTH levels down from the root of the hierarchy. The root is at level 0, so @code{du --max-depth=0} is equivalent to @code{du -s}. @c --files0-from=FILE @filesZeroFromOption{du,, with the @option{--total} (@option{-c}) option} @item -H @opindex -H Equivalent to @option{--dereference-args} (@option{-D}). @optHumanReadable @item --inodes @opindex --inodes @cindex inode usage, dereferencing in @command{du} List inode usage information instead of block usage. This option is useful for finding directories which contain many files, and therefore eat up most of the inodes space of a file system (see @command{df}, option @option{--inodes}). It can well be combined with the options @option{-a}, @option{-c}, @option{-h}, @option{-l}, @option{-s}, @option{-S}, @option{-t} and @option{-x}; however, passing other options regarding the block size, for example @option{-b}, @option{-m} and @option{--apparent-size}, is ignored. @item -k @opindex -k @cindex kibibytes for file sizes Print sizes in 1024-byte blocks, overriding the default block size (@pxref{Block size}). This option is equivalent to @option{--block-size=1K}. @item -L @itemx --dereference @opindex -L @opindex --dereference @cindex symbolic links, dereferencing in @command{du} Dereference symbolic links (show the disk space used by the file or directory that the link points to instead of the space used by the link). @item -l @itemx --count-links @opindex -l @opindex --count-links @cindex hard links, counting in @command{du} Count the size of all files, even if they have appeared already (as a hard link). @item -m @opindex -m @cindex mebibytes for file sizes Print sizes in 1,048,576-byte blocks, overriding the default block size (@pxref{Block size}). This option is equivalent to @option{--block-size=1M}. @item -P @itemx --no-dereference @opindex -P @opindex --no-dereference @cindex symbolic links, dereferencing in @command{du} For each symbolic links encountered by @command{du}, consider the disk space used by the symbolic link. @item -S @itemx --separate-dirs @opindex -S @opindex --separate-dirs Normally, in the output of @command{du} (when not using @option{--summarize}), the size listed next to a directory name, @var{d}, represents the sum of sizes of all entries beneath @var{d} as well as the size of @var{d} itself. With @option{--separate-dirs}, the size reported for a directory name, @var{d}, will exclude the size of any subdirectories. @optSi @item -s @itemx --summarize @opindex -s @opindex --summarize Display only a total for each argument. @item -t @var{size} @itemx --threshold=@var{size} @opindex -t @opindex --threshold Exclude entries based on a given @var{size}. The @var{size} refers to used blocks in normal mode (@pxref{Block size}), or inodes count in conjunction with the @option{--inodes} option. If @var{size} is positive, then @command{du} will only print entries with a size greater than or equal to that. If @var{size} is negative, then @command{du} will only print entries with a size smaller than or equal to that. Although GNU @command{find} can be used to find files of a certain size, @command{du}'s @option{--threshold} option can be used to also filter directories based on a given size. Please note that the @option{--threshold} option can be combined with the @option{--apparent-size} option, and in this case would elide entries based on its apparent size. Please note that the @option{--threshold} option can be combined with the @option{--inodes} option, and in this case would elide entries based on its inodes count. Here's how you would use @option{--threshold} to find directories with a size greater than or equal to 200 megabytes: @example du --threshold=200MB @end example Here's how you would use @option{--threshold} to find directories and files - note the @option{-a} - with an apparent size smaller than or equal to 500 bytes: @example du -a -t -500 --apparent-size @end example Here's how you would use @option{--threshold} to find directories on the root file system with more than 20000 inodes used in the directory tree below: @example du --inodes -x --threshold=20000 / @end example @item --time @opindex --time @cindex last modified dates, displaying in @command{du} Show the most recent modification timestamp (mtime) of any file in the directory, or any of its subdirectories. @xref{File timestamps}. @item --time=ctime @itemx --time=status @itemx --time=use @opindex --time @opindex ctime@r{, show the most recent} @opindex status time@r{, show the most recent} @opindex use time@r{, show the most recent} Show the most recent status change timestamp (ctime) of any file in the directory, or any of its subdirectories. @xref{File timestamps}. @item --time=atime @itemx --time=access @opindex --time @opindex atime@r{, show the most recent} @opindex access timestamp@r{, show the most recent} Show the most recent access timestamp (atime) of any file in the directory, or any of its subdirectories. @xref{File timestamps}. @item --time-style=@var{style} @opindex --time-style @cindex time style List timestamps in style @var{style}. This option has an effect only if the @option{--time} option is also specified. The @var{style} should be one of the following: @table @samp @item +@var{format} @vindex LC_TIME List timestamps using @var{format}, where @var{format} is interpreted like the format argument of @command{date} (@pxref{date invocation}). For example, @option{--time-style="+%Y-%m-%d %H:%M:%S"} causes @command{du} to list timestamps like @samp{2002-03-30 23:45:56}. As with @command{date}, @var{format}'s interpretation is affected by the @env{LC_TIME} locale category. @item full-iso List timestamps in full using ISO 8601-like date, time, and time zone components with nanosecond precision, e.g., @samp{2002-03-30 23:45:56.477817180 -0700}. This style is equivalent to @samp{+%Y-%m-%d %H:%M:%S.%N %z}. @item long-iso List ISO 8601 date and time components with minute precision, e.g., @samp{2002-03-30 23:45}. These timestamps are shorter than @samp{full-iso} timestamps, and are usually good enough for everyday work. This style is equivalent to @samp{+%Y-%m-%d %H:%M}. @item iso List ISO 8601 dates for timestamps, e.g., @samp{2002-03-30}. This style is equivalent to @samp{+%Y-%m-%d}. @end table @vindex TIME_STYLE You can specify the default value of the @option{--time-style} option with the environment variable @env{TIME_STYLE}; if @env{TIME_STYLE} is not set the default style is @samp{long-iso}. For compatibility with @command{ls}, if @env{TIME_STYLE} begins with @samp{+} and contains a newline, the newline and any later characters are ignored; if @env{TIME_STYLE} begins with @samp{posix-} the @samp{posix-} is ignored; and if @env{TIME_STYLE} is @samp{locale} it is ignored. @item -X @var{file} @itemx --exclude-from=@var{file} @opindex -X @var{file} @opindex --exclude-from=@var{file} @cindex excluding files from @command{du} Like @option{--exclude}, except take the patterns to exclude from @var{file}, one per line. If @var{file} is @samp{-}, take the patterns from standard input. @item --exclude=@var{pattern} @opindex --exclude=@var{pattern} @cindex excluding files from @command{du} When recursing, skip subdirectories or files matching @var{pattern}. For example, @code{du --exclude='*.o'} excludes files whose names end in @samp{.o}. @item -x @itemx --one-file-system @opindex -x @opindex --one-file-system @cindex one file system, restricting @command{du} to Skip directories that are on different file systems from the one that the argument being processed is on. @end table @cindex NFS mounts from BSD to HP-UX On BSD systems, @command{du} reports sizes that are half the correct values for files that are NFS-mounted from HP-UX systems. On HP-UX systems, it reports sizes that are twice the correct values for files that are NFS-mounted from BSD systems. This is due to a flaw in HP-UX; it also affects the HP-UX @command{du} program. @exitstatus @node stat invocation @section @command{stat}: Report file or file system status @pindex stat @cindex file status @cindex file system status @command{stat} displays information about the specified file(s). Synopsis: @example stat [@var{option}]@dots{} [@var{file}]@dots{} @end example With no option, @command{stat} reports all information about the given files. But it also can be used to report the information of the file systems the given files are located on. If the files are links, @command{stat} can also give information about the files the links point to. @mayConflictWithShellBuiltIn{stat} @table @samp @item -L @itemx --dereference @opindex -L @opindex --dereference @cindex symbolic links, dereferencing in @command{stat} Change how @command{stat} treats symbolic links. With this option, @command{stat} acts on the file referenced by each symbolic link argument. Without it, @command{stat} acts on any symbolic link argument directly. @item -f @itemx --file-system @opindex -f @opindex --file-system @cindex file systems Report information about the file systems where the given files are located instead of information about the files themselves. This option implies the @option{-L} option. @item -c @itemx --format=@var{format} @opindex -c @opindex --format=@var{format} @cindex output format Use @var{format} rather than the default format. @var{format} is automatically newline-terminated, so running a command like the following with two or more @var{file} operands produces a line of output for each operand: @example $ stat --format=%d:%i / /usr 2050:2 2057:2 @end example @item --printf=@var{format} @opindex --printf=@var{format} @cindex output format Use @var{format} rather than the default format. Like @option{--format}, but interpret backslash escapes, and do not output a mandatory trailing newline. If you want a newline, include @samp{\n} in the @var{format}. Here's how you would use @option{--printf} to print the device and inode numbers of @file{/} and @file{/usr}: @example $ stat --printf='%d:%i\n' / /usr 2050:2 2057:2 @end example @item -t @itemx --terse @opindex -t @opindex --terse @cindex terse output Print the information in terse form, suitable for parsing by other programs. The output of the following commands are identical and the @option{--format} also identifies the items printed (in fuller form) in the default format. Note the format string would include another @samp{%C} at the end with an active SELinux security context. @example $ stat --format="%n %s %b %f %u %g %D %i %h %t %T %X %Y %Z %W %o" ... $ stat --terse ... @end example The same illustrating terse output in @option{--file-system} mode: @example $ stat -f --format="%n %i %l %t %s %S %b %f %a %c %d" ... $ stat -f --terse ... @end example @end table The valid @var{format} directives for files with @option{--format} and @option{--printf} are: @itemize @bullet @item %a - Access rights in octal (note @samp{#} and @samp{0} printf flags) @item %A - Access rights in human readable form @item %b - Number of blocks allocated (see @samp{%B}) @item %B - The size in bytes of each block reported by @samp{%b} @item %C - The SELinux security context of a file, if available @item %d - Device number in decimal @item %D - Device number in hex @item %f - Raw mode in hex @item %F - File type @item %g - Group ID of owner @item %G - Group name of owner @item %h - Number of hard links @item %i - Inode number @item %m - Mount point (See note below) @item %n - File name @item %N - Quoted file name with dereference if symbolic link (see below) @item %o - Optimal I/O transfer size hint @item %s - Total size, in bytes @item %t - Major device type in hex (see below) @item %T - Minor device type in hex (see below) @item %u - User ID of owner @item %U - User name of owner @item %w - Time of file birth, or @samp{-} if unknown @item %W - Time of file birth as seconds since Epoch, or @samp{0} @item %x - Time of last access @item %X - Time of last access as seconds since Epoch @item %y - Time of last data modification @item %Y - Time of last data modification as seconds since Epoch @item %z - Time of last status change @item %Z - Time of last status change as seconds since Epoch @end itemize The @samp{%a} format prints the octal mode, and so it is useful to control the zero padding of the output with the @samp{#} and @samp{0} printf flags. For example to pad to at least 3 wide while making larger numbers unambiguously octal, you can use @samp{%#03a}. The @samp{%N} format can be set with the environment variable @env{QUOTING_STYLE}@. If that environment variable is not set, the default value is @samp{shell-escape}. Valid quoting styles are: @quotingStyles The @samp{%t} and @samp{%T} formats operate on the st_rdev member of the stat(2) structure, and are only defined for character and block special files. On some systems or file types, st_rdev may be used to represent other quantities. The @samp{%W}, @samp{%X}, @samp{%Y}, and @samp{%Z} formats accept a precision preceded by a period to specify the number of digits to print after the decimal point. For example, @samp{%.3X} outputs the access timestamp to millisecond precision. If a period is given but no precision, @command{stat} uses 9 digits, so @samp{%.X} is equivalent to @samp{%.9X}@. When discarding excess precision, timestamps are truncated toward minus infinity. @example zero pad: $ stat -c '[%015Y]' /usr [000001288929712] space align: $ stat -c '[%15Y]' /usr [ 1288929712] $ stat -c '[%-15Y]' /usr [1288929712 ] precision: $ stat -c '[%.3Y]' /usr [1288929712.114] $ stat -c '[%.Y]' /usr [1288929712.114951834] @end example The mount point printed by @samp{%m} is similar to that output by @command{df}, except that: @itemize @bullet @item stat does not dereference symlinks by default (unless @option{-L} is specified) @item stat does not search for specified device nodes in the file system list, instead operating on them directly @item @cindex bind mount stat outputs the alias for a bind mounted file, rather than the initial mount point of its backing device. One can recursively call stat until there is no change in output, to get the current base mount point @end itemize When listing file system information (@option{--file-system} (@option{-f})), you must use a different set of @var{format} directives: @itemize @bullet @item %a - Free blocks available to non-super-user @item %b - Total data blocks in file system @item %c - Total file nodes in file system @item %d - Free file nodes in file system @item %f - Free blocks in file system @item %i - File System ID in hex @item %l - Maximum length of file names @item %n - File name @item %s - Block size (for faster transfers) @item %S - Fundamental block size (for block counts) @item %t - Type in hex @item %T - Type in human readable form @end itemize @vindex TZ Timestamps are listed according to the time zone rules specified by the @env{TZ} environment variable, or by the system default rules if @env{TZ} is not set. @xref{TZ Variable,, Specifying the Time Zone with @env{TZ}, libc, The GNU C Library Reference Manual}. @exitstatus @node sync invocation @section @command{sync}: Synchronize cached writes to persistent storage @pindex sync @cindex synchronize disk and memory @cindex Synchronize cached writes to persistent storage @command{sync} synchronizes in memory files or file systems to persistent storage. Synopsis: @example sync [@var{option}] [@var{file}]@dots{} @end example @cindex superblock, writing @cindex inodes, written buffered @command{sync} writes any data buffered in memory out to disk. This can include (but is not limited to) modified superblocks, modified inodes, and delayed reads and writes. This must be implemented by the kernel; The @command{sync} program does nothing but exercise the @code{sync}, @code{syncfs}, @code{fsync}, and @code{fdatasync} system calls. @cindex crashes and corruption The kernel keeps data in memory to avoid doing (relatively slow) disk reads and writes. This improves performance, but if the computer crashes, data may be lost or the file system corrupted as a result. The @command{sync} command instructs the kernel to write data in memory to persistent storage. If any argument is specified then only those files will be synchronized using the fsync(2) syscall by default. If at least one file is specified, it is possible to change the synchronization method with the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @item -d @itemx --data @opindex --data Use fdatasync(2) to sync only the data for the file, and any metadata required to maintain file system consistency. @item -f @itemx --file-system @opindex --file-system Synchronize all the I/O waiting for the file systems that contain the file, using the syscall syncfs(2). Note you would usually @emph{not} specify this option if passing a device node like @samp{/dev/sda} for example, as that would sync the containing file system rather than the referenced one. Note also that depending on the system, passing individual device nodes or files may have different sync characteristics than using no arguments. I.e., arguments passed to fsync(2) may provide greater guarantees through write barriers, than a global sync(2) used when no arguments are provided. @end table @exitstatus @node truncate invocation @section @command{truncate}: Shrink or extend the size of a file @pindex truncate @cindex truncating, file sizes @command{truncate} shrinks or extends the size of each @var{file} to the specified size. Synopsis: @example truncate @var{option}@dots{} @var{file}@dots{} @end example @cindex files, creating Any @var{file} that does not exist is created. @cindex sparse files, creating @cindex holes, creating files with If a @var{file} is larger than the specified size, the extra data is lost. If a @var{file} is shorter, it is extended and the extended part (or hole) reads as zero bytes. The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @item -c @itemx --no-create @opindex -c @opindex --no-create Do not create files that do not exist. @item -o @itemx --io-blocks @opindex -o @opindex --io-blocks Treat @var{size} as number of I/O blocks of the @var{file} rather than bytes. @item -r @var{rfile} @itemx --reference=@var{rfile} @opindex -r @opindex --reference Base the size of each @var{file} on the size of @var{rfile}. @item -s @var{size} @itemx --size=@var{size} @opindex -s @opindex --size Set or adjust the size of each @var{file} according to @var{size}. @var{size} is in bytes unless @option{--io-blocks} is specified. @multiplierSuffixesNoBlocks{size} @var{size} may also be prefixed by one of the following to adjust the size of each @var{file} based on its current size: @example @samp{+} => extend by @samp{-} => reduce by @samp{<} => at most @samp{>} => at least @samp{/} => round down to multiple of @samp{%} => round up to multiple of @end example @end table @exitstatus @node Printing text @chapter Printing text @cindex printing text, commands for @cindex commands for printing text This section describes commands that display text strings. @menu * echo invocation:: Print a line of text. * printf invocation:: Format and print data. * yes invocation:: Print a string until interrupted. @end menu @node echo invocation @section @command{echo}: Print a line of text @pindex echo @cindex displaying text @cindex printing text @cindex text, displaying @cindex arbitrary text, displaying @command{echo} writes each given @var{string} to standard output, with a space between each and a newline after the last one. Synopsis: @example echo [@var{option}]@dots{} [@var{string}]@dots{} @end example @mayConflictWithShellBuiltIn{echo} The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. Options must precede operands, and the normally-special argument @samp{--} has no special meaning and is treated like any other @var{string}. @table @samp @item -n @opindex -n Do not output the trailing newline. @item -e @opindex -e @cindex backslash escapes Enable interpretation of the following backslash-escaped characters in each @var{string}: @table @samp @item \a alert (bell) @item \b backspace @item \c produce no further output @item \e escape @item \f form feed @item \n newline @item \r carriage return @item \t horizontal tab @item \v vertical tab @item \\ backslash @item \0@var{nnn} the eight-bit value that is the octal number @var{nnn} (zero to three octal digits), if @var{nnn} is a nine-bit value, the ninth bit is ignored @item \@var{nnn} the eight-bit value that is the octal number @var{nnn} (one to three octal digits), if @var{nnn} is a nine-bit value, the ninth bit is ignored @item \x@var{hh} the eight-bit value that is the hexadecimal number @var{hh} (one or two hexadecimal digits) @end table @item -E @opindex -E @cindex backslash escapes Disable interpretation of backslash escapes in each @var{string}. This is the default. If @option{-e} and @option{-E} are both specified, the last one given takes effect. @end table @vindex POSIXLY_CORRECT If the @env{POSIXLY_CORRECT} environment variable is set, then when @command{echo}'s first argument is not @option{-n} it outputs option-like arguments instead of treating them as options. For example, @code{echo -ne hello} outputs @samp{-ne hello} instead of plain @samp{hello}. POSIX does not require support for any options, and says that the behavior of @command{echo} is implementation-defined if any @var{string} contains a backslash or if the first argument is @option{-n}. Portable programs can use the @command{printf} command if they need to omit trailing newlines or output control characters or backslashes. @xref{printf invocation}. @exitstatus @node printf invocation @section @command{printf}: Format and print data @pindex printf @command{printf} does formatted printing of text. Synopsis: @example printf @var{format} [@var{argument}]@dots{} @end example @command{printf} prints the @var{format} string, interpreting @samp{%} directives and @samp{\} escapes to format numeric and string arguments in a way that is mostly similar to the C @samp{printf} function. @xref{Output Conversion Syntax,, @command{printf} format directives, libc, The GNU C Library Reference Manual}, for details. The differences are listed below. @mayConflictWithShellBuiltIn{printf} @itemize @bullet @item The @var{format} argument is reused as necessary to convert all the given @var{argument}s. For example, the command @samp{printf %s a b} outputs @samp{ab}. @item Missing @var{argument}s are treated as null strings or as zeros, depending on whether the context expects a string or a number. For example, the command @samp{printf %sx%d} prints @samp{x0}. @item @kindex \c An additional escape, @samp{\c}, causes @command{printf} to produce no further output. For example, the command @samp{printf 'A%sC\cD%sF' B E} prints @samp{ABC}. @item The hexadecimal escape sequence @samp{\x@var{hh}} has at most two digits, as opposed to C where it can have an unlimited number of digits. For example, the command @samp{printf '\x07e'} prints two bytes, whereas the C statement @samp{printf ("\x07e")} prints just one. @item @kindex %b An additional directive @samp{%b}, prints its argument string with @samp{\} escapes interpreted in the same way as in the @var{format} string, except that octal escapes are of the form @samp{\0@var{ooo}} where @var{ooo} is 0 to 3 octal digits. If @samp{\@var{ooo}} is nine-bit value, ignore the ninth bit. If a precision is also given, it limits the number of bytes printed from the converted string. @item @kindex %q An additional directive @samp{%q}, prints its argument string in a format that can be reused as input by most shells. Non-printable characters are escaped with the POSIX proposed @samp{$''} syntax, and shell metacharacters are quoted appropriately. This is an equivalent format to @command{ls --quoting=shell-escape} output. @item Numeric arguments must be single C constants, possibly with leading @samp{+} or @samp{-}. For example, @samp{printf %.4d -3} outputs @samp{-0003}. @item @vindex POSIXLY_CORRECT If the leading character of a numeric argument is @samp{"} or @samp{'} then its value is the numeric value of the immediately following character. Any remaining characters are silently ignored if the @env{POSIXLY_CORRECT} environment variable is set; otherwise, a warning is printed. For example, @samp{printf "%d" "'a"} outputs @samp{97} on hosts that use the ASCII character set, since @samp{a} has the numeric value 97 in ASCII. @end itemize @vindex LC_NUMERIC A floating-point argument must use a period before any fractional digits, but is printed according to the @env{LC_NUMERIC} category of the current locale. For example, in a locale whose radix character is a comma, the command @samp{printf %g 3.14} outputs @samp{3,14} whereas the command @samp{printf %g 3,14} is an error. @xref{Floating point}. @kindex \@var{ooo} @kindex \x@var{hh} @command{printf} interprets @samp{\@var{ooo}} in @var{format} as an octal number (if @var{ooo} is 1 to 3 octal digits) specifying a byte to print, and @samp{\x@var{hh}} as a hexadecimal number (if @var{hh} is 1 to 2 hex digits) specifying a character to print. Note however that when @samp{\@var{ooo}} specifies a number larger than 255, @command{printf} ignores the ninth bit. For example, @samp{printf '\400'} is equivalent to @samp{printf '\0'}. @kindex \uhhhh @kindex \Uhhhhhhhh @cindex Unicode @cindex ISO/IEC 10646 @vindex LC_CTYPE @command{printf} interprets two character syntaxes introduced in ISO C 99: @samp{\u} for 16-bit Unicode (ISO/IEC 10646) characters, specified as four hexadecimal digits @var{hhhh}, and @samp{\U} for 32-bit Unicode characters, specified as eight hexadecimal digits @var{hhhhhhhh}. @command{printf} outputs the Unicode characters according to the @env{LC_CTYPE} locale. Unicode characters in the ranges U+0000@dots{}U+009F, U+D800@dots{}U+DFFF cannot be specified by this syntax, except for U+0024 ($), U+0040 (@@), and U+0060 (@`). The processing of @samp{\u} and @samp{\U} requires a full-featured @code{iconv} facility. It is activated on systems with glibc 2.2 (or newer), or when @code{libiconv} is installed prior to this package. Otherwise @samp{\u} and @samp{\U} will print as-is. The only options are a lone @option{--help} or @option{--version}. @xref{Common options}. Options must precede operands. The Unicode character syntaxes are useful for writing strings in a locale independent way. For example, a string containing the Euro currency symbol @example $ env printf '\u20AC 14.95' @end example @noindent will be output correctly in all locales supporting the Euro symbol (ISO-8859-15, UTF-8, and others). Similarly, a Chinese string @example $ env printf '\u4e2d\u6587' @end example @noindent will be output correctly in all Chinese locales (GB2312, BIG5, UTF-8, etc). Note that in these examples, the @command{printf} command has been invoked via @command{env} to ensure that we run the program found via your shell's search path, and not a shell alias or a built-in function. For larger strings, you don't need to look up the hexadecimal code values of each character one by one. ASCII characters mixed with \u escape sequences is also known as the JAVA source file encoding. You can use GNU recode 3.5c (or newer) to convert strings to this encoding. Here is how to convert a piece of text into a shell script which will output this text in a locale-independent way: @smallexample $ LC_CTYPE=zh_CN.big5 /usr/local/bin/printf \ '\u4e2d\u6587\n' > sample.txt $ recode BIG5..JAVA < sample.txt \ | sed -e "s|^|/usr/local/bin/printf '|" -e "s|$|\\\\n'|" \ > sample.sh @end smallexample @exitstatus @node yes invocation @section @command{yes}: Print a string until interrupted @pindex yes @cindex repeated output of a string @command{yes} prints the command line arguments, separated by spaces and followed by a newline, forever until it is killed. If no arguments are given, it prints @samp{y} followed by a newline forever until killed. Upon a write error, @command{yes} exits with status @samp{1}. The only options are a lone @option{--help} or @option{--version}. To output an argument that begins with @samp{-}, precede it with @option{--}, e.g., @samp{yes -- --help}. @xref{Common options}. @node Conditions @chapter Conditions @cindex conditions @cindex commands for exit status @cindex exit status commands This section describes commands that are primarily useful for their exit status, rather than their output. Thus, they are often used as the condition of shell @code{if} statements, or as the last command in a pipeline. @menu * false invocation:: Do nothing, unsuccessfully. * true invocation:: Do nothing, successfully. * test invocation:: Check file types and compare values. * expr invocation:: Evaluate expressions. @end menu @node false invocation @section @command{false}: Do nothing, unsuccessfully @pindex false @cindex do nothing, unsuccessfully @cindex failure exit status @cindex exit status of @command{false} @command{false} does nothing except return an exit status of 1, meaning @dfn{failure}. It can be used as a place holder in shell scripts where an unsuccessful command is needed. In most modern shells, @command{false} is a built-in command, so when you use @samp{false} in a script, you're probably using the built-in command, not the one documented here. @command{false} honors the @option{--help} and @option{--version} options. This version of @command{false} is implemented as a C program, and is thus more secure and faster than a shell script implementation, and may safely be used as a dummy shell for the purpose of disabling accounts. Note that @command{false} (unlike all other programs documented herein) exits unsuccessfully, even when invoked with @option{--help} or @option{--version}. Portable programs should not assume that the exit status of @command{false} is 1, as it is greater than 1 on some non-GNU hosts. @node true invocation @section @command{true}: Do nothing, successfully @pindex true @cindex do nothing, successfully @cindex no-op @cindex successful exit @cindex exit status of @command{true} @command{true} does nothing except return an exit status of 0, meaning @dfn{success}. It can be used as a place holder in shell scripts where a successful command is needed, although the shell built-in command @code{:} (colon) may do the same thing faster. In most modern shells, @command{true} is a built-in command, so when you use @samp{true} in a script, you're probably using the built-in command, not the one documented here. @command{true} honors the @option{--help} and @option{--version} options. Note, however, that it is possible to cause @command{true} to exit with nonzero status: with the @option{--help} or @option{--version} option, and with standard output already closed or redirected to a file that evokes an I/O error. For example, using a Bourne-compatible shell: @example $ ./true --version >&- ./true: write error: Bad file number $ ./true --version > /dev/full ./true: write error: No space left on device @end example This version of @command{true} is implemented as a C program, and is thus more secure and faster than a shell script implementation, and may safely be used as a dummy shell for the purpose of disabling accounts. @node test invocation @section @command{test}: Check file types and compare values @pindex test @cindex check file types @cindex compare values @cindex expression evaluation @command{test} returns a status of 0 (true) or 1 (false) depending on the evaluation of the conditional expression @var{expr}. Each part of the expression must be a separate argument. @command{test} has file status checks, string operators, and numeric comparison operators. @command{test} has an alternate form that uses opening and closing square brackets instead a leading @samp{test}. For example, instead of @samp{test -d /}, you can write @samp{[ -d / ]}. The square brackets must be separate arguments; for example, @samp{[-d /]} does not have the desired effect. Since @samp{test @var{expr}} and @samp{[ @var{expr} ]} have the same meaning, only the former form is discussed below. Synopses: @example test @var{expression} test [ @var{expression} ] [ ] [ @var{option} @end example @mayConflictWithShellBuiltIn{test} If @var{expression} is omitted, @command{test} returns false. If @var{expression} is a single argument, @command{test} returns false if the argument is null and true otherwise. The argument can be any string, including strings like @samp{-d}, @samp{-1}, @samp{--}, @samp{--help}, and @samp{--version} that most other programs would treat as options. To get help and version information, invoke the commands @samp{[ --help} and @samp{[ --version}, without the usual closing brackets. @xref{Common options}. @cindex exit status of @command{test} Exit status: @display 0 if the expression is true, 1 if the expression is false, 2 if an error occurred. @end display @menu * File type tests:: -[bcdfhLpSt] * Access permission tests:: -[gkruwxOG] * File characteristic tests:: -e -s -nt -ot -ef * String tests:: -z -n = == != * Numeric tests:: -eq -ne -lt -le -gt -ge * Connectives for test:: ! -a -o @end menu @node File type tests @subsection File type tests @cindex file type tests These options test for particular types of files. (Everything's a file, but not all files are the same!) @table @samp @item -b @var{file} @opindex -b @cindex block special check True if @var{file} exists and is a block special device. @item -c @var{file} @opindex -c @cindex character special check True if @var{file} exists and is a character special device. @item -d @var{file} @opindex -d @cindex directory check True if @var{file} exists and is a directory. @item -f @var{file} @opindex -f @cindex regular file check True if @var{file} exists and is a regular file. @item -h @var{file} @itemx -L @var{file} @opindex -L @opindex -h @cindex symbolic link check True if @var{file} exists and is a symbolic link. Unlike all other file-related tests, this test does not dereference @var{file} if it is a symbolic link. @item -p @var{file} @opindex -p @cindex named pipe check True if @var{file} exists and is a named pipe. @item -S @var{file} @opindex -S @cindex socket check True if @var{file} exists and is a socket. @item -t @var{fd} @opindex -t @cindex terminal check True if @var{fd} is a file descriptor that is associated with a terminal. @end table @node Access permission tests @subsection Access permission tests @cindex access permission tests @cindex permission tests These options test for particular access permissions. @table @samp @item -g @var{file} @opindex -g @cindex set-group-ID check True if @var{file} exists and has its set-group-ID bit set. @item -k @var{file} @opindex -k @cindex sticky bit check True if @var{file} exists and has its @dfn{sticky} bit set. @item -r @var{file} @opindex -r @cindex readable file check True if @var{file} exists and read permission is granted. @item -u @var{file} @opindex -u @cindex set-user-ID check True if @var{file} exists and has its set-user-ID bit set. @item -w @var{file} @opindex -w @cindex writable file check True if @var{file} exists and write permission is granted. @item -x @var{file} @opindex -x @cindex executable file check True if @var{file} exists and execute permission is granted (or search permission, if it is a directory). @item -O @var{file} @opindex -O @cindex owned by effective user ID check True if @var{file} exists and is owned by the current effective user ID. @item -G @var{file} @opindex -G @cindex owned by effective group ID check True if @var{file} exists and is owned by the current effective group ID. @end table @node File characteristic tests @subsection File characteristic tests @cindex file characteristic tests These options test other file characteristics. @table @samp @item -e @var{file} @opindex -e @cindex existence-of-file check True if @var{file} exists. @item -s @var{file} @opindex -s @cindex nonempty file check True if @var{file} exists and has a size greater than zero. @item @var{file1} -nt @var{file2} @opindex -nt @cindex newer-than file check True if @var{file1} is newer (according to modification date) than @var{file2}, or if @var{file1} exists and @var{file2} does not. @item @var{file1} -ot @var{file2} @opindex -ot @cindex older-than file check True if @var{file1} is older (according to modification date) than @var{file2}, or if @var{file2} exists and @var{file1} does not. @item @var{file1} -ef @var{file2} @opindex -ef @cindex same file check @cindex hard link check True if @var{file1} and @var{file2} have the same device and inode numbers, i.e., if they are hard links to each other. @end table @node String tests @subsection String tests @cindex string tests These options test string characteristics. You may need to quote @var{string} arguments for the shell. For example: @example test -n "$V" @end example The quotes here prevent the wrong arguments from being passed to @command{test} if @samp{$V} is empty or contains special characters. @table @samp @item -z @var{string} @opindex -z @cindex zero-length string check True if the length of @var{string} is zero. @item -n @var{string} @itemx @var{string} @opindex -n @cindex nonzero-length string check True if the length of @var{string} is nonzero. @item @var{string1} = @var{string2} @opindex = @cindex equal string check True if the strings are equal. @item @var{string1} == @var{string2} @opindex == @cindex equal string check True if the strings are equal (synonym for =). @item @var{string1} != @var{string2} @opindex != @cindex not-equal string check True if the strings are not equal. @end table @node Numeric tests @subsection Numeric tests @cindex numeric tests @cindex arithmetic tests Numeric relational operators. The arguments must be entirely numeric (possibly negative), or the special expression @w{@code{-l @var{string}}}, which evaluates to the length of @var{string}. @table @samp @item @var{arg1} -eq @var{arg2} @itemx @var{arg1} -ne @var{arg2} @itemx @var{arg1} -lt @var{arg2} @itemx @var{arg1} -le @var{arg2} @itemx @var{arg1} -gt @var{arg2} @itemx @var{arg1} -ge @var{arg2} @opindex -eq @opindex -ne @opindex -lt @opindex -le @opindex -gt @opindex -ge These arithmetic binary operators return true if @var{arg1} is equal, not-equal, less-than, less-than-or-equal, greater-than, or greater-than-or-equal than @var{arg2}, respectively. @end table For example: @example test -1 -gt -2 && echo yes @result{} yes test -l abc -gt 1 && echo yes @result{} yes test 0x100 -eq 1 @error{} test: integer expression expected before -eq @end example @node Connectives for test @subsection Connectives for @command{test} @cindex logical connectives @cindex connectives, logical Note it's preferred to use shell logical primitives rather than these logical connectives internal to @command{test}, because an expression may become ambiguous depending on the expansion of its parameters. For example, this becomes ambiguous when @samp{$1} is set to @samp{'!'} and @samp{$2} to the empty string @samp{''}: @example test "$1" -a "$2" @end example and should be written as: @example test "$1" && test "$2" @end example Note the shell logical primitives also benefit from short circuit operation, which can be significant for file attribute tests. @table @samp @item ! @var{expr} @opindex ! True if @var{expr} is false. @samp{!} has lower precedence than all parts of @var{expr}. Note @samp{!} needs to be specified to the left of a binary expression, I.e., @samp{'!' 1 -gt 2} rather than @samp{1 '!' -gt 2}. Also @samp{!} is often a shell special character and is best used quoted. @item @var{expr1} -a @var{expr2} @opindex -a @cindex logical and operator @cindex and operator True if both @var{expr1} and @var{expr2} are true. @samp{-a} is left associative, and has a higher precedence than @samp{-o}. @item @var{expr1} -o @var{expr2} @opindex -o @cindex logical or operator @cindex or operator True if either @var{expr1} or @var{expr2} is true. @samp{-o} is left associative. @end table @node expr invocation @section @command{expr}: Evaluate expressions @pindex expr @cindex expression evaluation @cindex evaluation of expressions @command{expr} evaluates an expression and writes the result on standard output. Each token of the expression must be a separate argument. Operands are either integers or strings. Integers consist of one or more decimal digits, with an optional leading @samp{-}. @command{expr} converts anything appearing in an operand position to an integer or a string depending on the operation being applied to it. Strings are not quoted for @command{expr} itself, though you may need to quote them to protect characters with special meaning to the shell, e.g., spaces. However, regardless of whether it is quoted, a string operand should not be a parenthesis or any of @command{expr}'s operators like @code{+}, so you cannot safely pass an arbitrary string @code{$str} to expr merely by quoting it to the shell. One way to work around this is to use the GNU extension @code{+}, (e.g., @code{+ "$str" = foo}); a more portable way is to use @code{@w{" $str"}} and to adjust the rest of the expression to take the leading space into account (e.g., @code{@w{" $str" = " foo"}}). You should not pass a negative integer or a string with leading @samp{-} as @command{expr}'s first argument, as it might be misinterpreted as an option; this can be avoided by parenthesization. Also, portable scripts should not use a string operand that happens to take the form of an integer; this can be worked around by inserting leading spaces as mentioned above. @cindex parentheses for grouping Operators may be given as infix symbols or prefix keywords. Parentheses may be used for grouping in the usual manner. You must quote parentheses and many operators to avoid the shell evaluating them, however. When built with support for the GNU MP library, @command{expr} uses arbitrary-precision arithmetic; otherwise, it uses native arithmetic types and may fail due to arithmetic overflow. The only options are @option{--help} and @option{--version}. @xref{Common options}. Options must precede operands. @cindex exit status of @command{expr} Exit status: @display 0 if the expression is neither null nor 0, 1 if the expression is null or 0, 2 if the expression is invalid, 3 if an internal error occurred (e.g., arithmetic overflow). @end display @menu * String expressions:: + : match substr index length * Numeric expressions:: + - * / % * Relations for expr:: | & < <= = == != >= > * Examples of expr:: Examples. @end menu @node String expressions @subsection String expressions @cindex string expressions @cindex expressions, string @command{expr} supports pattern matching and other string operators. These have higher precedence than both the numeric and relational operators (in the next sections). @table @samp @item @var{string} : @var{regex} @cindex pattern matching @cindex regular expression matching @cindex matching patterns Perform pattern matching. The arguments are converted to strings and the second is considered to be a (basic, a la GNU @code{grep}) regular expression, with a @code{^} implicitly prepended. The first argument is then matched against this regular expression. If the match succeeds and @var{regex} uses @samp{\(} and @samp{\)}, the @code{:} expression returns the part of @var{string} that matched the subexpression; otherwise, it returns the number of characters matched. If the match fails, the @code{:} operator returns the null string if @samp{\(} and @samp{\)} are used in @var{regex}, otherwise 0. @kindex \( @r{regexp operator} Only the first @samp{\( @dots{} \)} pair is relevant to the return value; additional pairs are meaningful only for grouping the regular expression operators. @kindex \+ @r{regexp operator} @kindex \? @r{regexp operator} @kindex \| @r{regexp operator} In the regular expression, @code{\+}, @code{\?}, and @code{\|} are operators which respectively match one or more, zero or one, or separate alternatives. SunOS and other @command{expr}'s treat these as regular characters. (POSIX allows either behavior.) @xref{Top, , Regular Expression Library, regex, Regex}, for details of regular expression syntax. Some examples are in @ref{Examples of expr}. @item match @var{string} @var{regex} @findex match An alternative way to do pattern matching. This is the same as @w{@samp{@var{string} : @var{regex}}}. @item substr @var{string} @var{position} @var{length} @findex substr Returns the substring of @var{string} beginning at @var{position} with length at most @var{length}. If either @var{position} or @var{length} is negative, zero, or non-numeric, returns the null string. @item index @var{string} @var{charset} @findex index Returns the first position in @var{string} where the first character in @var{charset} was found. If no character in @var{charset} is found in @var{string}, return 0. @item length @var{string} @findex length Returns the length of @var{string}. @item + @var{token} @kindex + Interpret @var{token} as a string, even if it is a keyword like @var{match} or an operator like @code{/}. This makes it possible to test @code{expr length + "$x"} or @code{expr + "$x" : '.*/\(.\)'} and have it do the right thing even if the value of @var{$x} happens to be (for example) @code{/} or @code{index}. This operator is a GNU extension. Portable shell scripts should use @code{@w{" $token"} : @w{' \(.*\)'}} instead of @code{+ "$token"}. @end table To make @command{expr} interpret keywords as strings, you must use the @code{quote} operator. @node Numeric expressions @subsection Numeric expressions @cindex numeric expressions @cindex expressions, numeric @command{expr} supports the usual numeric operators, in order of increasing precedence. These numeric operators have lower precedence than the string operators described in the previous section, and higher precedence than the connectives (next section). @table @samp @item + - @kindex + @kindex - @cindex addition @cindex subtraction Addition and subtraction. Both arguments are converted to integers; an error occurs if this cannot be done. @item * / % @kindex * @kindex / @kindex % @cindex multiplication @cindex division @cindex remainder Multiplication, division, remainder. Both arguments are converted to integers; an error occurs if this cannot be done. @end table @node Relations for expr @subsection Relations for @command{expr} @cindex connectives, logical @cindex logical connectives @cindex relations, numeric or string @command{expr} supports the usual logical connectives and relations. These have lower precedence than the string and numeric operators (previous sections). Here is the list, lowest-precedence operator first. @table @samp @item | @kindex | @cindex logical or operator @cindex or operator Returns its first argument if that is neither null nor zero, otherwise its second argument if it is neither null nor zero, otherwise 0. It does not evaluate its second argument if its first argument is neither null nor zero. @item & @kindex & @cindex logical and operator @cindex and operator Return its first argument if neither argument is null or zero, otherwise 0. It does not evaluate its second argument if its first argument is null or zero. @item < <= = == != >= > @kindex < @kindex <= @kindex = @kindex == @kindex > @kindex >= @cindex comparison operators @vindex LC_COLLATE Compare the arguments and return 1 if the relation is true, 0 otherwise. @code{==} is a synonym for @code{=}. @command{expr} first tries to convert both arguments to integers and do a numeric comparison; if either conversion fails, it does a lexicographic comparison using the character collating sequence specified by the @env{LC_COLLATE} locale. @end table @node Examples of expr @subsection Examples of using @command{expr} @cindex examples of @command{expr} Here are a few examples, including quoting for shell metacharacters. To add 1 to the shell variable @code{foo}, in Bourne-compatible shells: @example foo=$(expr $foo + 1) @end example To print the non-directory part of the file name stored in @code{$fname}, which need not contain a @code{/}: @example expr $fname : '.*/\(.*\)' '|' $fname @end example An example showing that @code{\+} is an operator: @example expr aaa : 'a\+' @result{} 3 @end example @example expr abc : 'a\(.\)c' @result{} b expr index abcdef cz @result{} 3 expr index index a @error{} expr: syntax error expr index + index a @result{} 0 @end example @node Redirection @chapter Redirection @cindex redirection @cindex commands for redirection Unix shells commonly provide several forms of @dfn{redirection}---ways to change the input source or output destination of a command. But one useful redirection is performed by a separate command, not by the shell; it's described here. @menu * tee invocation:: Redirect output to multiple files or processes. @end menu @node tee invocation @section @command{tee}: Redirect output to multiple files or processes @pindex tee @cindex pipe fitting @cindex destinations, multiple output @cindex read from stdin and write to stdout and files The @command{tee} command copies standard input to standard output and also to any files given as arguments. This is useful when you want not only to send some data down a pipe, but also to save a copy. Synopsis: @example tee [@var{option}]@dots{} [@var{file}]@dots{} @end example If a file being written to does not already exist, it is created. If a file being written to already exists, the data it previously contained is overwritten unless the @option{-a} option is used. In previous versions of GNU coreutils (v5.3.0 - v8.23), a @var{file} of @samp{-} caused @command{tee} to send another copy of input to standard output. However, as the interleaved output was not very useful, @command{tee} now conforms to POSIX which explicitly mandates it to treat @samp{-} as a file with such name. The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @item -a @itemx --append @opindex -a @opindex --append Append standard input to the given files rather than overwriting them. @item -i @itemx --ignore-interrupts @opindex -i @opindex --ignore-interrupts Ignore interrupt signals. @item -p @itemx --output-error[=@var{mode}] @opindex -p @opindex --output-error Adjust the behavior with errors on the outputs, with the long form option supporting selection between the following @var{mode}s: @table @samp @item warn Warn on error opening or writing any output, including pipes. Writing is continued to still open files/pipes. Exit status indicates failure if any output has an error. @item warn-nopipe This is the default @var{mode} when not specified, or when the short form @option{-p} is used. Warn on error opening or writing any output, except pipes. Writing is continued to still open files/pipes. Exit status indicates failure if any non pipe output had an error. @item exit Exit on error opening or writing any output, including pipes. @item exit-nopipe Exit on error opening or writing any output, except pipes. @end table @end table The @command{tee} command is useful when you happen to be transferring a large amount of data and also want to summarize that data without reading it a second time. For example, when you are downloading a DVD image, you often want to verify its signature or checksum right away. The inefficient way to do it is simply: @example wget https://example.com/some.iso && sha1sum some.iso @end example One problem with the above is that it makes you wait for the download to complete before starting the time-consuming SHA1 computation. Perhaps even more importantly, the above requires reading the DVD image a second time (the first was from the network). The efficient way to do it is to interleave the download and SHA1 computation. Then, you'll get the checksum for free, because the entire process parallelizes so well: @example # slightly contrived, to demonstrate process substitution wget -O - https://example.com/dvd.iso \ | tee >(sha1sum > dvd.sha1) > dvd.iso @end example That makes @command{tee} write not just to the expected output file, but also to a pipe running @command{sha1sum} and saving the final checksum in a file named @file{dvd.sha1}. Note, however, that this example relies on a feature of modern shells called @dfn{process substitution} (the @samp{>(command)} syntax, above; @xref{Process Substitution,,Process Substitution, bash, The Bash Reference Manual}.), so it works with @command{zsh}, @command{bash}, and @command{ksh}, but not with @command{/bin/sh}. So if you write code like this in a shell script, be sure to start the script with @samp{#!/bin/bash}. Note also that if any of the process substitutions (or piped stdout) might exit early without consuming all the data, the @option{-p} option is needed to allow @command{tee} to continue to process the input to any remaining outputs. Since the above example writes to one file and one process, a more conventional and portable use of @command{tee} is even better: @example wget -O - https://example.com/dvd.iso \ | tee dvd.iso | sha1sum > dvd.sha1 @end example You can extend this example to make @command{tee} write to two processes, computing MD5 and SHA1 checksums in parallel. In this case, process substitution is required: @example wget -O - https://example.com/dvd.iso \ | tee >(sha1sum > dvd.sha1) \ >(md5sum > dvd.md5) \ > dvd.iso @end example This technique is also useful when you want to make a @emph{compressed} copy of the contents of a pipe. Consider a tool to graphically summarize disk usage data from @samp{du -ak}. For a large hierarchy, @samp{du -ak} can run for a long time, and can easily produce terabytes of data, so you won't want to rerun the command unnecessarily. Nor will you want to save the uncompressed output. Doing it the inefficient way, you can't even start the GUI until after you've compressed all of the @command{du} output: @example du -ak | gzip -9 > /tmp/du.gz gzip -d /tmp/du.gz | xdiskusage -a @end example With @command{tee} and process substitution, you start the GUI right away and eliminate the decompression completely: @example du -ak | tee >(gzip -9 > /tmp/du.gz) | xdiskusage -a @end example Finally, if you regularly create more than one type of compressed tarball at once, for example when @code{make dist} creates both @command{gzip}-compressed and @command{bzip2}-compressed tarballs, there may be a better way. Typical @command{automake}-generated @file{Makefile} rules create the two compressed tar archives with commands in sequence, like this (slightly simplified): @example tardir=your-pkg-M.N tar chof - "$tardir" | gzip -9 -c > your-pkg-M.N.tar.gz tar chof - "$tardir" | bzip2 -9 -c > your-pkg-M.N.tar.bz2 @end example However, if the hierarchy you are archiving and compressing is larger than a couple megabytes, and especially if you are using a multi-processor system with plenty of memory, then you can do much better by reading the directory contents only once and running the compression programs in parallel: @example tardir=your-pkg-M.N tar chof - "$tardir" \ | tee >(gzip -9 -c > your-pkg-M.N.tar.gz) \ | bzip2 -9 -c > your-pkg-M.N.tar.bz2 @end example If you want to further process the output from process substitutions, and those processes write atomically (i.e., write less than the system's PIPE_BUF size at a time), that's possible with a construct like: @example tardir=your-pkg-M.N tar chof - "$tardir" \ | tee >(md5sum --tag) > >(sha256sum --tag) \ | sort | gpg --clearsign > your-pkg-M.N.tar.sig @end example @exitstatus @node File name manipulation @chapter File name manipulation @cindex file name manipulation @cindex manipulation of file names @cindex commands for file name manipulation This section describes commands that manipulate file names. @menu * basename invocation:: Strip directory and suffix from a file name. * dirname invocation:: Strip last file name component. * pathchk invocation:: Check file name validity and portability. * mktemp invocation:: Create temporary file or directory. * realpath invocation:: Print resolved file names. @end menu @node basename invocation @section @command{basename}: Strip directory and suffix from a file name @pindex basename @cindex strip directory and suffix from file names @cindex directory, stripping from file names @cindex suffix, stripping from file names @cindex file names, stripping directory and suffix @cindex leading directory components, stripping @command{basename} removes any leading directory components from @var{name}. Synopsis: @example basename @var{name} [@var{suffix}] basename @var{option}@dots{} @var{name}@dots{} @end example If @var{suffix} is specified and is identical to the end of @var{name}, it is removed from @var{name} as well. Note that since trailing slashes are removed prior to suffix matching, @var{suffix} will do nothing if it contains slashes. @command{basename} prints the result on standard output. @c This test is used both here and in the section on dirname. @macro basenameAndDirname Together, @command{basename} and @command{dirname} are designed such that if @samp{ls "$name"} succeeds, then the command sequence @samp{cd "$(dirname "$name")"; ls "$(basename "$name")"} will, too. This works for everything except file names containing a trailing newline. @end macro @basenameAndDirname POSIX allows the implementation to define the results if @var{name} is empty or @samp{//}. In the former case, GNU @command{basename} returns the empty string. In the latter case, the result is @samp{//} on platforms where @var{//} is distinct from @var{/}, and @samp{/} on platforms where there is no difference. The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. Options must precede operands. @table @samp @item -a @itemx --multiple @opindex -a @opindex --multiple Support more than one argument. Treat every argument as a @var{name}. With this, an optional @var{suffix} must be specified using the @option{-s} option. @item -s @var{suffix} @itemx --suffix=@var{suffix} @opindex -s @opindex --suffix Remove a trailing @var{suffix}. This option implies the @option{-a} option. @optZero @end table @exitstatus Examples: @smallexample # Output "sort". basename /usr/bin/sort # Output "stdio". basename include/stdio.h .h # Output "stdio". basename -s .h include/stdio.h # Output "stdio" followed by "stdlib" basename -a -s .h include/stdio.h include/stdlib.h @end smallexample @node dirname invocation @section @command{dirname}: Strip last file name component @pindex dirname @cindex directory components, printing @cindex stripping non-directory suffix @cindex non-directory suffix, stripping @command{dirname} prints all but the final slash-delimited component of each @var{name}. Slashes on either side of the final component are also removed. If the string contains no slash, @command{dirname} prints @samp{.} (meaning the current directory). Synopsis: @example dirname [@var{option}] @var{name}@dots{} @end example @var{name} need not be a file name, but if it is, this operation effectively lists the directory that contains the final component, including the case when the final component is itself a directory. @basenameAndDirname POSIX allows the implementation to define the results if @var{name} is @samp{//}. With GNU @command{dirname}, the result is @samp{//} on platforms where @var{//} is distinct from @var{/}, and @samp{/} on platforms where there is no difference. The program accepts the following option. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @optZero @end table @exitstatus Examples: @smallexample # Output "/usr/bin". dirname /usr/bin/sort dirname /usr/bin//.// # Output "dir1" followed by "dir2" dirname dir1/str dir2/str # Output ".". dirname stdio.h @end smallexample @node pathchk invocation @section @command{pathchk}: Check file name validity and portability @pindex pathchk @cindex file names, checking validity and portability @cindex valid file names, checking for @cindex portable file names, checking for @command{pathchk} checks validity and portability of file names. Synopsis: @example pathchk [@var{option}]@dots{} @var{name}@dots{} @end example For each @var{name}, @command{pathchk} prints an error message if any of these conditions is true: @enumerate @item One of the existing directories in @var{name} does not have search (execute) permission, @item The length of @var{name} is larger than the maximum supported by the operating system. @item The length of one component of @var{name} is longer than its file system's maximum. @end enumerate A nonexistent @var{name} is not an error, so long a file with that name could be created under the above conditions. The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. Options must precede operands. @table @samp @item -p @opindex -p Instead of performing checks based on the underlying file system, print an error message if any of these conditions is true: @enumerate @item A file name is empty. @item A file name contains a character outside the POSIX portable file name character set, namely, the ASCII letters and digits, @samp{.}, @samp{_}, @samp{-}, and @samp{/}. @item The length of a file name or one of its components exceeds the POSIX minimum limits for portability. @end enumerate @item -P @opindex -P Print an error message if a file name is empty, or if it contains a component that begins with @samp{-}. @item --portability @opindex --portability Print an error message if a file name is not portable to all POSIX hosts. This option is equivalent to @samp{-p -P}. @end table @cindex exit status of @command{pathchk} Exit status: @display 0 if all specified file names passed all checks, 1 otherwise. @end display @node mktemp invocation @section @command{mktemp}: Create temporary file or directory @pindex mktemp @cindex file names, creating temporary @cindex directory, creating temporary @cindex temporary files and directories @command{mktemp} manages the creation of temporary files and directories. Synopsis: @example mktemp [@var{option}]@dots{} [@var{template}] @end example Safely create a temporary file or directory based on @var{template}, and print its name. If given, @var{template} must include at least three consecutive @samp{X}s in the last component. If omitted, the template @samp{tmp.XXXXXXXXXX} is used, and option @option{--tmpdir} is implied. The final run of @samp{X}s in the @var{template} will be replaced by alpha-numeric characters; thus, on a case-sensitive file system, and with a @var{template} including a run of @var{n} instances of @samp{X}, there are @samp{62**@var{n}} potential file names. Older scripts used to create temporary files by simply joining the name of the program with the process id (@samp{$$}) as a suffix. However, that naming scheme is easily predictable, and suffers from a race condition where the attacker can create an appropriately named symbolic link, such that when the script then opens a handle to what it thought was an unused file, it is instead modifying an existing file. Using the same scheme to create a directory is slightly safer, since the @command{mkdir} will fail if the target already exists, but it is still inferior because it allows for denial of service attacks. Therefore, modern scripts should use the @command{mktemp} command to guarantee that the generated name will be unpredictable, and that knowledge of the temporary file name implies that the file was created by the current script and cannot be modified by other users. When creating a file, the resulting file has read and write permissions for the current user, but no permissions for the group or others; these permissions are reduced if the current umask is more restrictive. Here are some examples (although note that if you repeat them, you will most likely get different file names): @itemize @bullet @item Create a temporary file in the current directory. @example $ mktemp file.XXXX file.H47c @end example @item Create a temporary file with a known suffix. @example $ mktemp --suffix=.txt file-XXXX file-H08W.txt $ mktemp file-XXXX-XXXX.txt file-XXXX-eI9L.txt @end example @item Create a secure fifo relative to the user's choice of @env{TMPDIR}, but falling back to the current directory rather than @file{/tmp}. Note that @command{mktemp} does not create fifos, but can create a secure directory in which the fifo can live. Exit the shell if the directory or fifo could not be created. @example $ dir=$(mktemp -p "$@{TMPDIR:-.@}" -d dir-XXXX) || exit 1 $ fifo=$dir/fifo $ mkfifo "$fifo" || @{ rmdir "$dir"; exit 1; @} @end example @item Create and use a temporary file if possible, but ignore failure. The file will reside in the directory named by @env{TMPDIR}, if specified, or else in @file{/tmp}. @example $ file=$(mktemp -q) && @{ > # Safe to use $file only within this block. Use quotes, > # since $TMPDIR, and thus $file, may contain whitespace. > echo ... > "$file" > rm "$file" > @} @end example @item Act as a semi-random character generator (it is not fully random, since it is impacted by the contents of the current directory). To avoid security holes, do not use the resulting names to create a file. @example $ mktemp -u XXX Gb9 $ mktemp -u XXX nzC @end example @end itemize The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @item -d @itemx --directory @opindex -d @opindex --directory Create a directory rather than a file. The directory will have read, write, and search permissions for the current user, but no permissions for the group or others; these permissions are reduced if the current umask is more restrictive. @item -q @itemx --quiet @opindex -q @opindex --quiet Suppress diagnostics about failure to create a file or directory. The exit status will still reflect whether a file was created. @item -u @itemx --dry-run @opindex -u @opindex --dry-run Generate a temporary name that does not name an existing file, without changing the file system contents. Using the output of this command to create a new file is inherently unsafe, as there is a window of time between generating the name and using it where another process can create an object by the same name. @item -p @var{dir} @itemx --tmpdir[=@var{dir}] @opindex -p @opindex --tmpdir Treat @var{template} relative to the directory @var{dir}. If @var{dir} is not specified (only possible with the long option @option{--tmpdir}) or is the empty string, use the value of @env{TMPDIR} if available, otherwise use @samp{/tmp}. If this is specified, @var{template} must not be absolute. However, @var{template} can still contain slashes, although intermediate directories must already exist. @item --suffix=@var{suffix} @opindex --suffix Append @var{suffix} to the @var{template}. @var{suffix} must not contain slash. If @option{--suffix} is specified, @var{template} must end in @samp{X}; if it is not specified, then an appropriate @option{--suffix} is inferred by finding the last @samp{X} in @var{template}. This option exists for use with the default @var{template} and for the creation of a @var{suffix} that starts with @samp{X}. @item -t @opindex -t Treat @var{template} as a single file relative to the value of @env{TMPDIR} if available, or to the directory specified by @option{-p}, otherwise to @samp{/tmp}. @var{template} must not contain slashes. This option is deprecated; the use of @option{-p} without @option{-t} offers better defaults (by favoring the command line over @env{TMPDIR}) and more flexibility (by allowing intermediate directories). @end table @cindex exit status of @command{mktemp} Exit status: @display 0 if the file was created, 1 otherwise. @end display @node realpath invocation @section @command{realpath}: Print the resolved file name. @pindex realpath @cindex file names, canonicalization @cindex symlinks, resolution @cindex canonical file name @cindex canonicalize a file name @pindex realpath @findex realpath @command{realpath} expands all symbolic links and resolves references to @samp{/./}, @samp{/../} and extra @samp{/} characters. By default, all but the last component of the specified files must exist. Synopsis: @example realpath [@var{option}]@dots{} @var{file}@dots{} @end example The file name canonicalization functionality overlaps with that of the @command{readlink} command. This is the preferred command for canonicalization as it's a more suitable and standard name. In addition this command supports relative file name processing functionality. The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @item -e @itemx --canonicalize-existing @opindex -e @opindex --canonicalize-existing Ensure that all components of the specified file names exist. If any component is missing or unavailable, @command{realpath} will output a diagnostic unless the @option{-q} option is specified, and exit with a nonzero exit code. A trailing slash requires that the name resolve to a directory. @item -m @itemx --canonicalize-missing @opindex -m @opindex --canonicalize-missing If any component of a specified file name is missing or unavailable, treat it as a directory. @item -L @itemx --logical @opindex -L @opindex --logical Symbolic links are resolved in the specified file names, but they are resolved after any subsequent @samp{..} components are processed. @item -P @itemx --physical @opindex -P @opindex --physical Symbolic links are resolved in the specified file names, and they are resolved before any subsequent @samp{..} components are processed. This is the default mode of operation. @item -q @itemx --quiet @opindex -q @opindex --quiet Suppress diagnostic messages for specified file names. @item --relative-to=@var{file} @opindex --relative-to @cindex relpath Print the resolved file names relative to the specified file. Note this option honors the @option{-m} and @option{-e} options pertaining to file existence. @item --relative-base=@var{base} @opindex --relative-base This option is valid when used with @option{--relative-to}, and will restrict the output of @option{--relative-to} so that relative names are output, only when @var{file}s are descendants of @var{base}. Otherwise output the absolute file name. If @option{--relative-to} was not specified, then the descendants of @var{base} are printed relative to @var{base}. If @option{--relative-to} is specified, then that directory must be a descendant of @var{base} for this option to have an effect. Note: this option honors the @option{-m} and @option{-e} options pertaining to file existence. For example: @example realpath --relative-to=/usr /tmp /usr/bin @result{} ../tmp @result{} bin realpath --relative-base=/usr /tmp /usr/bin @result{} /tmp @result{} bin @end example @item -s @itemx --strip @itemx --no-symlinks @opindex -s @opindex --strip @opindex --no-symlinks Do not resolve symbolic links. Only resolve references to @samp{/./}, @samp{/../} and remove extra @samp{/} characters. When combined with the @option{-m} option, realpath operates only on the file name, and does not touch any actual file. @optZero @end table @cindex exit status of @command{realpath} Exit status: @display 0 if all file names were printed without issue. 1 otherwise. @end display @node Working context @chapter Working context @cindex working context @cindex commands for printing the working context This section describes commands that display or alter the context in which you are working: the current directory, the terminal settings, and so forth. See also the user-related commands in the next section. @menu * pwd invocation:: Print working directory. * stty invocation:: Print or change terminal characteristics. * printenv invocation:: Print environment variables. * tty invocation:: Print file name of terminal on standard input. @end menu @node pwd invocation @section @command{pwd}: Print working directory @pindex pwd @cindex print name of current directory @cindex current working directory, printing @cindex working directory, printing @command{pwd} prints the name of the current directory. Synopsis: @example pwd [@var{option}]@dots{} @end example The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @item -L @itemx --logical @opindex -L @opindex --logical If the contents of the environment variable @env{PWD} provide an absolute name of the current directory with no @samp{.} or @samp{..} components, but possibly with symbolic links, then output those contents. Otherwise, fall back to default @option{-P} handling. @item -P @itemx --physical @opindex -P @opindex --physical Print a fully resolved name for the current directory. That is, all components of the printed name will be actual directory names---none will be symbolic links. @end table @cindex symbolic links and @command{pwd} If @option{-L} and @option{-P} are both given, the last one takes precedence. If neither option is given, then this implementation uses @option{-P} as the default unless the @env{POSIXLY_CORRECT} environment variable is set. @mayConflictWithShellBuiltIn{pwd} @exitstatus @node stty invocation @section @command{stty}: Print or change terminal characteristics @pindex stty @cindex change or print terminal settings @cindex terminal settings @cindex line settings of terminal @command{stty} prints or changes terminal characteristics, such as baud rate. Synopses: @example stty [@var{option}] [@var{setting}]@dots{} stty [@var{option}] @end example If given no line settings, @command{stty} prints the baud rate, line discipline number (on systems that support it), and line settings that have been changed from the values set by @samp{stty sane}. By default, mode reading and setting are performed on the tty line connected to standard input, although this can be modified by the @option{--file} option. @command{stty} accepts many non-option arguments that change aspects of the terminal line operation, as described below. The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @item -a @itemx --all @opindex -a @opindex --all Print all current settings in human-readable form. This option may not be used in combination with any line settings. @item -F @var{device} @itemx --file=@var{device} @opindex -F @opindex --file Set the line opened by the file name specified in @var{device} instead of the tty line connected to standard input. This option is necessary because opening a POSIX tty requires use of the @code{O_NONDELAY} flag to prevent a POSIX tty from blocking until the carrier detect line is high if the @code{clocal} flag is not set. Hence, it is not always possible to allow the shell to open the device in the traditional manner. @item -g @itemx --save @opindex -g @opindex --save @cindex machine-readable @command{stty} output Print all current settings in a form that can be used as an argument to another @command{stty} command to restore the current settings. This option may not be used in combination with any line settings. @end table Many settings can be turned off by preceding them with a @samp{-}. Such arguments are marked below with ``May be negated'' in their description. The descriptions themselves refer to the positive case, that is, when @emph{not} negated (unless stated otherwise, of course). Some settings are not available on all POSIX systems, since they use extensions. Such arguments are marked below with ``Non-POSIX'' in their description. On non-POSIX systems, those or other settings also may not be available, but it's not feasible to document all the variations: just try it and see. @command{stty} is installed only on platforms with the POSIX terminal interface, so portable scripts should not rely on its existence on non-POSIX platforms. @exitstatus @menu * Control:: Control settings * Input:: Input settings * Output:: Output settings * Local:: Local settings * Combination:: Combination settings * Characters:: Special characters * Special:: Special settings @end menu @node Control @subsection Control settings @cindex control settings Control settings: @table @samp @item parenb @opindex parenb @cindex two-way parity Generate parity bit in output and expect parity bit in input. May be negated. @item parodd @opindex parodd @cindex odd parity @cindex even parity Set odd parity (even if negated). May be negated. @item cmspar @opindex cmspar @cindex constant parity @cindex stick parity @cindex mark parity @cindex space parity Use "stick" (mark/space) parity. If parodd is set, the parity bit is always 1; if parodd is not set, the parity bit is always zero. Non-POSIX@. May be negated. @item cs5 @itemx cs6 @itemx cs7 @itemx cs8 @opindex cs@var{n} @cindex character size @cindex eight-bit characters Set character size to 5, 6, 7, or 8 bits. @item hup @itemx hupcl @opindex hup[cl] Send a hangup signal when the last process closes the tty. May be negated. @item cstopb @opindex cstopb @cindex stop bits Use two stop bits per character (one if negated). May be negated. @item cread @opindex cread Allow input to be received. May be negated. @item clocal @opindex clocal @cindex modem control Disable modem control signals. May be negated. @item crtscts @opindex crtscts @cindex hardware flow control @cindex flow control, hardware @cindex RTS/CTS flow control Enable RTS/CTS flow control. Non-POSIX@. May be negated. @item cdtrdsr @opindex cdtrdsr @cindex hardware flow control @cindex flow control, hardware @cindex DTR/DSR flow control Enable DTR/DSR flow control. Non-POSIX@. May be negated. @end table @node Input @subsection Input settings @cindex input settings These settings control operations on data received from the terminal. @table @samp @item ignbrk @opindex ignbrk @cindex breaks, ignoring Ignore break characters. May be negated. @item brkint @opindex brkint @cindex breaks, cause interrupts Make breaks cause an interrupt signal. May be negated. @item ignpar @opindex ignpar @cindex parity, ignoring Ignore characters with parity errors. May be negated. @item parmrk @opindex parmrk @cindex parity errors, marking Mark parity errors (with a 255-0-character sequence). May be negated. @item inpck @opindex inpck Enable input parity checking. May be negated. @item istrip @opindex istrip @cindex eight-bit input Clear high (8th) bit of input characters. May be negated. @item inlcr @opindex inlcr @cindex newline, translating to return Translate newline to carriage return. May be negated. @item igncr @opindex igncr @cindex return, ignoring Ignore carriage return. May be negated. @item icrnl @opindex icrnl @cindex return, translating to newline Translate carriage return to newline. May be negated. @item iutf8 @opindex iutf8 @cindex input encoding, UTF-8 Assume input characters are UTF-8 encoded. May be negated. @item ixon @opindex ixon @kindex C-s/C-q flow control @cindex XON/XOFF flow control Enable XON/XOFF flow control (that is, @kbd{Ctrl-S}/@kbd{Ctrl-Q}). May be negated. @item ixoff @itemx tandem @opindex ixoff @opindex tandem @cindex software flow control @cindex flow control, software Enable sending of @code{stop} character when the system input buffer is almost full, and @code{start} character when it becomes almost empty again. May be negated. @item iuclc @opindex iuclc @cindex uppercase, translating to lowercase Translate uppercase characters to lowercase. Non-POSIX@. May be negated. Note ilcuc is not implemented, as one would not be able to issue almost any (lowercase) Unix command, after invoking it. @item ixany @opindex ixany Allow any character to restart output (only the start character if negated). Non-POSIX@. May be negated. @item imaxbel @opindex imaxbel @cindex beeping at input buffer full Enable beeping and not flushing input buffer if a character arrives when the input buffer is full. Non-POSIX@. May be negated. @end table @node Output @subsection Output settings @cindex output settings These settings control operations on data sent to the terminal. @table @samp @item opost @opindex opost Postprocess output. May be negated. @item olcuc @opindex olcuc @cindex lowercase, translating to output Translate lowercase characters to uppercase. Non-POSIX@. May be negated. (Note ouclc is not currently implemented.) @item ocrnl @opindex ocrnl @cindex return, translating to newline Translate carriage return to newline. Non-POSIX@. May be negated. @item onlcr @opindex onlcr @cindex newline, translating to crlf Translate newline to carriage return-newline. Non-POSIX@. May be negated. @item onocr @opindex onocr Do not print carriage returns in the first column. Non-POSIX@. May be negated. @item onlret @opindex onlret Newline performs a carriage return. Non-POSIX@. May be negated. @item ofill @opindex ofill @cindex pad instead of timing for delaying Use fill (padding) characters instead of timing for delays. Non-POSIX@. May be negated. @item ofdel @opindex ofdel @cindex pad character Use ASCII DEL characters for fill instead of ASCII NUL characters. Non-POSIX@. May be negated. @item nl1 @itemx nl0 @opindex nl@var{n} Newline delay style. Non-POSIX. @item cr3 @itemx cr2 @itemx cr1 @itemx cr0 @opindex cr@var{n} Carriage return delay style. Non-POSIX. @item tab3 @itemx tab2 @itemx tab1 @itemx tab0 @opindex tab@var{n} Horizontal tab delay style. Non-POSIX. @item bs1 @itemx bs0 @opindex bs@var{n} Backspace delay style. Non-POSIX. @item vt1 @itemx vt0 @opindex vt@var{n} Vertical tab delay style. Non-POSIX. @item ff1 @itemx ff0 @opindex ff@var{n} Form feed delay style. Non-POSIX. @end table @node Local @subsection Local settings @cindex local settings @table @samp @item isig @opindex isig Enable @code{interrupt}, @code{quit}, and @code{suspend} special characters. May be negated. @item icanon @opindex icanon Enable @code{erase}, @code{kill}, @code{werase}, and @code{rprnt} special characters. May be negated. @item iexten @opindex iexten Enable non-POSIX special characters. May be negated. @item echo @opindex echo Echo input characters. May be negated. @item echoe @itemx crterase @opindex echoe @opindex crterase Echo @code{erase} characters as backspace-space-backspace. May be negated. @item echok @opindex echok @cindex newline echoing after @code{kill} Echo a newline after a @code{kill} character. May be negated. @item echonl @opindex echonl @cindex newline, echoing Echo newline even if not echoing other characters. May be negated. @item noflsh @opindex noflsh @cindex flushing, disabling Disable flushing after @code{interrupt} and @code{quit} special characters. May be negated. @item xcase @opindex xcase @cindex case translation Enable input and output of uppercase characters by preceding their lowercase equivalents with @samp{\}, when @code{icanon} is set. Non-POSIX@. May be negated. @item tostop @opindex tostop @cindex background jobs, stopping at terminal write Stop background jobs that try to write to the terminal. Non-POSIX@. May be negated. @item echoprt @itemx prterase @opindex echoprt @opindex prterase Echo erased characters backward, between @samp{\} and @samp{/}. Non-POSIX@. May be negated. @item echoctl @itemx ctlecho @opindex echoctl @opindex ctlecho @cindex control characters, using @samp{^@var{c}} @cindex hat notation for control characters Echo control characters in hat notation (@samp{^@var{c}}) instead of literally. Non-POSIX@. May be negated. @item echoke @itemx crtkill @opindex echoke @opindex crtkill Echo the @code{kill} special character by erasing each character on the line as indicated by the @code{echoprt} and @code{echoe} settings, instead of by the @code{echoctl} and @code{echok} settings. Non-POSIX@. May be negated. @item extproc @opindex extproc Enable @samp{LINEMODE}, which is used to avoid echoing each character over high latency links. See also @uref{https://tools.ietf.org/search/rfc1116, Internet RFC 1116}. Non-POSIX@. May be negated. @item flusho @opindex flusho Discard output. Note this setting is currently ignored on GNU/Linux systems. Non-POSIX@. May be negated. @end table @node Combination @subsection Combination settings @cindex combination settings Combination settings: @table @samp @item evenp @opindex evenp @itemx parity @opindex parity Same as @code{parenb -parodd cs7}. May be negated. If negated, same as @code{-parenb cs8}. @item oddp @opindex oddp Same as @code{parenb parodd cs7}. May be negated. If negated, same as @code{-parenb cs8}. @item nl @opindex nl Same as @code{-icrnl -onlcr}. May be negated. If negated, same as @code{icrnl -inlcr -igncr onlcr -ocrnl -onlret}. @item ek @opindex ek Reset the @code{erase} and @code{kill} special characters to their default values. @item sane @opindex sane Same as: @c This is too long to write inline. @example cread -ignbrk brkint -inlcr -igncr icrnl icanon iexten echo echoe echok -echonl -noflsh -ixoff -iutf8 -iuclc -ixany imaxbel -xcase -olcuc -ocrnl opost -ofill onlcr -onocr -onlret nl0 cr0 tab0 bs0 vt0 ff0 isig -tostop -ofdel -echoprt echoctl echoke -extproc @end example @noindent and also sets all special characters to their default values. @item cooked @opindex cooked Same as @code{brkint ignpar istrip icrnl ixon opost isig icanon}, plus sets the @code{eof} and @code{eol} characters to their default values if they are the same as the @code{min} and @code{time} characters. May be negated. If negated, same as @code{raw}. @item raw @opindex raw Same as: @example -ignbrk -brkint -ignpar -parmrk -inpck -istrip -inlcr -igncr -icrnl -ixon -ixoff -icanon -opost -isig -iuclc -ixany -imaxbel -xcase min 1 time 0 @end example @noindent May be negated. If negated, same as @code{cooked}. @item cbreak @opindex cbreak Same as @option{-icanon}. May be negated. If negated, same as @code{icanon}. @item pass8 @opindex pass8 @cindex eight-bit characters Same as @code{-parenb -istrip cs8}. May be negated. If negated, same as @code{parenb istrip cs7}. @item litout @opindex litout Same as @option{-parenb -istrip -opost cs8}. May be negated. If negated, same as @code{parenb istrip opost cs7}. @item decctlq @opindex decctlq Same as @option{-ixany}. Non-POSIX@. May be negated. @item tabs @opindex tabs Same as @code{tab0}. Non-POSIX@. May be negated. If negated, same as @code{tab3}. @item lcase @itemx LCASE @opindex lcase @opindex LCASE Same as @code{xcase iuclc olcuc}. Non-POSIX@. May be negated. (Used for terminals with uppercase characters only.) @item crt @opindex crt Same as @code{echoe echoctl echoke}. @item dec @opindex dec Same as @code{echoe echoctl echoke -ixany intr ^C erase ^? kill C-u}. @end table @node Characters @subsection Special characters @cindex special characters @cindex characters, special The special characters' default values vary from system to system. They are set with the syntax @samp{name value}, where the names are listed below and the value can be given either literally, in hat notation (@samp{^@var{c}}), or as an integer which may start with @samp{0x} to indicate hexadecimal, @samp{0} to indicate octal, or any other digit to indicate decimal. @cindex disabling special characters @kindex u@r{, and disabling special characters} For GNU stty, giving a value of @code{^-} or @code{undef} disables that special character. (This is incompatible with Ultrix @command{stty}, which uses a value of @samp{u} to disable a special character. GNU @command{stty} treats a value @samp{u} like any other, namely to set that special character to @key{U}.) @table @samp @item intr @opindex intr Send an interrupt signal. @item quit @opindex quit Send a quit signal. @item erase @opindex erase Erase the last character typed. @item kill @opindex kill Erase the current line. @item eof @opindex eof Send an end of file (terminate the input). @item eol @opindex eol End the line. @item eol2 @opindex eol2 Alternate character to end the line. Non-POSIX. @item discard @opindex discard @opindex flush Alternate character to toggle discarding of output. Non-POSIX. @item swtch @opindex swtch Switch to a different shell layer. Non-POSIX. @item status @opindex status Send an info signal. Not currently supported on Linux. Non-POSIX. @item start @opindex start Restart the output after stopping it. @item stop @opindex stop Stop the output. @item susp @opindex susp Send a terminal stop signal. @item dsusp @opindex dsusp Send a terminal stop signal after flushing the input. Non-POSIX. @item rprnt @opindex rprnt Redraw the current line. Non-POSIX. @item werase @opindex werase Erase the last word typed. Non-POSIX. @item lnext @opindex lnext Enter the next character typed literally, even if it is a special character. Non-POSIX. @end table @node Special @subsection Special settings @cindex special settings @table @samp @item min @var{n} @opindex min Set the minimum number of characters that will satisfy a read until the time value has expired, when @option{-icanon} is set. @item time @var{n} @opindex time Set the number of tenths of a second before reads time out if the minimum number of characters have not been read, when @option{-icanon} is set. @item ispeed @var{n} @opindex ispeed Set the input speed to @var{n}. @item ospeed @var{n} @opindex ospeed Set the output speed to @var{n}. @item rows @var{n} @opindex rows Tell the tty kernel driver that the terminal has @var{n} rows. Non-POSIX. @item cols @var{n} @itemx columns @var{n} @opindex cols @opindex columns Tell the kernel that the terminal has @var{n} columns. Non-POSIX. @item drain @opindex drain @cindex nonblocking @command{stty} setting Apply settings after first waiting for pending output to be transmitted. This is enabled by default for GNU @command{stty}. It is useful to disable this option in cases where the system may be in a state where serial transmission is not possible. For example, if the system has received the @samp{DC3} character with @code{ixon} (software flow control) enabled, then @command{stty} would block without @code{-drain} being specified. May be negated. Non-POSIX. @item size @opindex size @vindex LINES @vindex COLUMNS Print the number of rows and columns that the kernel thinks the terminal has. (Systems that don't support rows and columns in the kernel typically use the environment variables @env{LINES} and @env{COLUMNS} instead; however, GNU @command{stty} does not know anything about them.) Non-POSIX. @item line @var{n} @opindex line Use line discipline @var{n}. Non-POSIX. @item speed @opindex speed Print the terminal speed. @item @var{n} @cindex baud rate, setting Set the input and output speeds to @var{n}. @var{n} can be one of: 0 50 75 110 134 134.5 150 200 300 600 1200 1800 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 @code{exta} @code{extb}. @code{exta} is the same as 19200; @code{extb} is the same as 38400. Many systems, including GNU/Linux, support higher speeds. The @command{stty} command includes support for speeds of 57600, 115200, 230400, 460800, 500000, 576000, 921600, 1000000, 1152000, 1500000, 2000000, 2500000, 3000000, 3500000, or 4000000 where the system supports these. 0 hangs up the line if @option{-clocal} is set. @end table @node printenv invocation @section @command{printenv}: Print all or some environment variables @pindex printenv @cindex printing all or some environment variables @cindex environment variables, printing @command{printenv} prints environment variable values. Synopsis: @example printenv [@var{option}] [@var{variable}]@dots{} @end example If no @var{variable}s are specified, @command{printenv} prints the value of every environment variable. Otherwise, it prints the value of each @var{variable} that is set, and nothing for those that are not set. The program accepts the following option. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @optNull @end table @cindex exit status of @command{printenv} Exit status: @display 0 if all variables specified were found 1 if at least one specified variable was not found 2 if a write error occurred @end display @node tty invocation @section @command{tty}: Print file name of terminal on standard input @pindex tty @cindex print terminal file name @cindex terminal file name, printing @command{tty} prints the file name of the terminal connected to its standard input. It prints @samp{not a tty} if standard input is not a terminal. Synopsis: @example tty [@var{option}]@dots{} @end example The program accepts the following option. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @item -s @itemx --silent @itemx --quiet @opindex -s @opindex --silent @opindex --quiet Print nothing; only return an exit status. @end table @cindex exit status of @command{tty} Exit status: @display 0 if standard input is a terminal 1 if standard input is not a terminal 2 if given incorrect arguments 3 if a write error occurs @end display @node User information @chapter User information @cindex user information, commands for @cindex commands for printing user information This section describes commands that print user-related information: logins, groups, and so forth. @menu * id invocation:: Print user identity. * logname invocation:: Print current login name. * whoami invocation:: Print effective user ID. * groups invocation:: Print group names a user is in. * users invocation:: Print login names of users currently logged in. * who invocation:: Print who is currently logged in. @end menu @node id invocation @section @command{id}: Print user identity @pindex id @cindex real user and group IDs, printing @cindex effective user and group IDs, printing @cindex printing real and effective user and group IDs @command{id} prints information about the given user, or the process running it if no user is specified. Synopsis: @example id [@var{option}]@dots{} [@var{user}] @end example @var{user} can be either a user ID or a name, with name look-up taking precedence unless the ID is specified with a leading @samp{+}. @xref{Disambiguating names and IDs}. @vindex POSIXLY_CORRECT By default, it prints the real user ID, real group ID, effective user ID if different from the real user ID, effective group ID if different from the real group ID, and supplemental group IDs. In addition, if SELinux is enabled and the @env{POSIXLY_CORRECT} environment variable is not set, then print @samp{context=@var{c}}, where @var{c} is the security context. Each of these numeric values is preceded by an identifying string and followed by the corresponding user or group name in parentheses. The options cause @command{id} to print only part of the above information. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @item -g @itemx --group @opindex -g @opindex --group Print only the group ID. @item -G @itemx --groups @opindex -G @opindex --groups Print only the group ID and the supplementary groups. @item -n @itemx --name @opindex -n @opindex --name Print the user or group name instead of the ID number. Requires @option{-u}, @option{-g}, or @option{-G}. @item -r @itemx --real @opindex -r @opindex --real Print the real, instead of effective, user or group ID@. Requires @option{-u}, @option{-g}, or @option{-G}. @item -u @itemx --user @opindex -u @opindex --user Print only the user ID. @item -Z @itemx --context @opindex -Z @opindex --context @cindex SELinux @cindex security context Print only the security context of the process, which is generally the user's security context inherited from the parent process. If neither SELinux or SMACK is enabled then print a warning and set the exit status to 1. @item -z @itemx --zero @opindex -z @opindex --zero Delimit output items with NUL characters. This option is not permitted when using the default format. Example: @example $ id -Gn --zero users devs @end example @end table @macro primaryAndSupplementaryGroups{cmd,arg} Primary and supplementary groups for a process are normally inherited from its parent and are usually unchanged since login. This means that if you change the group database after logging in, @command{\cmd\} will not reflect your changes within your existing login session. Running @command{\cmd\} with a \arg\ causes the user and group database to be consulted afresh, and so will give a different result. @end macro @primaryAndSupplementaryGroups{id,user argument} @exitstatus @node logname invocation @section @command{logname}: Print current login name @pindex logname @cindex printing user's login name @cindex login name, printing @cindex user name, printing @flindex utmp @command{logname} prints the calling user's name, as found in a system-maintained file (often @file{/var/run/utmp} or @file{/etc/utmp}), and exits with a status of 0. If there is no entry for the calling process, @command{logname} prints an error message and exits with a status of 1. The only options are @option{--help} and @option{--version}. @xref{Common options}. @exitstatus @node whoami invocation @section @command{whoami}: Print effective user ID @pindex whoami @cindex effective user ID, printing @cindex printing the effective user ID @command{whoami} prints the user name associated with the current effective user ID@. It is equivalent to the command @samp{id -un}. The only options are @option{--help} and @option{--version}. @xref{Common options}. @exitstatus @node groups invocation @section @command{groups}: Print group names a user is in @pindex groups @cindex printing groups a user is in @cindex supplementary groups, printing @command{groups} prints the names of the primary and any supplementary groups for each given @var{username}, or the current process if no names are given. If more than one name is given, the name of each user is printed before the list of that user's groups and the user name is separated from the group list by a colon. Synopsis: @example groups [@var{username}]@dots{} @end example The group lists are equivalent to the output of the command @samp{id -Gn}. The only options are @option{--help} and @option{--version}. @xref{Common options}. @primaryAndSupplementaryGroups{groups,list of users} @exitstatus @node users invocation @section @command{users}: Print login names of users currently logged in @pindex users @cindex printing current usernames @cindex usernames, printing current @cindex login sessions, printing users with @command{users} prints on a single line a blank-separated list of user names of users currently logged in to the current host. Each user name corresponds to a login session, so if a user has more than one login session, that user's name will appear the same number of times in the output. Synopsis: @example users [@var{file}] @end example @flindex utmp @flindex wtmp With no @var{file} argument, @command{users} extracts its information from a system-maintained file (often @file{/var/run/utmp} or @file{/etc/utmp}). If a file argument is given, @command{users} uses that file instead. A common choice is @file{/var/log/wtmp}. The only options are @option{--help} and @option{--version}. @xref{Common options}. The @command{users} command is installed only on platforms with the POSIX @code{} include file or equivalent, so portable scripts should not rely on its existence on non-POSIX platforms. @exitstatus @node who invocation @section @command{who}: Print who is currently logged in @pindex who @cindex printing current user information @cindex information, about current users @command{who} prints information about users who are currently logged on. Synopsis: @example @command{who} [@var{option}] [@var{file}] [am i] @end example @cindex terminal lines, currently used @cindex login time @cindex remote hostname If given no non-option arguments, @command{who} prints the following information for each user currently logged on: login name, terminal line, login time, and remote hostname or X display. @flindex utmp @flindex wtmp If given one non-option argument, @command{who} uses that instead of a default system-maintained file (often @file{/var/run/utmp} or @file{/etc/utmp}) as the name of the file containing the record of users logged on. @file{/var/log/wtmp} is commonly given as an argument to @command{who} to look at who has previously logged on. @opindex am i @opindex who am i If given two non-option arguments, @command{who} prints only the entry for the user running it (determined from its standard input), preceded by the hostname. Traditionally, the two arguments given are @samp{am i}, as in @samp{who am i}. @vindex TZ Timestamps are listed according to the time zone rules specified by the @env{TZ} environment variable, or by the system default rules if @env{TZ} is not set. @xref{TZ Variable,, Specifying the Time Zone with @env{TZ}, libc, The GNU C Library Reference Manual}. The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @item -a @itemx --all @opindex -a @opindex --all Same as @samp{-b -d --login -p -r -t -T -u}. @item -b @itemx --boot @opindex -b @opindex --boot Print the date and time of last system boot. @item -d @itemx --dead @opindex -d @opindex --dead Print information corresponding to dead processes. @item -H @itemx --heading @opindex -H @opindex --heading Print a line of column headings. @item -l @itemx --login @opindex -l @opindex --login List only the entries that correspond to processes via which the system is waiting for a user to login. The user name is always @samp{LOGIN}. @item --lookup @opindex --lookup Attempt to canonicalize hostnames found in utmp through a DNS lookup. This is not the default because it can cause significant delays on systems with automatic dial-up internet access. @item -m @opindex -m Same as @samp{who am i}. @item -p @itemx --process @opindex -p @opindex --process List active processes spawned by init. @item -q @itemx --count @opindex -q @opindex --count Print only the login names and the number of users logged on. Overrides all other options. @item -r @itemx --runlevel @opindex -r @opindex --runlevel Print the current (and maybe previous) run-level of the init process. @item -s @opindex -s Ignored; for compatibility with other versions of @command{who}. @item -t @itemx --time @opindex -t @opindex --time Print last system clock change. @item -u @opindex -u @cindex idle time After the login time, print the number of hours and minutes that the user has been idle. @samp{.} means the user was active in the last minute. @samp{old} means the user has been idle for more than 24 hours. @item -w @itemx -T @itemx --mesg @itemx --message @itemx --writable @opindex -w @opindex -T @opindex --mesg @opindex --message @opindex --writable @cindex message status @pindex write@r{, allowed} After each login name print a character indicating the user's message status: @display @samp{+} allowing @code{write} messages @samp{-} disallowing @code{write} messages @samp{?} cannot find terminal device @end display @end table The @command{who} command is installed only on platforms with the POSIX @code{} include file or equivalent, so portable scripts should not rely on its existence on non-POSIX platforms. @exitstatus @node System context @chapter System context @cindex system context @cindex context, system @cindex commands for system context This section describes commands that print or change system-wide information. @menu * date invocation:: Print or set system date and time. * arch invocation:: Print machine hardware name. * nproc invocation:: Print the number of processors. * uname invocation:: Print system information. * hostname invocation:: Print or set system name. * hostid invocation:: Print numeric host identifier. * uptime invocation:: Print system uptime and load. @end menu @node date invocation @section @command{date}: Print or set system date and time @pindex date @cindex time, printing or setting @cindex printing the current time Synopses: @example date [@var{option}]@dots{} [+@var{format}] date [-u|--utc|--universal] @c this avoids a newline in the output [ MMDDhhmm[[CC]YY][.ss] ] @end example @vindex LC_TIME Invoking @command{date} with no @var{format} argument is equivalent to invoking it with a default format that depends on the @env{LC_TIME} locale category. In the default C locale, this format is @samp{'+%a %b %e %H:%M:%S %Z %Y'}, so the output looks like @samp{Thu Mar @ 3 13:47:51 PST 2005}. @vindex TZ Normally, @command{date} uses the time zone rules indicated by the @env{TZ} environment variable, or the system default rules if @env{TZ} is not set. @xref{TZ Variable,, Specifying the Time Zone with @env{TZ}, libc, The GNU C Library Reference Manual}. @findex strftime @r{and @command{date}} @cindex time formats @cindex formatting times If given an argument that starts with a @samp{+}, @command{date} prints the current date and time (or the date and time specified by the @option{--date} option, see below) in the format defined by that argument, which is similar to that of the @code{strftime} function. Except for conversion specifiers, which start with @samp{%}, characters in the format string are printed unchanged. The conversion specifiers are described below. @exitstatus @menu * Time conversion specifiers:: %[HIklMNpPrRsSTXzZ] * Date conversion specifiers:: %[aAbBcCdDeFgGhjmuUVwWxyY] * Literal conversion specifiers:: %[%nt] * Padding and other flags:: Pad with zeros, spaces, etc. * Setting the time:: Changing the system clock. * Options for date:: Instead of the current time. @detailmenu * Date input formats:: Specifying date strings. @end detailmenu * Examples of date:: Examples. @end menu @node Time conversion specifiers @subsection Time conversion specifiers @cindex time conversion specifiers @cindex conversion specifiers, time @command{date} conversion specifiers related to times. @table @samp @item %H hour (@samp{00}@dots{}@samp{23}) @item %I hour (@samp{01}@dots{}@samp{12}) @item %k hour, space padded (@samp{ 0}@dots{}@samp{23}); equivalent to @samp{%_H}@. This is a GNU extension. @item %l hour, space padded (@samp{ 1}@dots{}@samp{12}); equivalent to @samp{%_I}@. This is a GNU extension. @item %M minute (@samp{00}@dots{}@samp{59}) @item %N nanoseconds (@samp{000000000}@dots{}@samp{999999999}). This is a GNU extension. @item %p locale's equivalent of either @samp{AM} or @samp{PM}; blank in many locales. Noon is treated as @samp{PM} and midnight as @samp{AM}. @item %P like @samp{%p}, except lower case. This is a GNU extension. @item %r locale's 12-hour clock time (e.g., @samp{11:11:04 PM}) @item %R 24-hour hour and minute. Same as @samp{%H:%M}. @item %s @cindex epoch, seconds since @cindex seconds since the epoch @cindex beginning of time @cindex leap seconds seconds since the epoch, i.e., since 1970-01-01 00:00:00 UTC@. Leap seconds are not counted unless leap second support is available. @xref{%s-examples}, for examples. This is a GNU extension. @item %S @cindex leap seconds second (@samp{00}@dots{}@samp{60}). This may be @samp{60} if leap seconds are supported. @item %T 24-hour hour, minute, and second. Same as @samp{%H:%M:%S}. @item %X locale's time representation (e.g., @samp{23:13:48}) @item %z Four-digit numeric time zone, e.g., @samp{-0600} or @samp{+0530}, or @samp{-0000} if no time zone is determinable. This value reflects the numeric time zone appropriate for the current time, using the time zone rules specified by the @env{TZ} environment variable. A time zone is not determinable if its numeric offset is zero and its abbreviation begins with @samp{-}. The time (and optionally, the time zone rules) can be overridden by the @option{--date} option. @item %:z Numeric time zone with @samp{:}, e.g., @samp{-06:00} or @samp{+05:30}), or @samp{-00:00} if no time zone is determinable. This is a GNU extension. @item %::z Numeric time zone to the nearest second with @samp{:} (e.g., @samp{-06:00:00} or @samp{+05:30:00}), or @samp{-00:00:00} if no time zone is determinable. This is a GNU extension. @item %:::z Numeric time zone with @samp{:} using the minimum necessary precision (e.g., @samp{-06}, @samp{+05:30}, or @samp{-04:56:02}), or @samp{-00} if no time zone is determinable. This is a GNU extension. @item %Z alphabetic time zone abbreviation (e.g., @samp{EDT}), or nothing if no time zone is determinable. See @samp{%z} for how it is determined. @end table @node Date conversion specifiers @subsection Date conversion specifiers @cindex date conversion specifiers @cindex conversion specifiers, date @command{date} conversion specifiers related to dates. @table @samp @item %a locale's abbreviated weekday name (e.g., @samp{Sun}) @item %A locale's full weekday name, variable length (e.g., @samp{Sunday}) @item %b locale's abbreviated month name (e.g., @samp{Jan}) @item %B locale's full month name, variable length (e.g., @samp{January}) @item %c locale's date and time (e.g., @samp{Thu Mar @ 3 23:05:25 2005}) @item %C century. This is like @samp{%Y}, except the last two digits are omitted. For example, it is @samp{20} if @samp{%Y} is @samp{2000}, and is @samp{-0} if @samp{%Y} is @samp{-001}. It is normally at least two characters, but it may be more. @item %d day of month (e.g., @samp{01}) @item %D date; same as @samp{%m/%d/%y} @item %e day of month, space padded; same as @samp{%_d} @item %F full date in ISO 8601 format; same as @samp{%Y-%m-%d}. This is a good choice for a date format, as it is standard and is easy to sort in the usual case where years are in the range 0000@dots{}9999. @item %g year corresponding to the ISO week number, but without the century (range @samp{00} through @samp{99}). This has the same format and value as @samp{%y}, except that if the ISO week number (see @samp{%V}) belongs to the previous or next year, that year is used instead. @item %G year corresponding to the ISO week number. This has the same format and value as @samp{%Y}, except that if the ISO week number (see @samp{%V}) belongs to the previous or next year, that year is used instead. It is normally useful only if @samp{%V} is also used; for example, the format @samp{%G-%m-%d} is probably a mistake, since it combines the ISO week number year with the conventional month and day. @item %h same as @samp{%b} @item %j day of year (@samp{001}@dots{}@samp{366}) @item %m month (@samp{01}@dots{}@samp{12}) @item %q quarter of year (@samp{1}@dots{}@samp{4}) @item %u day of week (@samp{1}@dots{}@samp{7}) with @samp{1} corresponding to Monday @item %U week number of year, with Sunday as the first day of the week (@samp{00}@dots{}@samp{53}). Days in a new year preceding the first Sunday are in week zero. @item %V ISO week number, that is, the week number of year, with Monday as the first day of the week (@samp{01}@dots{}@samp{53}). If the week containing January 1 has four or more days in the new year, then it is considered week 1; otherwise, it is week 53 of the previous year, and the next week is week 1. (See the ISO 8601 standard.) @item %w day of week (@samp{0}@dots{}@samp{6}) with 0 corresponding to Sunday @item %W week number of year, with Monday as first day of week (@samp{00}@dots{}@samp{53}). Days in a new year preceding the first Monday are in week zero. @item %x locale's date representation (e.g., @samp{12/31/99}) @item %y last two digits of year (@samp{00}@dots{}@samp{99}) @item %Y year. This is normally at least four characters, but it may be more. Year @samp{0000} precedes year @samp{0001}, and year @samp{-001} precedes year @samp{0000}. @end table @node Literal conversion specifiers @subsection Literal conversion specifiers @cindex literal conversion specifiers @cindex conversion specifiers, literal @command{date} conversion specifiers that produce literal strings. @table @samp @item %% a literal % @item %n a newline @item %t a horizontal tab @end table @node Padding and other flags @subsection Padding and other flags @cindex numeric field padding @cindex padding of numeric fields @cindex fields, padding numeric Unless otherwise specified, @command{date} normally pads numeric fields with zeros, so that, for example, numeric months are always output as two digits. Seconds since the epoch are not padded, though, since there is no natural width for them. As a GNU extension, @command{date} recognizes any of the following optional flags after the @samp{%}: @table @samp @item - (hyphen) Do not pad the field; useful if the output is intended for human consumption. @item _ (underscore) Pad with spaces; useful if you need a fixed number of characters in the output, but zeros are too distracting. @item 0 (zero) Pad with zeros even if the conversion specifier would normally pad with spaces. @item ^ Use upper case characters if possible. @item # Use opposite case characters if possible. A field that is normally upper case becomes lower case, and vice versa. @end table @noindent Here are some examples of padding: @example date +%d/%m -d "Feb 1" @result{} 01/02 date +%-d/%-m -d "Feb 1" @result{} 1/2 date +%_d/%_m -d "Feb 1" @result{} 1/ 2 @end example As a GNU extension, you can specify the field width (after any flag, if present) as a decimal number. If the natural size of the output of the field has less than the specified number of characters, the result is written right adjusted and padded to the given size. For example, @samp{%9B} prints the right adjusted month name in a field of width 9. An optional modifier can follow the optional flag and width specification. The modifiers are: @table @samp @item E Use the locale's alternate representation for date and time. This modifier applies to the @samp{%c}, @samp{%C}, @samp{%x}, @samp{%X}, @samp{%y} and @samp{%Y} conversion specifiers. In a Japanese locale, for example, @samp{%Ex} might yield a date format based on the Japanese Emperors' reigns. @item O Use the locale's alternate numeric symbols for numbers. This modifier applies only to numeric conversion specifiers. @end table If the format supports the modifier but no alternate representation is available, it is ignored. @node Setting the time @subsection Setting the time @cindex setting the time @cindex time setting @cindex appropriate privileges If given an argument that does not start with @samp{+}, @command{date} sets the system clock to the date and time specified by that argument (as described below). You must have appropriate privileges to set the system clock. Note for changes to persist across a reboot, the hardware clock may need to be updated from the system clock, which might not happen automatically on your system. The argument must consist entirely of digits, which have the following meaning: @table @samp @item MM month @item DD day within month @item hh hour @item mm minute @item CC first two digits of year (optional) @item YY last two digits of year (optional) @item ss second (optional) @end table Note, the @option{--date} and @option{--set} options may not be used with an argument in the above format. The @option{--universal} option may be used with such an argument to indicate that the specified date and time are relative to Universal Time rather than to the local time zone. @node Options for date @subsection Options for @command{date} @cindex @command{date} options @cindex options for @command{date} The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @item -d @var{datestr} @itemx --date=@var{datestr} @opindex -d @opindex --date @cindex parsing date strings @cindex date strings, parsing @cindex arbitrary date strings, parsing @opindex yesterday @opindex tomorrow @opindex next @var{day} @opindex last @var{day} Display the date and time specified in @var{datestr} instead of the current date and time. @var{datestr} can be in almost any common format. It can contain month names, time zones, @samp{am} and @samp{pm}, @samp{yesterday}, etc. For example, @option{--date="2004-02-27 14:19:13.489392193 +0530"} specifies the instant of time that is 489,392,193 nanoseconds after February 27, 2004 at 2:19:13 PM in a time zone that is 5 hours and 30 minutes east of UTC.@* Note: input currently must be in locale independent format. E.g., the LC_TIME=C below is needed to print back the correct date in many locales: @example date -d "$(LC_TIME=C date)" @end example @xref{Date input formats}. @item --debug @opindex --debug @cindex debugging date strings @cindex date strings, debugging @cindex arbitrary date strings, debugging annotate the parsed date, display the effective time zone, and warn about potential misuse. @item -f @var{datefile} @itemx --file=@var{datefile} @opindex -f @opindex --file Parse each line in @var{datefile} as with @option{-d} and display the resulting date and time. If @var{datefile} is @samp{-}, use standard input. This is useful when you have many dates to process, because the system overhead of starting up the @command{date} executable many times can be considerable. @item -I[@var{timespec}] @itemx --iso-8601[=@var{timespec}] @opindex -I[@var{timespec}] @opindex --iso-8601[=@var{timespec}] Display the date using an ISO 8601 format, @samp{%Y-%m-%d}. The argument @var{timespec} specifies the number of additional terms of the time to include. It can be one of the following: @table @samp @item auto Print just the date. This is the default if @var{timespec} is omitted. @item hours Append the hour of the day to the date. @item minutes Append the hours and minutes. @item seconds Append the hours, minutes and seconds. @item ns Append the hours, minutes, seconds and nanoseconds. @end table If showing any time terms, then include the time zone using the format @samp{%:z}. @macro dateParseNote This format is always suitable as input for the @option{--date} (@option{-d}) and @option{--file} (@option{-f}) options, regardless of the current locale. @end macro @dateParseNote @item -r @var{file} @itemx --reference=@var{file} @opindex -r @opindex --reference Display the date and time of the last modification of @var{file}, instead of the current date and time. @item -R @itemx --rfc-email @opindex -R @opindex --rfc-email Display the date and time using the format @samp{%a, %d %b %Y %H:%M:%S %z}, evaluated in the C locale so abbreviations are always in English. For example: @example Fri, 09 Sep 2005 13:51:39 -0700 @end example @opindex --rfc-822 @opindex --rfc-2822 This format conforms to Internet RFCs @uref{https://tools.ietf.org/search/rfc5322, 5322}, @uref{https://tools.ietf.org/search/rfc2822, 822} and @uref{https://tools.ietf.org/search/rfc822, 822}, the current and previous standards for Internet email. For compatibility with older versions of @command{date}, @option{--rfc-2822} and @option{--rfc-822} are aliases for @option{--rfc-email}. @item --rfc-3339=@var{timespec} @opindex --rfc-3339=@var{timespec} Display the date using a format specified by @uref{https://tools.ietf.org/search/rfc3339, Internet RFC 3339}. This is like @option{--iso-8601}, except that a space rather than a @samp{T} separates dates from times. @dateParseNote The argument @var{timespec} specifies how much of the time to include. It can be one of the following: @table @samp @item date Print just the full-date, e.g., @samp{2005-09-14}. This is equivalent to the format @samp{%Y-%m-%d}. @item seconds Print the full-date and full-time separated by a space, e.g., @samp{2005-09-14 00:56:06+05:30}. The output ends with a numeric time-offset; here the @samp{+05:30} means that local time is five hours and thirty minutes east of UTC@. This is equivalent to the format @samp{%Y-%m-%d %H:%M:%S%:z}. @item ns Like @samp{seconds}, but also print nanoseconds, e.g., @samp{2005-09-14 00:56:06.998458565+05:30}. This is equivalent to the format @samp{%Y-%m-%d %H:%M:%S.%N%:z}. @end table @item -s @var{datestr} @itemx --set=@var{datestr} @opindex -s @opindex --set Set the date and time to @var{datestr}. See @option{-d} above. See also @ref{Setting the time}. @item -u @itemx --utc @itemx --universal @opindex -u @opindex --utc @opindex --universal @cindex Coordinated Universal Time @cindex UTC @cindex Greenwich Mean Time @cindex GMT @cindex leap seconds @vindex TZ @cindex Universal Time Use Universal Time by operating as if the @env{TZ} environment variable were set to the string @samp{UTC0}. UTC stands for Coordinated Universal Time, established in 1960. Universal Time is often called ``Greenwich Mean Time'' (GMT) for historical reasons. Typically, systems ignore leap seconds and thus implement an approximation to UTC rather than true UTC. @end table @node Examples of date @subsection Examples of @command{date} @cindex examples of @command{date} Here are a few examples. Also see the documentation for the @option{-d} option in the previous section. @itemize @bullet @item To print the date of the day before yesterday: @example date --date='2 days ago' @end example @item To print the date of the day three months and one day hence: @example date --date='3 months 1 day' @end example @item To print the day of year of Christmas in the current year: @example date --date='25 Dec' +%j @end example @item To print the current full month name and the day of the month: @example date '+%B %d' @end example But this may not be what you want because for the first nine days of the month, the @samp{%d} expands to a zero-padded two-digit field, for example @samp{date -d 1may '+%B %d'} will print @samp{May 01}. @item To print a date without the leading zero for one-digit days of the month, you can use the (GNU extension) @samp{-} flag to suppress the padding altogether: @example date -d 1may '+%B %-d' @end example @item To print the current date and time in the format required by many non-GNU versions of @command{date} when setting the system clock: @example date +%m%d%H%M%Y.%S @end example @item To set the system clock forward by two minutes: @example date --set='+2 minutes' @end example @item To print the date in Internet RFC 5322 format, use @samp{date --rfc-email}. Here is some example output: @example Fri, 09 Sep 2005 13:51:39 -0700 @end example @anchor{%s-examples} @item To convert a date string to the number of seconds since the epoch (which is 1970-01-01 00:00:00 UTC), use the @option{--date} option with the @samp{%s} format. That can be useful in sorting and/or graphing and/or comparing data by date. The following command outputs the number of the seconds since the epoch for the time two minutes after the epoch: @example date --date='1970-01-01 00:02:00 +0000' +%s 120 @end example If you do not specify time zone information in the date string, @command{date} uses your computer's idea of the time zone when interpreting the string. For example, if your computer's time zone is that of Cambridge, Massachusetts, which was then 5 hours (i.e., 18,000 seconds) behind UTC: @example # local time zone used date --date='1970-01-01 00:02:00' +%s 18120 @end example @item If you're sorting or graphing dated data, your raw date values may be represented as seconds since the epoch. But few people can look at the date @samp{946684800} and casually note ``Oh, that's the first second of the year 2000 in Greenwich, England.'' @example date --date='2000-01-01 UTC' +%s 946684800 @end example An alternative is to use the @option{--utc} (@option{-u}) option. Then you may omit @samp{UTC} from the date string. Although this produces the same result for @samp{%s} and many other format sequences, with a time zone offset different from zero, it would give a different result for zone-dependent formats like @samp{%z}. @example date -u --date=2000-01-01 +%s 946684800 @end example To convert such an unwieldy number of seconds back to a more readable form, use a command like this: @smallexample # local time zone used date -d '1970-01-01 UTC 946684800 seconds' +"%Y-%m-%d %T %z" 1999-12-31 19:00:00 -0500 @end smallexample Or if you do not mind depending on the @samp{@@} feature present since coreutils 5.3.0, you could shorten this to: @smallexample date -d @@946684800 +"%F %T %z" 1999-12-31 19:00:00 -0500 @end smallexample Often it is better to output UTC-relative date and time: @smallexample date -u -d '1970-01-01 946684800 seconds' +"%Y-%m-%d %T %z" 2000-01-01 00:00:00 +0000 @end smallexample @item @cindex leap seconds Typically the seconds count omits leap seconds, but some systems are exceptions. Because leap seconds are not predictable, the mapping between the seconds count and a future timestamp is not reliable on the atypical systems that include leap seconds in their counts. Here is how the two kinds of systems handle the leap second at 2012-06-30 23:59:60 UTC: @example # Typical systems ignore leap seconds: date --date='2012-06-30 23:59:59 +0000' +%s 1341100799 date --date='2012-06-30 23:59:60 +0000' +%s date: invalid date '2012-06-30 23:59:60 +0000' date --date='2012-07-01 00:00:00 +0000' +%s 1341100800 @end example @example # Atypical systems count leap seconds: date --date='2012-06-30 23:59:59 +0000' +%s 1341100823 date --date='2012-06-30 23:59:60 +0000' +%s 1341100824 date --date='2012-07-01 00:00:00 +0000' +%s 1341100825 @end example @end itemize @node arch invocation @section @command{arch}: Print machine hardware name @pindex arch @cindex print machine hardware name @cindex system information, printing @command{arch} prints the machine hardware name, and is equivalent to @samp{uname -m}. Synopsis: @example arch [@var{option}] @end example The program accepts the @ref{Common options} only. @command{arch} is not installed by default, so portable scripts should not rely on its existence. @exitstatus @node nproc invocation @section @command{nproc}: Print the number of available processors @pindex nproc @cindex Print the number of processors @cindex system information, printing Print the number of processing units available to the current process, which may be less than the number of online processors. If this information is not accessible, then print the number of processors installed. If the @env{OMP_NUM_THREADS} environment variable is set, then it will determine the returned value. The result is guaranteed to be greater than zero. Synopsis: @example nproc [@var{option}] @end example The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @item --all @opindex --all Print the number of installed processors on the system, which may be greater than the number online or available to the current process. The @env{OMP_NUM_THREADS} environment variable is not honored in this case. @item --ignore=@var{number} @opindex --ignore If possible, exclude this @var{number} of processing units. @end table @exitstatus @node uname invocation @section @command{uname}: Print system information @pindex uname @cindex print system information @cindex system information, printing @command{uname} prints information about the machine and operating system it is run on. If no options are given, @command{uname} acts as if the @option{-s} option were given. Synopsis: @example uname [@var{option}]@dots{} @end example If multiple options or @option{-a} are given, the selected information is printed in this order: @example @var{kernel-name} @var{nodename} @var{kernel-release} @var{kernel-version} @var{machine} @var{processor} @var{hardware-platform} @var{operating-system} @end example The information may contain internal spaces, so such output cannot be parsed reliably. In the following example, @var{release} is @samp{2.2.18ss.e820-bda652a #4 SMP Tue Jun 5 11:24:08 PDT 2001}: @smallexample uname -a @result{} Linux dumdum 2.2.18 #4 SMP Tue Jun 5 11:24:08 PDT 2001 i686@c unknown unknown GNU/Linux @end smallexample The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @item -a @itemx --all @opindex -a @opindex --all Print all of the below information, except omit the processor type and the hardware platform name if they are unknown. @item -i @itemx --hardware-platform @opindex -i @opindex --hardware-platform @cindex implementation, hardware @cindex hardware platform @cindex platform, hardware Print the hardware platform name (sometimes called the hardware implementation). Print @samp{unknown} if this information is not available. Note this is non-portable (even across GNU/Linux distributions). @item -m @itemx --machine @opindex -m @opindex --machine @cindex machine type @cindex hardware class @cindex hardware type Print the machine hardware name (sometimes called the hardware class or hardware type). @item -n @itemx --nodename @opindex -n @opindex --nodename @cindex hostname @cindex node name @cindex network node name Print the network node hostname. @item -p @itemx --processor @opindex -p @opindex --processor @cindex host processor type Print the processor type (sometimes called the instruction set architecture or ISA). Print @samp{unknown} if this information is not available. Note this is non-portable (even across GNU/Linux distributions). @item -o @itemx --operating-system @opindex -o @opindex --operating-system @cindex operating system name Print the name of the operating system. @item -r @itemx --kernel-release @opindex -r @opindex --kernel-release @cindex kernel release @cindex release of kernel Print the kernel release. @item -s @itemx --kernel-name @opindex -s @opindex --kernel-name @cindex kernel name @cindex name of kernel Print the kernel name. POSIX 1003.1-2001 (@pxref{Standards conformance}) calls this ``the implementation of the operating system'', because the POSIX specification itself has no notion of ``kernel''. The kernel name might be the same as the operating system name printed by the @option{-o} or @option{--operating-system} option, but it might differ. Some operating systems (e.g., FreeBSD, HP-UX) have the same name as their underlying kernels; others (e.g., GNU/Linux, Solaris) do not. @item -v @itemx --kernel-version @opindex -v @opindex --kernel-version @cindex kernel version @cindex version of kernel Print the kernel version. @end table @exitstatus @node hostname invocation @section @command{hostname}: Print or set system name @pindex hostname @cindex setting the hostname @cindex printing the hostname @cindex system name, printing @cindex appropriate privileges With no arguments, @command{hostname} prints the name of the current host system. With one argument, it sets the current host name to the specified string. You must have appropriate privileges to set the host name. Synopsis: @example hostname [@var{name}] @end example The only options are @option{--help} and @option{--version}. @xref{Common options}. @command{hostname} is not installed by default, and other packages also supply a @command{hostname} command, so portable scripts should not rely on its existence or on the exact behavior documented above. @exitstatus @node hostid invocation @section @command{hostid}: Print numeric host identifier @pindex hostid @cindex printing the host identifier @command{hostid} prints the numeric identifier of the current host in hexadecimal. This command accepts no arguments. The only options are @option{--help} and @option{--version}. @xref{Common options}. For example, here's what it prints on one system I use: @example $ hostid 1bac013d @end example On that system, the 32-bit quantity happens to be closely related to the system's Internet address, but that isn't always the case. @command{hostid} is installed only on systems that have the @code{gethostid} function, so portable scripts should not rely on its existence. @exitstatus @node uptime invocation @section @command{uptime}: Print system uptime and load @pindex uptime @cindex printing the system uptime and load @command{uptime} prints the current time, the system's uptime, the number of logged-in users and the current load average. If an argument is specified, it is used as the file to be read to discover how many users are logged in. If no argument is specified, a system default is used (@command{uptime --help} indicates the default setting). The only options are @option{--help} and @option{--version}. @xref{Common options}. For example, here's what it prints right now on one system I use: @example $ uptime 14:07 up 3:35, 3 users, load average: 1.39, 1.15, 1.04 @end example The precise method of calculation of load average varies somewhat between systems. Some systems calculate it as the average number of runnable processes over the last 1, 5 and 15 minutes, but some systems also include processes in the uninterruptible sleep state (that is, those processes which are waiting for disk I/O). The Linux kernel includes uninterruptible processes. @command{uptime} is installed only on platforms with infrastructure for obtaining the boot time, and other packages also supply an @command{uptime} command, so portable scripts should not rely on its existence or on the exact behavior documented above. @exitstatus @node SELinux context @chapter SELinux context @cindex SELinux context @cindex SELinux, context @cindex commands for SELinux context This section describes commands for operations with SELinux contexts. @menu * chcon invocation:: Change SELinux context of file * runcon invocation:: Run a command in specified SELinux context @end menu @node chcon invocation @section @command{chcon}: Change SELinux context of file @pindex chcon @cindex changing security context @cindex change SELinux context @command{chcon} changes the SELinux security context of the selected files. Synopses: @smallexample chcon [@var{option}]@dots{} @var{context} @var{file}@dots{} chcon [@var{option}]@dots{} [-u @var{user}] [-r @var{role}] [-l @var{range}]@c [-t @var{type}] @var{file}@dots{} chcon [@var{option}]@dots{} --reference=@var{rfile} @var{file}@dots{} @end smallexample Change the SELinux security context of each @var{file} to @var{context}. With @option{--reference}, change the security context of each @var{file} to that of @var{rfile}. The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @item --dereference @opindex --dereference Do not affect symbolic links but what they refer to; this is the default. @item -h @itemx --no-dereference @opindex -h @opindex --no-dereference @cindex no dereference Affect the symbolic links themselves instead of any referenced file. @item --reference=@var{rfile} @opindex --reference @cindex reference file Use @var{rfile}'s security context rather than specifying a @var{context} value. @item -R @itemx --recursive @opindex -R @opindex --recursive Operate on files and directories recursively. @item --preserve-root @opindex --preserve-root Refuse to operate recursively on the root directory, @file{/}, when used together with the @option{--recursive} option. @xref{Treating / specially}. @item --no-preserve-root @opindex --no-preserve-root Do not treat the root directory, @file{/}, specially when operating recursively; this is the default. @xref{Treating / specially}. @choptH @xref{Traversing symlinks}. @choptL @xref{Traversing symlinks}. @choptP @xref{Traversing symlinks}. @item -v @itemx --verbose @opindex -v @opindex --verbose @cindex diagnostic Output a diagnostic for every file processed. @item -u @var{user} @itemx --user=@var{user} @opindex -u @opindex --user Set user @var{user} in the target security context. @item -r @var{role} @itemx --role=@var{role} @opindex -r @opindex --role Set role @var{role} in the target security context. @item -t @var{type} @itemx --type=@var{type} @opindex -t @opindex --type Set type @var{type} in the target security context. @item -l @var{range} @itemx --range=@var{range} @opindex -l @opindex --range Set range @var{range} in the target security context. @end table @exitstatus @node runcon invocation @section @command{runcon}: Run a command in specified SELinux context @pindex runcon @cindex run with security context @command{runcon} runs file in specified SELinux security context. Synopses: @smallexample runcon @var{context} @var{command} [@var{args}] runcon [ -c ] [-u @var{user}] [-r @var{role}] [-t @var{type}]@c [-l @var{range}] @var{command} [@var{args}] @end smallexample Run @var{command} with completely-specified @var{context}, or with current or transitioned security context modified by one or more of @var{level}, @var{role}, @var{type} and @var{user}. If none of @option{-c}, @option{-t}, @option{-u}, @option{-r}, or @option{-l} is specified, the first argument is used as the complete context. Any additional arguments after @var{command} are interpreted as arguments to the command. With neither @var{context} nor @var{command}, print the current security context. The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @item -c @itemx --compute @opindex -c @opindex --compute Compute process transition context before modifying. @item -u @var{user} @itemx --user=@var{user} @opindex -u @opindex --user Set user @var{user} in the target security context. @item -r @var{role} @itemx --role=@var{role} @opindex -r @opindex --role Set role @var{role} in the target security context. @item -t @var{type} @itemx --type=@var{type} @opindex -t @opindex --type Set type @var{type} in the target security context. @item -l @var{range} @itemx --range=@var{range} @opindex -l @opindex --range Set range @var{range} in the target security context. @end table @cindex exit status of @command{runcon} Exit status: @display 126 if @var{command} is found but cannot be invoked 127 if @command{runcon} itself fails or if @var{command} cannot be found the exit status of @var{command} otherwise @end display @node Modified command invocation @chapter Modified command invocation @cindex modified command invocation @cindex invocation of commands, modified @cindex commands for invoking other commands This section describes commands that run other commands in some context different than the current one: a modified environment, as a different user, etc. @menu * chroot invocation:: Modify the root directory. * env invocation:: Modify environment variables. * nice invocation:: Modify niceness. * nohup invocation:: Immunize to hangups. * stdbuf invocation:: Modify buffering of standard streams. * timeout invocation:: Run with time limit. @end menu @node chroot invocation @section @command{chroot}: Run a command with a different root directory @pindex chroot @cindex running a program in a specified root directory @cindex root directory, running a program in a specified @command{chroot} runs a command with a specified root directory. On many systems, only the super-user can do this.@footnote{However, some systems (e.g., FreeBSD) can be configured to allow certain regular users to use the @code{chroot} system call, and hence to run this program. Also, on Cygwin, anyone can run the @command{chroot} command, because the underlying function is non-privileged due to lack of support in MS-Windows. Furthermore, the @command{chroot} command avoids the @code{chroot} system call when @var{newroot} is identical to the old @file{/} directory for consistency with systems where this is allowed for non-privileged users.}. Synopses: @example chroot @var{option} @var{newroot} [@var{command} [@var{args}]@dots{}] chroot @var{option} @end example Ordinarily, file names are looked up starting at the root of the directory structure, i.e., @file{/}. @command{chroot} changes the root to the directory @var{newroot} (which must exist), then changes the working directory to @file{/}, and finally runs @var{command} with optional @var{args}. If @var{command} is not specified, the default is the value of the @env{SHELL} environment variable or @command{/bin/sh} if not set, invoked with the @option{-i} option. @var{command} must not be a special built-in utility (@pxref{Special built-in utilities}). The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. Options must precede operands. @table @samp @item --groups=@var{groups} @opindex --groups Use this option to override the supplementary @var{groups} to be used by the new process. The items in the list (names or numeric IDs) must be separated by commas. Use @samp{--groups=''} to disable the supplementary group look-up implicit in the @option{--userspec} option. @item --userspec=@var{user}[:@var{group}] @opindex --userspec By default, @var{command} is run with the same credentials as the invoking process. Use this option to run it as a different @var{user} and/or with a different primary @var{group}. If a @var{user} is specified then the supplementary groups are set according to the system defined list for that user, unless overridden with the @option{--groups} option. @item --skip-chdir @opindex --skip-chdir Use this option to not change the working directory to @file{/} after changing the root directory to @var{newroot}, i.e., inside the chroot. This option is only permitted when @var{newroot} is the old @file{/} directory, and therefore is mostly useful together with the @option{--groups} and @option{--userspec} options to retain the previous working directory. @end table The user and group name look-up performed by the @option{--userspec} and @option{--groups} options, is done both outside and inside the chroot, with successful look-ups inside the chroot taking precedence. If the specified user or group items are intended to represent a numeric ID, then a name to ID resolving step is avoided by specifying a leading @samp{+}. @xref{Disambiguating names and IDs}. Here are a few tips to help avoid common problems in using chroot. To start with a simple example, make @var{command} refer to a statically linked binary. If you were to use a dynamically linked executable, then you'd have to arrange to have the shared libraries in the right place under your new root directory. For example, if you create a statically linked @command{ls} executable, and put it in @file{/tmp/empty}, you can run this command as root: @example $ chroot /tmp/empty /ls -Rl / @end example Then you'll see output like this: @example /: total 1023 -rwxr-xr-x 1 0 0 1041745 Aug 16 11:17 ls @end example If you want to use a dynamically linked executable, say @command{bash}, then first run @samp{ldd bash} to see what shared objects it needs. Then, in addition to copying the actual binary, also copy the listed files to the required positions under your intended new root directory. Finally, if the executable requires any other files (e.g., data, state, device files), copy them into place, too. @command{chroot} is installed only on systems that have the @code{chroot} function, so portable scripts should not rely on its existence. @cindex exit status of @command{chroot} Exit status: @display 125 if @command{chroot} itself fails 126 if @var{command} is found but cannot be invoked 127 if @var{command} cannot be found the exit status of @var{command} otherwise @end display @node env invocation @section @command{env}: Run a command in a modified environment @pindex env @cindex environment, running a program in a modified @cindex modified environment, running a program in a @cindex running a program in a modified environment @command{env} runs a command with a modified environment. Synopses: @example env [@var{option}]@dots{} [@var{name}=@var{value}]@dots{} @c [@var{command} [@var{args}]@dots{}] env @end example Operands of the form @samp{@var{variable}=@var{value}} set the environment variable @var{variable} to value @var{value}. @var{value} may be empty (@samp{@var{variable}=}). Setting a variable to an empty value is different from unsetting it. These operands are evaluated left-to-right, so if two operands mention the same variable the earlier is ignored. Environment variable names can be empty, and can contain any characters other than @samp{=} and ASCII NUL. However, it is wise to limit yourself to names that consist solely of underscores, digits, and ASCII letters, and that begin with a non-digit, as applications like the shell do not work well with other names. @vindex PATH The first operand that does not contain the character @samp{=} specifies the program to invoke; it is searched for according to the @env{PATH} environment variable. Any remaining arguments are passed as arguments to that program. The program should not be a special built-in utility (@pxref{Special built-in utilities}). Modifications to @env{PATH} take effect prior to searching for @var{command}. Use caution when reducing @env{PATH}; behavior is not portable when @env{PATH} is undefined or omits key directories such as @file{/bin}. In the rare case that a utility contains a @samp{=} in the name, the only way to disambiguate it from a variable assignment is to use an intermediate command for @var{command}, and pass the problematic program name via @var{args}. For example, if @file{./prog=} is an executable in the current @env{PATH}: @example env prog= true # runs 'true', with prog= in environment env ./prog= true # runs 'true', with ./prog= in environment env -- prog= true # runs 'true', with prog= in environment env sh -c '\prog= true' # runs 'prog=' with argument 'true' env sh -c 'exec "$@@"' sh prog= true # also runs 'prog=' @end example @cindex environment, printing If no command name is specified following the environment specifications, the resulting environment is printed. This is like specifying the @command{printenv} program. For some examples, suppose the environment passed to @command{env} contains @samp{LOGNAME=rms}, @samp{EDITOR=emacs}, and @samp{PATH=.:/gnubin:/hacks}: @itemize @bullet @item Output the current environment. @example $ env | LC_ALL=C sort EDITOR=emacs LOGNAME=rms PATH=.:/gnubin:/hacks @end example @item Run @command{foo} with a reduced environment, preserving only the original @env{PATH} to avoid problems in locating @command{foo}. @example env - PATH="$PATH" foo @end example @item Run @command{foo} with the environment containing @samp{LOGNAME=rms}, @samp{EDITOR=emacs}, and @samp{PATH=.:/gnubin:/hacks}, and guarantees that @command{foo} was found in the file system rather than as a shell built-in. @example env foo @end example @item Run @command{nemacs} with the environment containing @samp{LOGNAME=foo}, @samp{EDITOR=emacs}, @samp{PATH=.:/gnubin:/hacks}, and @samp{DISPLAY=gnu:0}. @example env DISPLAY=gnu:0 LOGNAME=foo nemacs @end example @item Attempt to run the program @command{/energy/--} (as that is the only possible path search result); if the command exists, the environment will contain @samp{LOGNAME=rms} and @samp{PATH=/energy}, and the arguments will be @samp{e=mc2}, @samp{bar}, and @samp{baz}. @example env -u EDITOR PATH=/energy -- e=mc2 bar baz @end example @end itemize The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. Options must precede operands. @table @samp @optNull @item -u @var{name} @itemx --unset=@var{name} @opindex -u @opindex --unset Remove variable @var{name} from the environment, if it was in the environment. @item - @itemx -i @itemx --ignore-environment @opindex - @opindex -i @opindex --ignore-environment Start with an empty environment, ignoring the inherited environment. @end table @cindex exit status of @command{env} Exit status: @display 0 if no @var{command} is specified and the environment is output 125 if @command{env} itself fails 126 if @var{command} is found but cannot be invoked 127 if @var{command} cannot be found the exit status of @var{command} otherwise @end display @node nice invocation @section @command{nice}: Run a command with modified niceness @pindex nice @cindex niceness @cindex scheduling, affecting @cindex appropriate privileges @command{nice} prints a process's @dfn{niceness}, or runs a command with modified niceness. @dfn{niceness} affects how favorably the process is scheduled in the system. Synopsis: @example nice [@var{option}]@dots{} [@var{command} [@var{arg}]@dots{}] @end example If no arguments are given, @command{nice} prints the current niceness. Otherwise, @command{nice} runs the given @var{command} with its niceness adjusted. By default, its niceness is incremented by 10. Niceness values range at least from @minus{}20 (process has high priority and gets more resources, thus slowing down other processes) through 19 (process has lower priority and runs slowly itself, but has less impact on the speed of other running processes). Some systems may have a wider range of niceness values; conversely, other systems may enforce more restrictive limits. An attempt to set the niceness outside the supported range is treated as an attempt to use the minimum or maximum supported value. A niceness should not be confused with a scheduling priority, which lets applications determine the order in which threads are scheduled to run. Unlike a priority, a niceness is merely advice to the scheduler, which the scheduler is free to ignore. Also, as a point of terminology, POSIX defines the behavior of @command{nice} in terms of a @dfn{nice value}, which is the non-negative difference between a niceness and the minimum niceness. Though @command{nice} conforms to POSIX, its documentation and diagnostics use the term ``niceness'' for compatibility with historical practice. @var{command} must not be a special built-in utility (@pxref{Special built-in utilities}). @mayConflictWithShellBuiltIn{nice} Note to change the @dfn{niceness} of an existing process, one needs to use the @command{renice} command. The program accepts the following option. Also see @ref{Common options}. Options must precede operands. @table @samp @item -n @var{adjustment} @itemx --adjustment=@var{adjustment} @opindex -n @opindex --adjustment Add @var{adjustment} instead of 10 to the command's niceness. If @var{adjustment} is negative and you lack appropriate privileges, @command{nice} issues a warning but otherwise acts as if you specified a zero adjustment. For compatibility @command{nice} also supports an obsolete option syntax @option{-@var{adjustment}}. New scripts should use @option{-n @var{adjustment}} instead. @end table @command{nice} is installed only on systems that have the POSIX @code{setpriority} function, so portable scripts should not rely on its existence on non-POSIX platforms. @cindex exit status of @command{nice} Exit status: @display 0 if no @var{command} is specified and the niceness is output 125 if @command{nice} itself fails 126 if @var{command} is found but cannot be invoked 127 if @var{command} cannot be found the exit status of @var{command} otherwise @end display It is sometimes useful to run a non-interactive program with reduced niceness. @example $ nice factor 4611686018427387903 @end example Since @command{nice} prints the current niceness, you can invoke it through itself to demonstrate how it works. The default behavior is to increase the niceness by @samp{10}: @example $ nice 0 $ nice nice 10 $ nice -n 10 nice 10 @end example The @var{adjustment} is relative to the current niceness. In the next example, the first @command{nice} invocation runs the second one with niceness 10, and it in turn runs the final one with a niceness that is 3 more: @example $ nice nice -n 3 nice 13 @end example Specifying a niceness larger than the supported range is the same as specifying the maximum supported value: @example $ nice -n 10000000000 nice 19 @end example Only a privileged user may run a process with lower niceness: @example $ nice -n -1 nice nice: cannot set niceness: Permission denied 0 $ sudo nice -n -1 nice -1 @end example @node nohup invocation @section @command{nohup}: Run a command immune to hangups @pindex nohup @cindex hangups, immunity to @cindex immunity to hangups @cindex logging out and continuing to run @flindex nohup.out @command{nohup} runs the given @var{command} with hangup signals ignored, so that the command can continue running in the background after you log out. Synopsis: @example nohup @var{command} [@var{arg}]@dots{} @end example If standard input is a terminal, redirect it so that terminal sessions do not mistakenly consider the terminal to be used by the command. Make the substitute file descriptor unreadable, so that commands that mistakenly attempt to read from standard input can report an error. This redirection is a GNU extension; programs intended to be portable to non-GNU hosts can use @samp{nohup @var{command} [@var{arg}]@dots{} 0>/dev/null} instead. @flindex nohup.out If standard output is a terminal, the command's standard output is appended to the file @file{nohup.out}; if that cannot be written to, it is appended to the file @file{$HOME/nohup.out}; and if that cannot be written to, the command is not run. Any @file{nohup.out} or @file{$HOME/nohup.out} file created by @command{nohup} is made readable and writable only to the user, regardless of the current umask settings. If standard error is a terminal, it is normally redirected to the same file descriptor as the (possibly-redirected) standard output. However, if standard output is closed, standard error terminal output is instead appended to the file @file{nohup.out} or @file{$HOME/nohup.out} as above. To capture the command's output to a file other than @file{nohup.out} you can redirect it. For example, to capture the output of @command{make}: @example nohup make > make.log @end example @command{nohup} does not automatically put the command it runs in the background; you must do that explicitly, by ending the command line with an @samp{&}. Also, @command{nohup} does not alter the niceness of @var{command}; use @command{nice} for that, e.g., @samp{nohup nice @var{command}}. @var{command} must not be a special built-in utility (@pxref{Special built-in utilities}). The only options are @option{--help} and @option{--version}. @xref{Common options}. Options must precede operands. @cindex exit status of @command{nohup} Exit status: @display 125 if @command{nohup} itself fails, and @env{POSIXLY_CORRECT} is not set 126 if @var{command} is found but cannot be invoked 127 if @var{command} cannot be found the exit status of @var{command} otherwise @end display If @env{POSIXLY_CORRECT} is set, internal failures give status 127 instead of 125. @node stdbuf invocation @section @command{stdbuf}: Run a command with modified I/O stream buffering @pindex stdbuf @cindex standard streams, buffering @cindex line buffered @command{stdbuf} allows one to modify the buffering operations of the three standard I/O streams associated with a program. Synopsis: @example stdbuf @var{option}@dots{} @var{command} @end example @var{command} must start with the name of a program that @enumerate @item uses the ISO C @code{FILE} streams for input/output (note the programs @command{dd} and @command{cat} don't do that), @item does not adjust the buffering of its standard streams (note the program @command{tee} is not in this category). @end enumerate Any additional @var{arg}s are passed as additional arguments to the @var{command}. The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @item -i @var{mode} @itemx --input=@var{mode} @opindex -i @opindex --input Adjust the standard input stream buffering. @item -o @var{mode} @itemx --output=@var{mode} @opindex -o @opindex --output Adjust the standard output stream buffering. @item -e @var{mode} @itemx --error=@var{mode} @opindex -e @opindex --error Adjust the standard error stream buffering. @end table The @var{mode} can be specified as follows: @table @samp @item L Set the stream to line buffered mode. In this mode data is coalesced until a newline is output or input is read from any stream attached to a terminal device. This option is invalid with standard input. @item 0 Disable buffering of the selected stream. In this mode, data is output immediately and only the amount of data requested is read from input. Note the difference in function for input and output. Disabling buffering for input will not influence the responsiveness or blocking behavior of the stream input functions. For example @code{fread} will still block until @code{EOF} or error, even if the underlying @code{read} returns less data than requested. @item @var{size} Specify the size of the buffer to use in fully buffered mode. @multiplierSuffixesNoBlocks{size} @end table @command{stdbuf} is installed only on platforms that use the Executable and Linkable Format (ELF) and support the @code{constructor} attribute, so portable scripts should not rely on its existence. @cindex exit status of @command{stdbuf} Exit status: @display 125 if @command{stdbuf} itself fails 126 if @var{command} is found but cannot be invoked 127 if @var{command} cannot be found the exit status of @var{command} otherwise @end display @node timeout invocation @section @command{timeout}: Run a command with a time limit @pindex timeout @cindex time limit @cindex run commands with bounded time @command{timeout} runs the given @var{command} and kills it if it is still running after the specified time interval. Synopsis: @example timeout [@var{option}] @var{duration} @var{command} [@var{arg}]@dots{} @end example @var{command} must not be a special built-in utility (@pxref{Special built-in utilities}). The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. Options must precede operands. @table @samp @item --preserve-status @opindex --preserve-status Return the exit status of the managed @var{command} on timeout, rather than a specific exit status indicating a timeout. This is useful if the managed @var{command} supports running for an indeterminate amount of time. @item --foreground @opindex --foreground Don't create a separate background program group, so that the managed @var{command} can use the foreground TTY normally. This is needed to support timing out commands not started directly from an interactive shell, in two situations. @enumerate @item @var{command} is interactive and needs to read from the terminal for example @item the user wants to support sending signals directly to @var{command} from the terminal (like Ctrl-C for example) @end enumerate Note in this mode of operation, any children of @var{command} will not be timed out. Also SIGCONT will not be sent to @var{command}, as it's generally not needed with foreground processes, and can cause intermittent signal delivery issues with programs that are monitors themselves (like GDB for example). @item -k @var{duration} @itemx --kill-after=@var{duration} @opindex -k @opindex --kill-after Ensure the monitored @var{command} is killed by also sending a @samp{KILL} signal, after the specified @var{duration}. Without this option, if the selected signal proves not to be fatal, @command{timeout} does not kill the @var{command}. @item -s @var{signal} @itemx --signal=@var{signal} @opindex -s @opindex --signal Send this @var{signal} to @var{command} on timeout, rather than the default @samp{TERM} signal. @var{signal} may be a name like @samp{HUP} or a number. @xref{Signal specifications}. @end table @cindex time units @var{duration} is a floating point number followed by an optional unit: @display @samp{s} for seconds (the default) @samp{m} for minutes @samp{h} for hours @samp{d} for days @end display A duration of 0 disables the associated timeout. Note that the actual timeout duration is dependent on system conditions, which should be especially considered when specifying sub-second timeouts. @cindex exit status of @command{timeout} Exit status: @display 124 if @var{command} times out 125 if @command{timeout} itself fails 126 if @var{command} is found but cannot be invoked 127 if @var{command} cannot be found 137 if @var{command} is sent the KILL(9) signal (128+9) the exit status of @var{command} otherwise @end display @node Process control @chapter Process control @cindex processes, commands for controlling @cindex commands for controlling processes @menu * kill invocation:: Sending a signal to processes. @end menu @node kill invocation @section @command{kill}: Send a signal to processes @pindex kill @cindex send a signal to processes The @command{kill} command sends a signal to processes, causing them to terminate or otherwise act upon receiving the signal in some way. Alternatively, it lists information about signals. Synopses: @example kill [-s @var{signal} | --signal @var{signal} | -@var{signal}] @var{pid}@dots{} kill [-l | --list | -t | --table] [@var{signal}]@dots{} @end example @mayConflictWithShellBuiltIn{kill} The first form of the @command{kill} command sends a signal to all @var{pid} arguments. The default signal to send if none is specified is @samp{TERM}@. The special signal number @samp{0} does not denote a valid signal, but can be used to test whether the @var{pid} arguments specify processes to which a signal could be sent. If @var{pid} is positive, the signal is sent to the process with the process ID @var{pid}. If @var{pid} is zero, the signal is sent to all processes in the process group of the current process. If @var{pid} is @minus{}1, the signal is sent to all processes for which the user has permission to send a signal. If @var{pid} is less than @minus{}1, the signal is sent to all processes in the process group that equals the absolute value of @var{pid}. If @var{pid} is not positive, a system-dependent set of system processes is excluded from the list of processes to which the signal is sent. If a negative @var{pid} argument is desired as the first one, it should be preceded by @option{--}. However, as a common extension to POSIX, @option{--} is not required with @samp{kill -@var{signal} -@var{pid}}. The following commands are equivalent: @example kill -15 -1 kill -TERM -1 kill -s TERM -- -1 kill -- -1 @end example The first form of the @command{kill} command succeeds if every @var{pid} argument specifies at least one process that the signal was sent to. The second form of the @command{kill} command lists signal information. Either the @option{-l} or @option{--list} option, or the @option{-t} or @option{--table} option must be specified. Without any @var{signal} argument, all supported signals are listed. The output of @option{-l} or @option{--list} is a list of the signal names, one per line; if @var{signal} is already a name, the signal number is printed instead. The output of @option{-t} or @option{--table} is a table of signal numbers, names, and descriptions. This form of the @command{kill} command succeeds if all @var{signal} arguments are valid and if there is no output error. The @command{kill} command also supports the @option{--help} and @option{--version} options. @xref{Common options}. A @var{signal} may be a signal name like @samp{HUP}, or a signal number like @samp{1}, or an exit status of a process terminated by the signal. A signal name can be given in canonical form or prefixed by @samp{SIG}@. The case of the letters is ignored, except for the @option{-@var{signal}} option which must use upper case to avoid ambiguity with lower case option letters. @xref{Signal specifications}, for a list of supported signal names and numbers. @node Delaying @chapter Delaying @cindex delaying commands @cindex commands for delaying @c Perhaps @command{wait} or other commands should be described here also? @menu * sleep invocation:: Delay for a specified time. @end menu @node sleep invocation @section @command{sleep}: Delay for a specified time @pindex sleep @cindex delay for a specified time @command{sleep} pauses for an amount of time specified by the sum of the values of the command line arguments. Synopsis: @example sleep @var{number}[smhd]@dots{} @end example @cindex time units Each argument is a number followed by an optional unit; the default is seconds. The units are: @table @samp @item s seconds @item m minutes @item h hours @item d days @end table Historical implementations of @command{sleep} have required that @var{number} be an integer, and only accepted a single argument without a suffix. However, GNU @command{sleep} accepts arbitrary floating point numbers. @xref{Floating point}. The only options are @option{--help} and @option{--version}. @xref{Common options}. @c sleep is a shell built-in at least with Solaris 11's /bin/sh @mayConflictWithShellBuiltIn{sleep} @exitstatus @node Numeric operations @chapter Numeric operations @cindex numeric operations These programs do numerically-related operations. @menu * factor invocation:: Show factors of numbers. * numfmt invocation:: Reformat numbers. * seq invocation:: Print sequences of numbers. @end menu @node factor invocation @section @command{factor}: Print prime factors @pindex factor @cindex prime factors @command{factor} prints prime factors. Synopses: @example factor [@var{number}]@dots{} factor @var{option} @end example If no @var{number} is specified on the command line, @command{factor} reads numbers from standard input, delimited by newlines, tabs, or spaces. The @command{factor} command supports only a small number of options: @table @samp @item --help Print a short help on standard output, then exit without further processing. @item --version Print the program version on standard output, then exit without further processing. @end table Factoring the product of the eighth and ninth Mersenne primes takes about 30 milliseconds of CPU time on a 2.2 GHz Athlon. @example M8=$(echo 2^31-1|bc) M9=$(echo 2^61-1|bc) n=$(echo "$M8 * $M9" | bc) /usr/bin/time -f %U factor $n 4951760154835678088235319297: 2147483647 2305843009213693951 0.03 @end example Similarly, factoring the eighth Fermat number @math{2^{256}+1} takes about 20 seconds on the same machine. Factoring large numbers is, in general, hard. The Pollard-Brent rho algorithm used by @command{factor} is particularly effective for numbers with relatively small factors. If you wish to factor large numbers which do not have small factors (for example, numbers which are the product of two large primes), other methods are far better. If @command{factor} is built without using GNU MP, only single-precision arithmetic is available, and so large numbers (typically @math{2^{128}} and above) will not be supported. The single-precision code uses an algorithm which is designed for factoring smaller numbers. @exitstatus @node numfmt invocation @section @command{numfmt}: Reformat numbers @pindex numfmt @command{numfmt} reads numbers in various representations and reformats them as requested. The most common usage is converting numbers to/from @emph{human} representation (e.g. @samp{4G} @expansion{} @samp{4,000,000,000}). @example numfmt [@var{option}]@dots{} [@var{number}] @end example @command{numfmt} converts each @var{number} on the command-line according to the specified options (see below). If no @var{number}s are given, it reads numbers from standard input. @command{numfmt} can optionally extract numbers from specific columns, maintaining proper line padding and alignment. @exitstatus See @option{--invalid} for additional information regarding exit status. @subsection General options The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. @table @samp @item --debug @opindex --debug Print (to standard error) warning messages about possible erroneous usage. @item -d @var{d} @itemx --delimiter=@var{d} @opindex -d @opindex --delimiter Use the character @var{d} as input field separator (default: whitespace). @emph{Note}: Using non-default delimiter turns off automatic padding. @item --field=@var{fields} @opindex --field Convert the number in input field @var{fields} (default: 1). @var{fields} supports @command{cut} style field ranges: @example N N'th field, counted from 1 N- from N'th field, to end of line N-M from N'th to M'th field (inclusive) -M from first to M'th field (inclusive) - all fields @end example @item --format=@var{format} @opindex --format Use printf-style floating FORMAT string. The @var{format} string must contain one @samp{%f} directive, optionally with @samp{'}, @samp{-}, @samp{0}, width or precision modifiers. The @samp{'} modifier will enable @option{--grouping}, the @samp{-} modifier will enable left-aligned @option{--padding} and the width modifier will enable right-aligned @option{--padding}. The @samp{0} width modifier (without the @samp{-} modifier) will generate leading zeros on the number, up to the specified width. A precision specification like @samp{%.1f} will override the precision determined from the input data or set due to @option{--to} option auto scaling. @item --from=@var{unit} @opindex --from Auto-scales input numbers according to @var{unit}. See UNITS below. The default is no scaling, meaning suffixes (e.g. @samp{M}, @samp{G}) will trigger an error. @item --from-unit=@var{n} @opindex --from-unit Specify the input unit size (instead of the default 1). Use this option when the input numbers represent other units (e.g. if the input number @samp{10} represents 10 units of 512 bytes, use @samp{--from-unit=512}). Suffixes are handled as with @samp{--from=auto}. @item --grouping @opindex --grouping Group digits in output numbers according to the current locale's grouping rules (e.g @emph{Thousands Separator} character, commonly @samp{.} (dot) or @samp{,} comma). This option has no effect in @samp{POSIX/C} locale. @item --header[=@var{n}] @opindex --header @opindex --header=N Print the first @var{n} (default: 1) lines without any conversion. @item --invalid=@var{mode} @opindex --invalid The default action on input errors is to exit immediately with status code 2. @option{--invalid=@samp{abort}} explicitly specifies this default mode. With a @var{mode} of @samp{fail}, print a warning for @emph{each} conversion error, and exit with status 2. With a @var{mode} of @samp{warn}, exit with status 0, even in the presence of conversion errors, and with a @var{mode} of @samp{ignore} do not even print diagnostics. @item --padding=@var{n} @opindex --padding Pad the output numbers to @var{n} characters, by adding spaces. If @var{n} is a positive number, numbers will be right-aligned. If @var{n} is a negative number, numbers will be left-aligned. By default, numbers are automatically aligned based on the input line's width (only with the default delimiter). @item --round=@var{method} @opindex --round @opindex --round=up @opindex --round=down @opindex --round=from-zero @opindex --round=towards-zero @opindex --round=nearest When converting number representations, round the number according to @var{method}, which can be @samp{up}, @samp{down}, @samp{from-zero} (the default), @samp{towards-zero}, @samp{nearest}. @item --suffix=@var{suffix} @opindex --suffix Add @samp{SUFFIX} to the output numbers, and accept optional @samp{SUFFIX} in input numbers. @item --to=@var{unit} @opindex --to Auto-scales output numbers according to @var{unit}. See @emph{Units} below. The default is no scaling, meaning all the digits of the number are printed. @item --to-unit=@var{n} @opindex --to-unit Specify the output unit size (instead of the default 1). Use this option when the output numbers represent other units (e.g. to represent @samp{4,000,000} bytes in blocks of 1KB, use @samp{--to=si --to-unit=1000}). Suffixes are handled as with @samp{--from=auto}. @optZeroTerminated @newlineFieldSeparator @end table @subsection Possible @var{unit}s: The following are the possible @var{unit} options with @option{--from=UNITS} and @option{--to=UNITS}: @table @var @item none No scaling is performed. For input numbers, no suffixes are accepted, and any trailing characters following the number will trigger an error. For output numbers, all digits of the numbers will be printed. @item si Auto-scale numbers according to the @emph{International System of Units (SI)} standard. For input numbers, accept one of the following suffixes. For output numbers, values larger than 1000 will be rounded, and printed with one of the following suffixes: @example @samp{K} => @math{1000^1 = 10^3} (Kilo) @samp{M} => @math{1000^2 = 10^6} (Mega) @samp{G} => @math{1000^3 = 10^9} (Giga) @samp{T} => @math{1000^4 = 10^{12}} (Tera) @samp{P} => @math{1000^5 = 10^{15}} (Peta) @samp{E} => @math{1000^6 = 10^{18}} (Exa) @samp{Z} => @math{1000^7 = 10^{21}} (Zetta) @samp{Y} => @math{1000^8 = 10^{24}} (Yotta) @end example @item iec Auto-scale numbers according to the @emph{International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)} standard. For input numbers, accept one of the following suffixes. For output numbers, values larger than 1024 will be rounded, and printed with one of the following suffixes: @example @samp{K} => @math{1024^1 = 2^{10}} (Kibi) @samp{M} => @math{1024^2 = 2^{20}} (Mebi) @samp{G} => @math{1024^3 = 2^{30}} (Gibi) @samp{T} => @math{1024^4 = 2^{40}} (Tebi) @samp{P} => @math{1024^5 = 2^{50}} (Pebi) @samp{E} => @math{1024^6 = 2^{60}} (Exbi) @samp{Z} => @math{1024^7 = 2^{70}} (Zebi) @samp{Y} => @math{1024^8 = 2^{80}} (Yobi) @end example The @option{iec} option uses a single letter suffix (e.g. @samp{G}), which is not fully standard, as the @emph{iec} standard recommends a two-letter symbol (e.g @samp{Gi}) - but in practice, this method common. Compare with the @option{iec-i} option. @item iec-i Auto-scale numbers according to the @emph{International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)} standard. For input numbers, accept one of the following suffixes. For output numbers, values larger than 1024 will be rounded, and printed with one of the following suffixes: @example @samp{Ki} => @math{1024^1 = 2^{10}} (Kibi) @samp{Mi} => @math{1024^2 = 2^{20}} (Mebi) @samp{Gi} => @math{1024^3 = 2^{30}} (Gibi) @samp{Ti} => @math{1024^4 = 2^{40}} (Tebi) @samp{Pi} => @math{1024^5 = 2^{50}} (Pebi) @samp{Ei} => @math{1024^6 = 2^{60}} (Exbi) @samp{Zi} => @math{1024^7 = 2^{70}} (Zebi) @samp{Yi} => @math{1024^8 = 2^{80}} (Yobi) @end example The @option{iec-i} option uses a two-letter suffix symbol (e.g. @samp{Gi}), as the @emph{iec} standard recommends, but this is not always common in practice. Compare with the @option{iec} option. @item auto @samp{auto} can only be used with @option{--from}. With this method, numbers with @samp{K},@samp{M},@samp{G},@samp{T},@samp{P},@samp{E},@samp{Z},@samp{Y} suffixes are interpreted as @emph{SI} values, and numbers with @samp{Ki}, @samp{Mi},@samp{Gi},@samp{Ti},@samp{Pi},@samp{Ei},@samp{Zi},@samp{Yi} suffixes are interpreted as @emph{IEC} values. @end table @subsection Examples of using @command{numfmt} Converting a single number from/to @emph{human} representation: @example $ numfmt --to=si 500000 500K $ numfmt --to=iec 500000 489K $ numfmt --to=iec-i 500000 489Ki $ numfmt --from=si 1M 1000000 $ numfmt --from=iec 1M 1048576 # with '--from=auto', M=Mega, Mi=Mebi $ numfmt --from=auto 1M 1000000 $ numfmt --from=auto 1Mi 1048576 @end example Converting from @samp{SI} to @samp{IEC} scales (e.g. when a harddisk capacity is advertised as @samp{1TB}, while checking the drive's capacity gives lower values): @example $ numfmt --from=si --to=iec 1T 932G @end example Converting a single field from an input file / piped input (these contrived examples are for demonstration purposes only, as both @command{ls} and @command{df} support the @option{--human-readable} option to output sizes in human-readable format): @example # Third field (file size) will be shown in SI representation $ ls -log | numfmt --field 3 --header --to=si | head -n4 -rw-r--r-- 1 94K Aug 23 2011 ABOUT-NLS -rw-r--r-- 1 3.7K Jan 7 16:15 AUTHORS -rw-r--r-- 1 36K Jun 1 2011 COPYING -rw-r--r-- 1 0 Jan 7 15:15 ChangeLog # Second field (size) will be shown in IEC representation $ df --block-size=1 | numfmt --field 2 --header --to=iec | head -n4 File system 1B-blocks Used Available Use% Mounted on rootfs 132G 104741408 26554036 80% / tmpfs 794M 7580 804960 1% /run/shm /dev/sdb1 694G 651424756 46074696 94% /home @end example Output can be tweaked using @option{--padding} or @option{--format}: @example # Pad to 10 characters, right-aligned $ du -s * | numfmt --to=si --padding=10 2.5K config.log 108 config.status 1.7K configure 20 configure.ac # Pad to 10 characters, left-aligned $ du -s * | numfmt --to=si --padding=-10 2.5K config.log 108 config.status 1.7K configure 20 configure.ac # Pad to 10 characters, left-aligned, using 'format' $ du -s * | numfmt --to=si --format="%10f" 2.5K config.log 108 config.status 1.7K configure 20 configure.ac # Pad to 10 characters, left-aligned, using 'format' $ du -s * | numfmt --to=si --padding="%-10f" 2.5K config.log 108 config.status 1.7K configure 20 configure.ac @end example With locales that support grouping digits, using @option{--grouping} or @option{--format} enables grouping. In @samp{POSIX} locale, grouping is silently ignored: @example $ LC_ALL=C numfmt --from=iec --grouping 2G 2147483648 $ LC_ALL=en_US.utf8 numfmt --from=iec --grouping 2G 2,147,483,648 $ LC_ALL=ta_IN numfmt --from=iec --grouping 2G 2,14,74,83,648 $ LC_ALL=C ./src/numfmt --from=iec --format="==%'15f==" 2G == 2147483648== $ LC_ALL=en_US.utf8 ./src/numfmt --from=iec --format="==%'15f==" 2G == 2,147,483,648== $ LC_ALL=en_US.utf8 ./src/numfmt --from=iec --format="==%'-15f==" 2G ==2,147,483,648 == $ LC_ALL=ta_IN ./src/numfmt --from=iec --format="==%'15f==" 2G == 2,14,74,83,648== @end example @node seq invocation @section @command{seq}: Print numeric sequences @pindex seq @cindex numeric sequences @cindex sequence of numbers @command{seq} prints a sequence of numbers to standard output. Synopses: @example seq [@var{option}]@dots{} @var{last} seq [@var{option}]@dots{} @var{first} @var{last} seq [@var{option}]@dots{} @var{first} @var{increment} @var{last} @end example @command{seq} prints the numbers from @var{first} to @var{last} by @var{increment}. By default, each number is printed on a separate line. When @var{increment} is not specified, it defaults to @samp{1}, even when @var{first} is larger than @var{last}. @var{first} also defaults to @samp{1}. So @code{seq 1} prints @samp{1}, but @code{seq 0} and @code{seq 10 5} produce no output. The sequence of numbers ends when the sum of the current number and @var{increment} would become greater than @var{last}, so @code{seq 1 10 10} only produces @samp{1}. @var{increment} must not be @samp{0}; use @command{yes} to get repeated output of a constant number. @var{first}, @var{increment} and @var{last} must not be @code{NaN}. Floating-point numbers may be specified. @xref{Floating point}. The program accepts the following options. Also see @ref{Common options}. Options must precede operands. @table @samp @item -f @var{format} @itemx --format=@var{format} @opindex -f @opindex --format @cindex formatting of numbers in @command{seq} Print all numbers using @var{format}. @var{format} must contain exactly one of the @samp{printf}-style floating point conversion specifications @samp{%a}, @samp{%e}, @samp{%f}, @samp{%g}, @samp{%A}, @samp{%E}, @samp{%F}, @samp{%G}@. The @samp{%} may be followed by zero or more flags taken from the set @samp{-+#0 '}, then an optional width containing one or more digits, then an optional precision consisting of a @samp{.} followed by zero or more digits. @var{format} may also contain any number of @samp{%%} conversion specifications. All conversion specifications have the same meaning as with @samp{printf}. The default format is derived from @var{first}, @var{step}, and @var{last}. If these all use a fixed point decimal representation, the default format is @samp{%.@var{p}f}, where @var{p} is the minimum precision that can represent the output numbers exactly. Otherwise, the default format is @samp{%g}. @item -s @var{string} @itemx --separator=@var{string} @opindex -s @opindex --separator @cindex separator for numbers in @command{seq} Separate numbers with @var{string}; default is a newline. The output always terminates with a newline. @item -w @itemx --equal-width @opindex -w @opindex --equal-width Print all numbers with the same width, by padding with leading zeros. @var{first}, @var{step}, and @var{last} should all use a fixed point decimal representation. (To have other kinds of padding, use @option{--format}). @end table You can get finer-grained control over output with @option{-f}: @example $ seq -f '(%9.2E)' -9e5 1.1e6 1.3e6 (-9.00E+05) ( 2.00E+05) ( 1.30E+06) @end example If you want hexadecimal integer output, you can use @command{printf} to perform the conversion: @example $ printf '%x\n' $(seq 1048575 1024 1050623) fffff 1003ff 1007ff @end example For very long lists of numbers, use xargs to avoid system limitations on the length of an argument list: @example $ seq 1000000 | xargs printf '%x\n' | tail -n 3 f423e f423f f4240 @end example To generate octal output, use the printf @code{%o} format instead of @code{%x}. On most systems, seq can produce whole-number output for values up to at least @math{2^{53}}. Larger integers are approximated. The details differ depending on your floating-point implementation. @xref{Floating point}. A common case is that @command{seq} works with integers through @math{2^{64}}, and larger integers may not be numerically correct: @example $ seq 50000000000000000000 2 50000000000000000004 50000000000000000000 50000000000000000000 50000000000000000004 @end example However, note that when limited to non-negative whole numbers, an increment of 1 and no format-specifying option, seq can print arbitrarily large numbers. Be careful when using @command{seq} with outlandish values: otherwise you may see surprising results, as @command{seq} uses floating point internally. For example, on the x86 platform, where the internal representation uses a 64-bit fraction, the command: @example seq 1 0.0000000000000000001 1.0000000000000000009 @end example outputs 1.0000000000000000007 twice and skips 1.0000000000000000008. @exitstatus @node File permissions @chapter File permissions @include perm.texi @node File timestamps @chapter File timestamps @cindex atime @cindex birthtime @cindex ctime @cindex mtime Standard POSIX files have three timestamps: the access timestamp (atime) of the last read, the modification timestamp (mtime) of the last write, and the status change timestamp (ctime) of the last change to the file's meta-information. Some file systems support a fourth time: the birth timestamp (birthtime) of when the file was created; by definition, birthtime never changes. One common example of a ctime change is when the permissions of a file change. Changing the permissions doesn't access the file, so atime doesn't change, nor does it modify the file, so the mtime doesn't change. Yet, something about the file itself has changed, and this must be noted somewhere. This is the job of the ctime field. This is necessary, so that, for example, a backup program can make a fresh copy of the file, including the new permissions value. Another operation that modifies a file's ctime without affecting the others is renaming. Naively, a file's atime, mtime, and ctime are set to the current time whenever you read, write, or change the attributes of the file respectively, and searching a directory counts as reading it. A file's atime and mtime can also be set directly, via the @command{touch} command (@pxref{touch invocation}). In practice, though, timestamps are not updated quite that way. For efficiency reasons, many systems are lazy about updating atimes: when a program accesses a file, they may delay updating the file's atime, or may not update the file's atime if the file has been accessed recently, or may not update the atime at all. Similar laziness, though typically not quite so extreme, applies to mtimes and ctimes. Some systems emulate timestamps instead of supporting them directly, and these emulations may disagree with the naive interpretation. For example, a system may fake an atime or ctime by using the mtime. @cindex clock skew The determination of what time is ``current'' depends on the platform. Platforms with network file systems often use different clocks for the operating system and for file systems; because updates typically uses file systems' clocks by default, clock skew can cause the resulting file timestamps to appear to be in a program's ``future'' or ``past''. @cindex file timestamp resolution When the system updates a file timestamp to a desired time @var{t} (which is either the current time, or a time specified via the @command{touch} command), there are several reasons the file's timestamp may be set to a value that differs from @var{t}. First, @var{t} may have a higher resolution than supported. Second, a file system may use different resolutions for different types of times. Third, file timestamps may use a different resolution than operating system timestamps. Fourth, the operating system primitives used to update timestamps may employ yet a different resolution. For example, in theory a file system might use 10-microsecond resolution for access timestamp and 100-nanosecond resolution for modification timestamp, and the operating system might use nanosecond resolution for the current time and microsecond resolution for the primitive that @command{touch} uses to set a file's timestamp to an arbitrary value. @include parse-datetime.texi @c What's GNU? @c Arnold Robbins @node Opening the software toolbox @chapter Opening the Software Toolbox An earlier version of this chapter appeared in @uref{http://www.linuxjournal.com/article.php?sid=2762, the @cite{What's GNU@?} column of the June 1994 @cite{Linux Journal}}. It was written by Arnold Robbins. @menu * Toolbox introduction:: Toolbox introduction * I/O redirection:: I/O redirection * The who command:: The @command{who} command * The cut command:: The @command{cut} command * The sort command:: The @command{sort} command * The uniq command:: The @command{uniq} command * Putting the tools together:: Putting the tools together @end menu @node Toolbox introduction @unnumberedsec Toolbox Introduction This month's column is only peripherally related to the GNU Project, in that it describes a number of the GNU tools on your GNU/Linux system and how they might be used. What it's really about is the ``Software Tools'' philosophy of program development and usage. The software tools philosophy was an important and integral concept in the initial design and development of Unix (of which Linux and GNU are essentially clones). Unfortunately, in the modern day press of Internetworking and flashy GUIs, it seems to have fallen by the wayside. This is a shame, since it provides a powerful mental model for solving many kinds of problems. Many people carry a Swiss Army knife around in their pants pockets (or purse). A Swiss Army knife is a handy tool to have: it has several knife blades, a screwdriver, tweezers, toothpick, nail file, corkscrew, and perhaps a number of other things on it. For the everyday, small miscellaneous jobs where you need a simple, general purpose tool, it's just the thing. On the other hand, an experienced carpenter doesn't build a house using a Swiss Army knife. Instead, he has a toolbox chock full of specialized tools---a saw, a hammer, a screwdriver, a plane, and so on. And he knows exactly when and where to use each tool; you won't catch him hammering nails with the handle of his screwdriver. The Unix developers at Bell Labs were all professional programmers and trained computer scientists. They had found that while a one-size-fits-all program might appeal to a user because there's only one program to use, in practice such programs are @enumerate a @item difficult to write, @item difficult to maintain and debug, and @item difficult to extend to meet new situations. @end enumerate Instead, they felt that programs should be specialized tools. In short, each program ``should do one thing well.'' No more and no less. Such programs are simpler to design, write, and get right---they only do one thing. Furthermore, they found that with the right machinery for hooking programs together, that the whole was greater than the sum of the parts. By combining several special purpose programs, you could accomplish a specific task that none of the programs was designed for, and accomplish it much more quickly and easily than if you had to write a special purpose program. We will see some (classic) examples of this further on in the column. (An important additional point was that, if necessary, take a detour and build any software tools you may need first, if you don't already have something appropriate in the toolbox.) @node I/O redirection @unnumberedsec I/O Redirection Hopefully, you are familiar with the basics of I/O redirection in the shell, in particular the concepts of ``standard input,'' ``standard output,'' and ``standard error''. Briefly, ``standard input'' is a data source, where data comes from. A program should not need to either know or care if the data source is a disk file, a keyboard, a magnetic tape, or even a punched card reader. Similarly, ``standard output'' is a data sink, where data goes to. The program should neither know nor care where this might be. Programs that only read their standard input, do something to the data, and then send it on, are called @dfn{filters}, by analogy to filters in a water pipeline. With the Unix shell, it's very easy to set up data pipelines: @smallexample program_to_create_data | filter1 | ... | filterN > final.pretty.data @end smallexample We start out by creating the raw data; each filter applies some successive transformation to the data, until by the time it comes out of the pipeline, it is in the desired form. This is fine and good for standard input and standard output. Where does the standard error come in to play? Well, think about @command{filter1} in the pipeline above. What happens if it encounters an error in the data it sees? If it writes an error message to standard output, it will just disappear down the pipeline into @command{filter2}'s input, and the user will probably never see it. So programs need a place where they can send error messages so that the user will notice them. This is standard error, and it is usually connected to your console or window, even if you have redirected standard output of your program away from your screen. For filter programs to work together, the format of the data has to be agreed upon. The most straightforward and easiest format to use is simply lines of text. Unix data files are generally just streams of bytes, with lines delimited by the ASCII LF (Line Feed) character, conventionally called a ``newline'' in the Unix literature. (This is @code{'\n'} if you're a C programmer.) This is the format used by all the traditional filtering programs. (Many earlier operating systems had elaborate facilities and special purpose programs for managing binary data. Unix has always shied away from such things, under the philosophy that it's easiest to simply be able to view and edit your data with a text editor.) OK, enough introduction. Let's take a look at some of the tools, and then we'll see how to hook them together in interesting ways. In the following discussion, we will only present those command line options that interest us. As you should always do, double check your system documentation for the full story. @node The who command @unnumberedsec The @command{who} Command The first program is the @command{who} command. By itself, it generates a list of the users who are currently logged in. Although I'm writing this on a single-user system, we'll pretend that several people are logged in: @example $ who @print{} arnold console Jan 22 19:57 @print{} miriam ttyp0 Jan 23 14:19(:0.0) @print{} bill ttyp1 Jan 21 09:32(:0.0) @print{} arnold ttyp2 Jan 23 20:48(:0.0) @end example Here, the @samp{$} is the usual shell prompt, at which I typed @samp{who}. There are three people logged in, and I am logged in twice. On traditional Unix systems, user names are never more than eight characters long. This little bit of trivia will be useful later. The output of @command{who} is nice, but the data is not all that exciting. @node The cut command @unnumberedsec The @command{cut} Command The next program we'll look at is the @command{cut} command. This program cuts out columns or fields of input data. For example, we can tell it to print just the login name and full name from the @file{/etc/passwd} file. The @file{/etc/passwd} file has seven fields, separated by colons: @example arnold:xyzzy:2076:10:Arnold D. Robbins:/home/arnold:/bin/bash @end example To get the first and fifth fields, we would use @command{cut} like this: @example $ cut -d: -f1,5 /etc/passwd @print{} root:Operator @dots{} @print{} arnold:Arnold D. Robbins @print{} miriam:Miriam A. Robbins @dots{} @end example With the @option{-c} option, @command{cut} will cut out specific characters (i.e., columns) in the input lines. This is useful for input data that has fixed width fields, and does not have a field separator. For example, list the Monday dates for the current month: @c Is using cal ok? Looked at gcal, but I don't like it. @example $ cal | cut -c 3-5 @print{}Mo @print{} @print{} 6 @print{} 13 @print{} 20 @print{} 27 @end example @node The sort command @unnumberedsec The @command{sort} Command Next we'll look at the @command{sort} command. This is one of the most powerful commands on a Unix-style system; one that you will often find yourself using when setting up fancy data plumbing. The @command{sort} command reads and sorts each file named on the command line. It then merges the sorted data and writes it to standard output. It will read standard input if no files are given on the command line (thus making it into a filter). The sort is based on the character collating sequence or based on user-supplied ordering criteria. @node The uniq command @unnumberedsec The @command{uniq} Command Finally (at least for now), we'll look at the @command{uniq} program. When sorting data, you will often end up with duplicate lines, lines that are identical. Usually, all you need is one instance of each line. This is where @command{uniq} comes in. The @command{uniq} program reads its standard input. It prints only one copy of each repeated line. It does have several options. Later on, we'll use the @option{-c} option, which prints each unique line, preceded by a count of the number of times that line occurred in the input. @node Putting the tools together @unnumberedsec Putting the Tools Together Now, let's suppose this is a large ISP server system with dozens of users logged in. The management wants the system administrator to write a program that will generate a sorted list of logged in users. Furthermore, even if a user is logged in multiple times, his or her name should only show up in the output once. The administrator could sit down with the system documentation and write a C program that did this. It would take perhaps a couple of hundred lines of code and about two hours to write it, test it, and debug it. However, knowing the software toolbox, the administrator can instead start out by generating just a list of logged on users: @example $ who | cut -c1-8 @print{} arnold @print{} miriam @print{} bill @print{} arnold @end example Next, sort the list: @example $ who | cut -c1-8 | sort @print{} arnold @print{} arnold @print{} bill @print{} miriam @end example Finally, run the sorted list through @command{uniq}, to weed out duplicates: @example $ who | cut -c1-8 | sort | uniq @print{} arnold @print{} bill @print{} miriam @end example The @command{sort} command actually has a @option{-u} option that does what @command{uniq} does. However, @command{uniq} has other uses for which one cannot substitute @samp{sort -u}. The administrator puts this pipeline into a shell script, and makes it available for all the users on the system (@samp{#} is the system administrator, or @code{root}, prompt): @example # cat > /usr/local/bin/listusers who | cut -c1-8 | sort | uniq ^D # chmod +x /usr/local/bin/listusers @end example There are four major points to note here. First, with just four programs, on one command line, the administrator was able to save about two hours worth of work. Furthermore, the shell pipeline is just about as efficient as the C program would be, and it is much more efficient in terms of programmer time. People time is much more expensive than computer time, and in our modern ``there's never enough time to do everything'' society, saving two hours of programmer time is no mean feat. Second, it is also important to emphasize that with the @emph{combination} of the tools, it is possible to do a special purpose job never imagined by the authors of the individual programs. Third, it is also valuable to build up your pipeline in stages, as we did here. This allows you to view the data at each stage in the pipeline, which helps you acquire the confidence that you are indeed using these tools correctly. Finally, by bundling the pipeline in a shell script, other users can use your command, without having to remember the fancy plumbing you set up for them. In terms of how you run them, shell scripts and compiled programs are indistinguishable. After the previous warm-up exercise, we'll look at two additional, more complicated pipelines. For them, we need to introduce two more tools. The first is the @command{tr} command, which stands for ``transliterate.'' The @command{tr} command works on a character-by-character basis, changing characters. Normally it is used for things like mapping upper case to lower case: @example $ echo ThIs ExAmPlE HaS MIXED case! | tr '[:upper:]' '[:lower:]' @print{} this example has mixed case! @end example There are several options of interest: @table @code @item -c work on the complement of the listed characters, i.e., operations apply to characters not in the given set @item -d delete characters in the first set from the output @item -s squeeze repeated characters in the output into just one character. @end table We will be using all three options in a moment. The other command we'll look at is @command{comm}. The @command{comm} command takes two sorted input files as input data, and prints out the files' lines in three columns. The output columns are the data lines unique to the first file, the data lines unique to the second file, and the data lines that are common to both. The @option{-1}, @option{-2}, and @option{-3} command line options @emph{omit} the respective columns. (This is non-intuitive and takes a little getting used to.) For example: @example $ cat f1 @print{} 11111 @print{} 22222 @print{} 33333 @print{} 44444 $ cat f2 @print{} 00000 @print{} 22222 @print{} 33333 @print{} 55555 $ comm f1 f2 @print{} 00000 @print{} 11111 @print{} 22222 @print{} 33333 @print{} 44444 @print{} 55555 @end example The file name @file{-} tells @command{comm} to read standard input instead of a regular file. Now we're ready to build a fancy pipeline. The first application is a word frequency counter. This helps an author determine if he or she is over-using certain words. The first step is to change the case of all the letters in our input file to one case. ``The'' and ``the'' are the same word when doing counting. @example $ tr '[:upper:]' '[:lower:]' < whats.gnu | ... @end example The next step is to get rid of punctuation. Quoted words and unquoted words should be treated identically; it's easiest to just get the punctuation out of the way. @smallexample $ tr '[:upper:]' '[:lower:]' < whats.gnu | tr -cd '[:alnum:]_ \n' | ... @end smallexample The second @command{tr} command operates on the complement of the listed characters, which are all the letters, the digits, the underscore, and the blank. The @samp{\n} represents the newline character; it has to be left alone. (The ASCII tab character should also be included for good measure in a production script.) At this point, we have data consisting of words separated by blank space. The words only contain alphanumeric characters (and the underscore). The next step is break the data apart so that we have one word per line. This makes the counting operation much easier, as we will see shortly. @smallexample $ tr '[:upper:]' '[:lower:]' < whats.gnu | tr -cd '[:alnum:]_ \n' | > tr -s ' ' '\n' | ... @end smallexample This command turns blanks into newlines. The @option{-s} option squeezes multiple newline characters in the output into just one, removing blank lines. (The @samp{>} is the shell's ``secondary prompt.'' This is what the shell prints when it notices you haven't finished typing in all of a command.) We now have data consisting of one word per line, no punctuation, all one case. We're ready to count each word: @smallexample $ tr '[:upper:]' '[:lower:]' < whats.gnu | tr -cd '[:alnum:]_ \n' | > tr -s ' ' '\n' | sort | uniq -c | ... @end smallexample At this point, the data might look something like this: @example 60 a 2 able 6 about 1 above 2 accomplish 1 acquire 1 actually 2 additional @end example The output is sorted by word, not by count! What we want is the most frequently used words first. Fortunately, this is easy to accomplish, with the help of two more @command{sort} options: @table @code @item -n do a numeric sort, not a textual one @item -r reverse the order of the sort @end table The final pipeline looks like this: @smallexample $ tr '[:upper:]' '[:lower:]' < whats.gnu | tr -cd '[:alnum:]_ \n' | > tr -s ' ' '\n' | sort | uniq -c | sort -n -r @print{} 156 the @print{} 60 a @print{} 58 to @print{} 51 of @print{} 51 and @dots{} @end smallexample Whew! That's a lot to digest. Yet, the same principles apply. With six commands, on two lines (really one long one split for convenience), we've created a program that does something interesting and useful, in much less time than we could have written a C program to do the same thing. A minor modification to the above pipeline can give us a simple spelling checker! To determine if you've spelled a word correctly, all you have to do is look it up in a dictionary. If it is not there, then chances are that your spelling is incorrect. So, we need a dictionary. The conventional location for a dictionary is @file{/usr/dict/words}. On my GNU/Linux system,@footnote{Redhat Linux 6.1, for the November 2000 revision of this article.} this is a sorted, 45,402 word dictionary. Now, how to compare our file with the dictionary? As before, we generate a sorted list of words, one per line: @smallexample $ tr '[:upper:]' '[:lower:]' < whats.gnu | tr -cd '[:alnum:]_ \n' | > tr -s ' ' '\n' | sort -u | ... @end smallexample Now, all we need is a list of words that are @emph{not} in the dictionary. Here is where the @command{comm} command comes in. @smallexample $ tr '[:upper:]' '[:lower:]' < whats.gnu | tr -cd '[:alnum:]_ \n' | > tr -s ' ' '\n' | sort -u | > comm -23 - /usr/dict/words @end smallexample The @option{-2} and @option{-3} options eliminate lines that are only in the dictionary (the second file), and lines that are in both files. Lines only in the first file (standard input, our stream of words), are words that are not in the dictionary. These are likely candidates for spelling errors. This pipeline was the first cut at a production spelling checker on Unix. There are some other tools that deserve brief mention. @table @command @item grep search files for text that matches a regular expression @item wc count lines, words, characters @item tee a T-fitting for data pipes, copies data to files and to standard output @item sed the stream editor, an advanced tool @item awk a data manipulation language, another advanced tool @end table The software tools philosophy also espoused the following bit of advice: ``Let someone else do the hard part.'' This means, take something that gives you most of what you need, and then massage it the rest of the way until it's in the form that you want. To summarize: @enumerate 1 @item Each program should do one thing well. No more, no less. @item Combining programs with appropriate plumbing leads to results where the whole is greater than the sum of the parts. It also leads to novel uses of programs that the authors might never have imagined. @item Programs should never print extraneous header or trailer data, since these could get sent on down a pipeline. (A point we didn't mention earlier.) @item Let someone else do the hard part. @item Know your toolbox! Use each program appropriately. If you don't have an appropriate tool, build one. @end enumerate All the programs discussed are available as described in @uref{https://www.gnu.org/software/coreutils/coreutils.html, GNU core utilities}. None of what I have presented in this column is new. The Software Tools philosophy was first introduced in the book @cite{Software Tools}, by Brian Kernighan and P.J. Plauger (Addison-Wesley, ISBN 0-201-03669-X). This book showed how to write and use software tools. It was written in 1976, using a preprocessor for FORTRAN named @command{ratfor} (RATional FORtran). At the time, C was not as ubiquitous as it is now; FORTRAN was. The last chapter presented a @command{ratfor} to FORTRAN processor, written in @command{ratfor}. @command{ratfor} looks an awful lot like C; if you know C, you won't have any problem following the code. In 1981, the book was updated and made available as @cite{Software Tools in Pascal} (Addison-Wesley, ISBN 0-201-10342-7). Both books are still in print and are well worth reading if you're a programmer. They certainly made a major change in how I view programming. The programs in both books are available from @uref{https://www.cs.princeton.edu/~bwk/, Brian Kernighan's home page}. For a number of years, there was an active Software Tools Users Group, whose members had ported the original @command{ratfor} programs to essentially every computer system with a FORTRAN compiler. The popularity of the group waned in the middle 1980s as Unix began to spread beyond universities. With the current proliferation of GNU code and other clones of Unix programs, these programs now receive little attention; modern C versions are much more efficient and do more than these programs do. Nevertheless, as exposition of good programming style, and evangelism for a still-valuable philosophy, these books are unparalleled, and I recommend them highly. Acknowledgment: I would like to express my gratitude to Brian Kernighan of Bell Labs, the original Software Toolsmith, for reviewing this column. @node GNU Free Documentation License @appendix GNU Free Documentation License @include fdl.texi @node Concept index @unnumbered Index @printindex cp @bye @c Local variables: @c texinfo-column-for-description: 32 @c End: